Home

HP E1413C/E1313A High Speed A/D User`s Manual

1. P2 Qaogaaaaaaaaoouguapaaguaaou Ars pw pupa e eps O 10 12 48 49 50 51 52 55 54 55 HLGHLGHLGH EGHLGHLGHLOGMHLGOG GLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLH Uy en 4 52552525955 50 H 0006665000060565000669600 H
2. External Connections 1KQ GO 1 i 1 GND to GRD Jumper 10 removable For each T SCP Position 1KQ G7o 1 uF GND to GRD Jumper 10 removable 1 Figure 2 9 GRD GND Circuitry on Terminal Module Removing Guard to Ground on Channel 00 CT jd E I E T UO Q qo qos oe qo STEEL NEL Tere eT TT js os 10 11 12 1 131 14115 49 so 51 52 53 55 EE uou ool ouo pe HH E s il 4l 055505550 z H E n Ea 24 32 3 34 5 36 37 38 39 9 H GLHGLHCLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLH E 00000000000500000000000 Figure 2 10 Grounding the Guard Terminal Chapter 2 Field Wiring 45 Connecting the On Board Thermistor Figures 2 11 and 2 12 show how to use the HP Scanning A D Converter module to make temperature measurements with or without using the on board thermistor The thermistor is used for reference junction temperature sensing
3. Channel 16 31 Channel 32 47 GND 50 i 25 TR H32 1 e 206 132 L31 49 e e 24 H31 G4 2 27 G4 G3 48 e 23 G3 g n H33 3 28 L33 L30 47 22 H30 H34 4 22 134 29 46 ie 21 H29 04 5 30 64 G3 45 e fe 20 G3 H35 6 e 31 L35 L28 44 19 H28 97 H36 7 32 L36 127 43 18 H27 a gt G4 8 33 64 63 42 e 17 G3 gt H37 9 34 137 126 40 e 16 H26 8 H38 10 e 35 138 125 40 fe 15 H25 94 11 e 36 G4 63 39 fel 14 G3 H39 12 e 37 139 L24 38 fei 13 H24 TEM H40 13 38 L40 123 37 12 H23 65 14 3995 G5 G2 36 e 11 G2 41 15 e 40 141 122 35 10 H22 i H42 16 41 L42 L21 34 9 H21 65 17 42 G5 G2 33 e 8 G2 18 e 43 L43 L20 32 7 H20 T 44 19 e 44 L44
4. STATus OPERation EVENt reads clears register 1 e STATus OPERation ENABle sets mask Calibrating 0 tap 1 tn 2 dc 3 En Measuring 4 5 6 fc c EE L 7 L Jd 18 m Scan Complete 8 EE 8 SCP Trigger 9 E FIFO Half Full 49 fee Limit Test Exceeded 44 d 12 t 13 tp 14 15 qap Condition Filter Event Enable real time latched 1 enable QUE Questionable Data MAV Message Available ESB Standard Event RQS Request Service OPR Operation Status Summary Bit STANDARD EVENT GROUP Operation Complete Request Control Query Error Device Dependent Error Execution Error Command Error User request Power On Figure 4 6 HP E1313 E1413 Status System Event Enable atched 1 0 2 nc 3 S 2 4 5 6 7 ESR ESE lt mask_value gt ESE 124 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Table 4 2 Questionable Data Group Bit Bit Value Event Name Descr
5. oooooo 5 55 28 6 29 6 30 6 Two HP E1586 Terminal Panels Measuring One Thermistor on Each Panel on Reference Channels 100 101 102 132 133 134 Figure 3 11 Left Center and Right Thermistor Measurements on Multiple Panels 98 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 The next two examples measure type K thermocouples One example uses a single Terminal Panel and the other uses two Terminal Panels Example Using a Single Terminal Panel SENS REF THER 5000 1 100 101 102 Measures reference temperature measurements on channels 100 to 102 SENS FUNC TEMP TC K 06 103 131 Defines channels for temperature measurements ROUT SEQ DEF 100 103 107 101 108 123 102 124 131 Defines the scan list Example Using Two Terminal Panels SENS REF THER 5000 1 100 101 102 132 133 134 Measures reference temperature measurements on channels 100 to 102 SENS FUNC TEMP 06 103 131 135 163 Defines channels for temperature measurements ROUT SEQ DEF 100 103 107 101 108 123 102 124 131 132 135 139 133 140 155 134 156 163 Defines the scan list Note that each reference channel 100 101 102 132 133 134 immediately precedes its associated measurement channels in the scan list Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 99 Notes 100 Using the HP E1313 E1
6. Two HP E1586 Terminal Panels using All Thermistors on Each Panel Figure 3 7 Connecting Six Thermistors on Two Panels Measuring Using the measure the center thermistor select an HP E1413C channel as a Center Thermistor reference channel Connect the reference channel s HI and LO to the center thermistor thermistor 2 HI T2S and LO T2S terminals respectively These connections are shown in Figure 3 8 24 56 25 57 w ooooo00 One HP E1586 Terminal Panel Measuring One Thermistor on Reference Channel 100 Figure 3 8 Center Thermistor Measurements on a Single Panel Chapter 3 Using the E1313 E1413 95 If two Terminal Panels are used each panel must be connected as above so that both panels provide reference temperature measurements These connections are shown in Figure 3 9 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 5 AA AABaAe AAPM AA S S
7. Channel Channel Oe p X 5 05 4 22 743 1 Scan 1 Scan 5 CALCulate AVERage ON enables Li Li Li averaging for all channels on HP E1413 cepe Je oe C8 1 1 Scan 2 Scan 6 ge eer AE b ge Speer ar TRIGger COUNt 8 must be greater than or equal to CALC AVER COUNTt Scan 3 Scan 7 In this case TRIG COUNT is a multiple of 4 p Every 4 scans will place averaged channel WC NU NR readings into the FIFO buffer Scan 4 Scan 8 l l 11 last scan 11 pt dod a EA ub UE CALC AVER COUNt 4 sets this value tiiti tiii FIFO 5 SENSe DATAFIFO ALL to read averaged measurements Figure 4 7 Averaging Channel Measurements 132 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Limit Testing The HP E1313 E1413 can test readings to see if they fall within test limits You can program upper and lower test limits for each channel you wish to test You can enable limits testing against upper and lower upper limits only or lower limits only Checking Results You can query the results of limits testing several ways Checking Results with the CALCulate Subsystem Composite Returns a single value A value of one indicates that one or more of the module s tested channels has exceeds its limits Channels Returns an array of 64 values Each value corresponds to one of the module s
8. To GUESS MSS MSS IS e p do EUNT 28 qc H24 H16 H08 HOO L24 L16 08 00 024 G16 908 900 25 H17 09 01 L25 L17 L09 01 025 G17 509 G01 H26 H18 H10 H02 L26 L18 L10 L02 NET G26 G18 G10 G02 H27 H19 H11 H03 L27 L19 L11 L03 Q27 G19 G11 G03 H28 H20 H12 H04 L28 L20 L12 L04 G28 G20 G12 904 H29 H21 H13 H05 L29 L21 L13 05 zZ j G29 921 913 905 H30 H22 H14 H06 L30 L22 114 06 630 G22 G14 G06 H31 H23 H15 H07 1 L31 L23 L15 L07 G31 G23 G15 907 All wiring entering Terminal Module passes under this
9. e LOO H16 1 e 26 116 e GO G2 2 2 e 27 G2 LO1 H17 3 28 117 e Lo2 H18 4 e 29 L18 e e GO G2 5 o 30 G2 e 103 19 6 31 L19 ej e 104 H20 7 32 120 e e GO G2 8 e e 33 G2 e 105 21 9 34 121 106 22 10 35 122 e e GO G2 11 e 36 G2 9 107 H23 12 37 L23 je 108 SMS Ne H24 13 e e 38 L24 i e e G f G3 14 39 G3 SER E e e Log H25 15 40 125 OPTION B 4 e L10 H26 16 41 L26 ASF ej e G i G3 17 e 42 HE ej e 111 i H27 18 e 43 L27 Chan 5 e e Li2 H28 19 44 128 9 15 E e e G G3 20 45 a 8 L13 1 29 21 e 46 L29 114 H30 22 e e 47 L30 e e G 1 G3 23 ej e 48 G3 e L15 H31 24 49 131 e e LI TRG 25 e 50 GND L 1 1 1 Chan s Se 16 31 Channel 32 47 Channel 48 63 H32 1 26 132 H48 1 e e 26 148 G4 2 e 27 G4 Ge 2 lel 27 06 H33 3 e 28 133 H49 3 e 28 L49 H34 4 e 29 L34 H50 4 29 L50 G4
10. Figure 5 2 Levels of Working Calibration 176 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALibration CALibration CONFigure RESistance Comments Command Sequence CALibration CONFigure RESistance connects the on board reference resistor to the Calibration Bus A four wire measurement of the resistor can be made with an external multimeter connected to the H Cal L Cal H ohm and L ohm terminals on the terminal module or the V H and L terminals on the Cal Bus connector This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e CALibration CONFigure RESistance or CALibration CONFigure VOL Tage commands must be sent before CALibration VALue RESistance or CALibration VALue VOLTage commands The only CALibration command accepted after CALibration CONFigure RESistance is CALibration VALue RESistance e Related Commands CALibration VALue RESistance CALibration STORe ADC CAL CONF RES Connects reference resistor to Calibration Bus Must for CAL CONF RES to complete Now measure reference resistor with external DMM CAL VAL RES measured value Send measured value to module CAL STOR ADC Store cal constants in non volatile memory used only at end of complete cal sequence CALibration CONFigure VOL Tage Parameters CALibration CONFigure VOLTage range zero fs connects the
11. Format IEEE Term Value Meaning ASCii INF 9 9E37 Positive Overload INF 9 9E37 Negative Overload NaN 9 91E37 No Reading REAL 32 INF 7F80000016 Positive Overload INF FF80000016 Negative Overload NaN 7FFFFFFF 16 No Reading REAL 64 INF 7FF000 0016 Positive Overload INF FFFOOO 0016 Negative Overload NaN 7FFF FF16 No Reading PACKed 64 INF 4702 9EAD 3677 AF6F16 Positive Overload 9 0E3710 INF C7D2 9EAD 3677 AF6F1e Negative Overload 9 0 3710 NaN 47D2 A37D CED4 614315 No Reading 9 9123710 Usage FORM DATA REAL FORM DATA REAL 64 FORM DATA ASCII 7 Set format to IEEE 32 bit Floating Point Set format to IEEE 64 bit Floating Point Set format to 7 bit ASCII 200 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 FORMat DATA FORMat FORMat DATA returns the currently set response data format for readings Comments Returned Value Returns RI EAL 32 RI 64 64 7 The C SCPI type returned is string int16 Related Commands FORMat DATA e RST Condition ASCII 7 Usage FORM DATA Returns REAL 32 REAL 64 64 ASC 7 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 201 INITiate INITiate The INITiate command subsystem moves the HP E1313 E1413 from the trigger idle state to the initiated state When initiated the instrument is ready to receive one IMMediate or more
12. Page 229 SENSe DATA CVTable RESet UE YU Y De Ye Xo E don Page 230 SENS DATA EIFOEAEL GUESS Fa ee XU UR XH LE ROS Page 230 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt Page 231 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNCHALF Page 231 SENSE IDATA FIFO HALE uox ee me IER UP ARE Rob Page 232 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE lt gt Page 233 SENSE DATA FFO MODE c GS S uc apum te qe d es n drei Woche IUE NI des Page 233 SENSe DATA FIFO PART n readings s Page 234 SENSe IDATA FIFO RESet wm REGE RAE Ed RS AUR hae Page 235 SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe enable Page 235 SENSe FII TerEEPASSIESTATe deu ES Page 236 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom range G ch list ee Page 236 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence range G ch list Page 237 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple lt type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt Page 238 SENSe FUNCtion RESistance excite current range lt list Page 240 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBENding lt gt lt Page 241 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBPoisson range QG ch
13. Page 251 SENSe STRain UNSTrained lt channel gt Page 251 STATus OPERation CONDition 0 0 Page 254 STATus OPERation ENABle enable gt Page 255 STATus OPERation ENABle i e ome Y om URP eS eS e uh Go ee AE Page 255 STATus OPERation EVENt Page 256 STATus OPERation NTRansition transition gt Page 256 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 151 STATus OPERation NTRansition Page 257 STATus OPERation PTRansition lt _ gt 257 STATus OPERation PTRansition 22 Page 258 STATUS PRES e ao tok Ree PSU BB ee nere p pst eg mue Page 258 STATus QUEStionable CONDition Page 259 STATus QUEStionable ENABle enable mask Page 260 5 2 Page 260 5 5 7 Page 261 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition transition mask Page 261 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Page 262 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt transition_ma
14. TIMer 5 8 BUS 2 3 External Tri Dew 8 IMMediate 2 iudi TTLTrgcn gt 5 E SCP Trig 2 lt gt E Trigger Counter TRIGger COUNt lt count gt Figure 3 4 Logical Arm and Trigger Model Selecting the 1n order to start a measurement scan a trigger event must occur The source 8g Trigger Source this event is selected with the TRIGger SOURce source command The following table explains possible choices for the source parameter Parameter Value Source of Trigger after INITiate command BUS TRIGger IMMediate TRG GET for HP IB EXTernal Trig signal input on terminal module HOLD TRIGger IMMediate IMMediate The trigger signal is always true scan starts when an INITiate command is received SCP SCP Trigger Bus future HP or SCP Breadboard TIMer The internal trigger interval timer must set Arm Source TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines lt gt 0 through 7 86 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Selecting Timer and Continuous Mode Arm Source Notes Note 1 When TRIGger SOURce is not or IMMediate with INITiate CONTinuous ON ARM SOURce must be set to IMMediate the RST condition If not the INITiate command will generate Error 221 Settings conflict 2 When TRIGger SOURce is the trigger timer interval TRIGger TIMe
15. Check VXI Status Register Bit 7 Check Status Register Bit 1 Query Resp Ready Status Register 1 no error Bit 6 Execute ERRFLAGS a normal Query Cmd Read Value From Query Resp Register Figure D 6 Executing Queries Comments The registers used are Status Register base 0416 Parameter Register s base 0A16 0C16 OE 16 Command Register base 08 16 Query Response Register base 0816 This procedure is simply executing a register based command a query command with the addition of monitoring the Query Response Register to determine when the returned value is available 380 Register Based Programming Appendix D Control Processor Figure D 7 shows the relationships between the control processor s states States Reset and Abort are bits written to the R VXI Control Register Base 0416 eset Passed and Ready are bits read from the VXI Status Register Base 0446 Running is a bit read from the Scan Status Register Base 1016 ARM is a Register Based command sent to the Command and Parameter Registers Base 0816 through OE 16 Passed and Ready Abort a st Abot Command clear Abort Abort scan ARM set set complete command Running Running Asserted Asserted trigger event Figure D 7 Control Processor State Diagram Appendix D Register Based Programming 381 Programming Sequ
16. The documentation is clearly written Examples are clear and useful e llustrations are clear and helpful The documentation meets my overall expectations Please write any comments suggestions below be specific 14 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Chapter 1 Getting Started About This Chapter Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 This chapter will explain hardware configuration before installation in a VXIbus mainframe By attending to each of these configuration items your HP Scanning A D Converter module will not need to be removed from its mainframe later Chapter contents include Configuring the HP Scanning A D Converter Module uel eeu ia dus Page 15 e Instrument Drivers Page 29 About Example Programs Page 29 e Verifying a Successful Configuration Page 32 Configuring the HP Scanning A D Converter Module Note There are several aspects to configuring the module before installing it in a VXIbus mainframe They are e Setting the Logical Address 5 Page 16 Installing HP E1313 Signal Conditioning Plug ons Page 18 Installing HP E1413 Signal Conditioning Plug ons Page 22 e Disabling the Input Protect
17. M 1993 Edition ok eee D E Ree September 1993 es es VERS De e Re March 1994 Edition 4 u October 1994 Editon S ee NM MEVERTELPLUPE QU ER NA February 1996 Edition t e e EARS e xS August 1996 Trademarks MS DOSO is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exculsively through X Open Company Limited Safety Symbols Instruction manual symbol affixed to prod uct Indicates that the user must refer to the AV Alternating current AC manual for specific WARNING or CAU TION information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product Direct current DC Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates the field wiring terminal that must x be connected to earth ground before operat ing the equipment protects against electri Calls attention to a procedure practice or cal shock in case of fault WARNING condition that could cause bodily injury or death Calls attention to a procedure practice or con Frame or chassis ground terminal typi CAUTION dition that could possibly cause damage to or cally connects to the equipment s metal equipment or permanent loss of data frame WARNINGS The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this product Failure to comply with these precau
18. de GEOP d wert dtu id Page 162 CALCulate AVERage COUNt n readings Page 164 CALCulate AVERage COUNt i oa Ru oe A Page 164 CALCulate A VERage STATe lt enable gt Page 165 CALCulate AVERageESTATe teas BAA ee owe eae Lae a ae ean ek ES Page 165 CALCulate CLIMits FAIL CUMulative Page 166 CALCulate CLIMits FAIL CURRent Page 166 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CUMulative Page 167 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CURRent o aa ee Page 167 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CUMulative Page 168 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CURRent 2 22 Page 168 CALCulate LIMit FAIL CUMulative lt Page 168 CALCulate LIMit FAIL CURRent lt channel gt Page 169 CALCulate LIMit LOWer DATA lower limit Q ch list Page 169 CALCulate LIMit LOWer DATA lt gt Page 170 CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe enable G ch list Page 170 CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe lt channel gt Page 171
19. 255 sv RAS ERO 235 OPFER aor CREER 256 STATus OPERation NTRansition 256 STATS OPERation NTRansition 237 STATus OPERation PTRansition 257 5 7 258 STATI PRES x13 5545 258 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 259 5 260 STATus QUESGOnable ENABle7 522424554525 260 STAT QUEStionableL EVEN iiu EROR RR HL ES aw 261 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 261 5 5 7 262 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 262 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 263 dk SEE GSE oe DESH OES 264 Slo ei TEES sak eh be eh ade x dede aede xem RS 264 SISTERE L4 e 264 VERSION uo oca KR de p EOS 265 e oed e db oi oe nd die ERS de e cl 266 TRIUSSGULUNE eh edo ORS EE OEE ES Eq ed ER 268 COUN aside Bee cen dhe dedero Res ho dede 268 IMMediate aoa obo eR ORE LR REE GOS RR Re Se ES 269 Jie SOUR oh EL See POSES EES EERE ESE 269 A
20. One HP E1586 Terminal Panel using All Thermistors Figure 3 6 Connecting Three Thermistors on a Single Panel Connecting Two Terminal this configuration two Terminal Panels are used with an HP E1413 to Panels for Reference provide up to 64 channels for temperature measurements Make the following Temperature connections on the thermistor terminal blocks of both Terminal Panels Measurements Connect HI I to HI TI of the First Terminal panel Connect LO I to LO TI of the First Terminal Panel Connect LO TI of the First Terminal Panel to HI TI of the Second Terminal Panel Connect LO TI of the Second Terminal Panel to LO I of the First Terminal Panel This provides the excitation current to all six on board thermistors on the Terminal Panels Figure 3 7 shows the connection for two Terminal Panels 94 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 5 AAPM WSS 29 2908 S 9 9 S S 9 S S 9 S S 29 61 30 62 31 X All Thermistors on Both Panels 24 56 25 57 26 5
21. Channels 16 31 OR Channels 48 63 X Figure 2 22 HP E1413 Option A3F The Option A3F Terminal Module enables connections to an HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel Note that to connect all 64 channels two HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panels are required Figure 2 25 shows how to connect the Terminal Module to the HP E1413 A D Module See Connecting and Mounting the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel on page 61 for information on connecting the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel 58 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Option Pin Out Figure 2 23 shows the pin out and signal lines for the HP E1313 and Sig nal Lines Option Terminal Module and Figure 2 24 shows the pin out and signal lines for the HP E1413 Option A3F Terminal Module
22. Page 26 Disabling Flash Memory Page 26 For most applications you will only need to change the logical address switch prior to installation The other settings can be used as delivered Switch Jumper Setting Logical Address Switch 24 Input Protect Jumper Protected Flash Memory Protect Jumper PROG Setting the VXIbus Interrupt Level The HP Scanning A D Converters use a default V XIbus interrupt level of 1 The default setting is made at power on and after a HST command You can change the interrupt level by executing the DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe command in your application program Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 Setting the Log iCal Follow Figures 1 1 and 1 2 and ignore any switch numbering printed on the Address Switch logical address switch When installing more than one HP Scanning A D Converter in a single VXIbus mainframe set each instrument to a different logical address Switch setting shown is for Logical Address 24 FIG1 1R Figure 1 1 Setting the HP E1313 Logical Address 16 Getting Started Chapter 1 Set Switch As Shown LOGICAL ADDRESS 24 SWITCH SET TO O OFF am CLOSED SWITCH SET TO 1 ON 2 2 ul 2 2 L9 2 2 2 2 oe 2 2 4 2 24 Ld 22 22 E1413
23. See the note about the ARM subsystem page 266 The term Continuous Mode means that the module is scanning with TRIGger SOURce IMMediate and INITiate CONTinuous ON After an ARM event the module executes a single Scan List continuously until an INITiate CONTinuous OFF is received Continuous Mode provides the fastest scan rate Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 269 TRIGger The Trigger and Arm Sources can be changed while the module is scanning but not in the Continuous Mode This provides a way to stop triggering when you want to change the TRIGger TIMer PERiod interval To do this execute ARM SOUR IMM Must be IMM when SOUR not TIMer TRIG SOUR BUS or HOLD To stop scanning TRIG TIM new interval Change the timer interval TRIG SOUR TIM Return to timed scans e See TRIGger TIMer MODE for scanning behavior while TRIGger SOURce is While TRIGger SOURce is IMMediate you need only INITiate the trigger system to start a measurement scan e Related Commands ABORt INITiate commands TRG RST Condition TRIGger SOURce HOLD Usage TRIG SOUR BUS Trigger with TRIG command TRIGger SOURce TRIGger SOURce returns the current trigger source configuration Returned Value Discrete one of BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TIM or TTLTO through TTLT7 The C SCPI type returned is string See the TRIGger SOURce command for more response data information Usage TRIG
24. Page 85 Step 6 Setting up the Trigger Page 86 Step 7 Specifying the Data Page 88 Step 8 Selecting the FIFO Mode Page 89 Step 9 Initiating the Trigger Page 89 Step 10 Retrieving Page 90 Example Program es PED ne RUE Page 91 e Example Command Page 92 Using the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel Page 93 Module Description The HP E1313 E1413 is a 64 channel high speed scanning Analog to Digital Converter with optional per channel signal conditioning in a single width V XIbus module It scans up to 100 000 channels per second while autoranging and converting the readings into Engineering Units EU The reading stream is routed to a 65 024 reading FIFO buffer while the latest reading from each of the 64 channels can be quickly accessed from a Current Value Table CVT All readings are returned to the FIFO and CVT in IEEE 754 32 bit floating point format either with EU conversion or as input voltage Channel selection is controlled by four scan lists which can contain up to 1 024 channel assignments each Another list called the List of Lists can reference each of the scan lists 1 through 4 up to 1 024 times The HP E1313 E1413 also provides on board calibration sources to allow on line singl
25. 29 61 30 62 31 W 25 57 26 58 27 59 AAPA S S 9 S S S S S S 29 61 30 62 31 63 Two HP E1586 Terminal Panels Measuring One Thermistor on Each Panel on Reference Channels 100 132 Figure 3 9 Center Thermistor Measurements on Multiple Panels The following example uses two Terminal Panels to measure type K thermocouples SENS REF THER 5000 1 100 132 Measures reference temperature measurements on channels 100 and 132 SENS FUNC TEMP TC K 06 101 131 133 163 Defines channels for temperature measurements ROUT SEQ DEF 100 101 131 132 133 163 Defines the scan list 96 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Measuring Using the measure all three thermistors select three HP E1313 E1413 channels as Left Center and Right reference channels The recommended method is to use thermistor 1 the Thermistors left thermistor HI T1S and LO T1S as a reference for channels 0 7 or 32 39 thermistor 2 the center thermistor HI T2S and LO T2S for channels 8 23 or 40 47 and thermistor 3 the right thermistor HI T3S and LO T3S for channels 24 31 or 56 63 Connect the reference channel s HI and LO terminals
26. x ey Page 367 5 brute REY Re pA Page 368 APPBNDn brem e eR Page 368 APPENDL J2 ey epe AREE OSES VENERE Page 368 ASSIGN scie iit veru ev RV TA Pede ated Page 369 bI ah maius Page 372 SONEME zoe Cr PILAE EE Uns Page 372 SCPCHAR uere c Re DR Ret Page 372 SCPGAINS seen adenine tate trees Page 372 CVT Commands E ME Page 372 Trigger Commands Vote et tated tub duper a Page 373 9 Page 373 Page 373 Debugging Commands 9 25 died a eee Page 373 gata th hd Bat Page 374 _DSPOKE Page 374 SPSPEBK gb dati Page 374 Register Based Programming Fundamentals Page 375 Programming Page 382 334 Register Based Programming Appendix D Table of Registers Category Address Read Registers return Write Registers See Page Base 0016 ID Register 338 Required VXI Base 0216 Device Type 339 Registers Base 0416 VXI Status Register VXI Control Register 339 340 Base 0616 Of
27. Initiate Continuous On Reads Current Y Scan List Wait For Trigger State Trigger Immediate Execute Entire 7 Scan List Initiate Continuous Off Figure 4 4 Scanning Modes See the ROUTe SCAN command and Figure 5 3 as well as the TRIGger TIMer MODE command and Figures 5 7 and 5 8 in Chapter 5 for full details Example programs on your HP command module downloadable driver and C SCPI driver media illustrate the three scanning modes Use program verif cs for the default mode Use program counted cs for the counted mode Use program through cs for the continuous mode 110 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Triggering and Scanning Modes Continuous Free Run Mode The following section shows the various ways the HP E1313 E1413 can control channel scanning and how to select the trigger mode to accomplish it The Continuous Mode provides the fastest scanning The time between channel measurements is controlled by the trigger timer interval and is consistent from channel to channel as well as from the last channel in the scan list back to the first channel in the list when the scan list is re executed dt 3571357 5713571357 _ Channel Number ARM tc is the sample time between channels The large arrow is the arming event or signal The smaller arrows are sample triggers generated by the HP E1313 E1413 when stepping through the c
28. TRIGger COUNt ARM IMMediate VXlbus TTLTRGn 8 lines OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt Nt Figure 3 1 continued SCPI Programming Overview Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 69 b Step 1 Setting up Signal Conditioning Plug ons This step does not apply to non programmable Signal Conditioning Plug ons such as the HP E1501 Direct Input SCP or the HP E1502 Low Pass Filter SCP Setti ng SCP Gains The gain command for programmable amplifiers is INPutGAIN lt gain gt lt ch_list gt The gain selections provided by the SCP can be assigned to any channel individually or in groups Send a separate command for each frequency selection An example for the HP E1503 Programmable Filter Gain SCP To set the SCP gain to 8 for channels 0 4 6 and 10 through 19 send INP GAIN 8 100 104 106 110 119 To set the SCP gain to 16 for channels 0 through 15 and to 64 for channels 16 through 23 send INP GAIN 16 100 115 INP GAIN 64 116 123 or to combine into a single command message INP GAIN 16 100 115 GAIN 64 116 123 Notes 1 Because of the high bandwidth of the A D Range Amplifier the quietest low level readings are attained by using the highest possible SCP channel gain with the lowest A D gain higher A D range setting appropriate to the measurement to be made A D range setting will be discussed in the next programming step 2 If you are going to manually set the A D range in the next
29. anda negative overvoltage return IEEE INF see the table on page 200 for actual values for each data format e Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO HALF 230 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe RST Condition FIFO is empty Usage SENSe DATA FIFO Return all FIFO readings until measurements complete and FIFO empty Command Set up scan lists and trigger Sequence SENSe DATA FIFO ALL Now execute read statement Read statement does not complete until triggered measurements are complete and FIFO is empty SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt returns the number of readings currently in the FIFO buffer Comments SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt is used to determine the number of readings to acquire with the SENSe DATA FIFO PART command Returned Value Numeric 0 through 65 024 The C SCPI type returned is int32 Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO PART e RST Condition FIFO empty Usage SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt Check the number of readings in the FIFO buffer SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF returns a 1 if the FIFO is at least half full contains at least 32 768 readings or O if FIFO is less than half full Comments SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF is used as a fast method to poll the FIFO for the half full condition Returned Value Numeric 1 or 0 The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO HALF
30. Returned Value Returns 4 comma separated numeric values each representing 16 bits a total of 64 bits one for each channel This 64 bit value is returned with the least significant channel bits first and the most significant channel bits last The C SCPI data type used to store the values is an array of 16 bit integer int16 array e Related Commands CALCulate CLIMits FAIL commands CALCulate LIMit commands Usage CALC CLIM FLIM CHAN CURR A subsequent enter statement for a 4 element array will return channel limit test status Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 167 CALCulate CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CUMulative CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CUMulative returns the count of channels that exceeded their limit test since the module was INITiated CUMulative Comments Returned Value Numeric value from 0 through 64 The C SCPI type returned is int16 e Related Commands CALOulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CURRent Usage CALC CLIM FLIM POIN A subsequent enter statement will return the number of limit tests exceeded CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CURRent CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CURRent returns the count of channels that exceeded their limit test during the last completed scan CURRent Comments Returned Value Numeric value from 0 through 64 The C SCPI type returned is int16 e Related Commands CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CUMulative Usage
31. OK Cancel The second instrument is the HP E1313 E1413 From the I O menu 02 PASS Instrument Select or Configure Untitled E1406 30900 E1413B hpe1413 16024 E1413_hpib hpe1413 30903 21313 NOT LIVE Instrument Type lt Instrument Panel lt Component Driver Direct Instrument Configure Add Instrument Delete Instrument Edit Instrument Get Instr Save Config Cancel Help Device Configuration Name E1413 hpib Interface HP IB x Address eg 714 30903 Device Type hpe413 Timeout sec 1 Byte Ordering MSB Live Mode Direct VO Config Instrument Driver Config OK Cancel Help Instrument Driver Configuration ID Filename Sub Address 396 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E The HP E1406A Command Module should be set so that all of its memory is available The RAM switches should be set for 2M RAM 0 Shared Then the following portion of an HP VEE program configures this memory as Nram You need to use this procedure because the exact size and address may change based on how an HP E1406A is configured HP VEE 1413MAN4 VEE File Edit Flow Device 0 Data Math AdvMath Display Help Detail Untitled This initializes the command module by setting aside 11 but 10000 bytes for readings I
32. RST Condition FIFO empty Command SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF Poll FIFO for half full status Sequence SENSe DATA FIFO HALF Returns 32768 readings Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 231 SENSe SENSe DATA FIFO HALF SENSe DATA FIFO HALF returns 32 768 readings if the FIFO buffer is at least half full This command provides a fast means of acquiring blocks of readings from the buffer Comments For acquiring data from continuous scans your application needs to execute SENSe DATA FIFO HALF command and a read statement often enough to keep up with the scan reading rate Use the SENSe DATA FIFO ALL command to acquire the readings remaining in the FIFO buffer after the last scan has completed The format of readings returned is set using the FORMat DATA command e Returned Value ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 234567 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000 001 Each reading is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOD follow the last reading The C SCPI data type returned is a string array REAL 32 REAL 64 and 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in the Arbitrary Block Program and Response Data section on page 156 of this chapter For REAL 32 each reading is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is a float32 array For REA
33. Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion STRain commands and SENSe STRain commands RST Condition OUTPut SHUNt STATe 0 on all Strain SCP channels Usage OUTP SHUN STAT 1 116 119 Add shunt resistance at channels 16 through 19 OUTPut SHUNt STATe OUTPut SHUNt STATe lt channel gt returns the status of the shunt resistance on the specified Strain SCP channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only If channel specifies a non strain SCP Error 3007 Invalid signal conditioning module is generated Returned Value Returns 1 or 0 The CSCPI type returned is uint16 Related Commands OUTPut SHUNI STATe Usage OUTP SHUN STAT 116 Check status of shunt resistance on channel 16 216 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 OUTPut OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce frig source selects the internal source of the trigger event that will operate the VXIbus TTLTRG lines HP E1313 Note Most B Size mainframes do not support VXIbus TTLTRG lines Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units trig source discrete string TRIGger FTRigger SCPlugon none Comments The following table explains the possible choices
34. Long Word Access D32 NONE 388 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E 3 To read data directly from the FIFO hardware in an HP VEE program select an HP VEE direct I O panel for the HP E1313 E1413 In this panel select READ REGISTER FIFO X ACCESS MODE Increment off ARRAY 1D SIZE 65024 HP VEE File Edit Flow Device 0 Data Math AdvMath Display Help Suo Untitled E1413B 1413 16024 READ REG FIFO x ARRAY 65024 VO Transaction READ z REGISTER FIFO ACCESS MODE Increment onj ARRAY 1D 65024 This sets HP VEE up to read the register that in step 2 we named FIFO and store the results in variable X The Access Mode Increment off means that a single location will be read over and over again until the number of readings specified by SIZE is fulfilled Note that size may be any number up to the maximum size of the HP E1313 E1413 FIFO which is 65024 An error occurs if you try and enter more readings than are available Thus before reading the FIFO using this method first find out the number of readings that are available Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 389 4 To read data directly from the CVT hardware table in an HP VEE program select an HP VEE direct I O panel for the HP E1313 E1413 In this panel select READ MEMORY OVT X ACCESS MODE Increment On ARRAY1D SIZE 64 HP EE File Edit Flow Devoe Data Math
35. SHO 291114 81 140 80818 dH Appendix A 306 Specifications 0671 0071 050 000 ga cet 9 2 27 Sos HAO 9 1 140 COSTA dH 777 Type S filter off AIO 11 LdO TOSTA dH Specifications 307 Appendix A 0 1 0071 050 0070 01 X o 8eq VV FIV AV KK f 291119 61 140 60519 dH AAO 291119 81 140 80519 dH Type S filter off HP E1508 09 308 Specifications 9 Seq Type T filter off JAO T 140 0519 dH AHO uly 11 140 10519 dH o 1 aul VA n Mu hy 1 9941 Specifications 309 Appendix Type T filter off HP E1508 09 Deg C HP E1508 OPT 18 Filter OFF HP E1509 OPT 19 Filter OFF Mar Nt stp Deg C 310 Specifications Appendix A 0008 0009 0007 00 07 00 0 2 00 081 091 OF T 021 001 08 0 090 Reference Thermistor 5KQ filter off Ot 0 AHO 19111 9X 1 140 dH 0c 0 JAO IANA 11 140 10519 dH 00 0 AA utrum MS Specifications 311 Appendix A Seg Reference Thermistor 5KQ
36. To E 2 a rj r4 U 93 co 5 24 go 28 Nes on 93 5 Uz x3 55 ro ag T 28 E 28 Sa 38 Uz on 5 35 8 amp r CI 805 2995 dos LJ k 1 TD See page 50 to remove the cover Figure 2 12 Temperature Sensing for HP E1413 Terminal Module Field Wiring 47 Chapter 2 Adding Components to the HP E1413 Terminal Module The back of the terminal module PC board provides surface mount pads which you can use to add serial and parallel components to any channel s signal path Figure 2 13 shows additional component locator information see the schematic and pad layout information on the back of the teminal module PC board Figure 2 14 shows some usage example schematics Upper layout also applies here Upper layout also applies here Lower layout also applies here Lower layout also applies here SCHEMATIC OF MODIFIABLE PARTS HI gt COMP LOCAIOR tmcompnt cdr HI SH HI 0 Ohms TO USER WIRING TO E1413 E1415 TO USER WIRING TO E1413 E1415 SL LO LO LO s 3 uU U Default Circuit Normal Mode Low Pass Filter Circuit SH HI 0 Ohms TO USER WIRING TO E1413 E1415 SL LO suiuo 042 Jo suuo 002 LO 4 20 mA NOTE input must not exceed common mode limits usually 16 Volts
37. lt ch_list gt TEMPerature degrees celsius STRain EXCitation excite v Q ch list EXCitation lt channel gt GFACtor gage gt ch list GFACtor channel POlSson poisson ratio Q ch list POISson lt channel gt UNSTrained lt unstrained_v gt lt ch_list gt UNSTrained lt channel gt 228 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe SENSe DATA C V Table Parameters Comments Note Usage SENSe DATA CVTable Q ch list returns from the Current Value Table the most recently measured values for the channels specified Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch list channel list string 100 163 none This command allows you to view the current channel values even while a long measurement scan is taking place The Current Value Table is an area of A24 memory that contains a copy of the most recent measurement for each channel that has been measured since the last RST or INITiate IMMediate command The format of readings returned is set using the FORMat DATA command e Returned Value ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 234567 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000 001 Each reading is followed by comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify follow the last reading The C SCPI data type returned is a string array REAL
38. table range specifies the range of input voltage that the table covers from table range to table range The value you specify must be within 5 of 0156251 031251 06251 1251 251 5111214181161321 64 ch list specifies which channels will have this custom EU table loaded Your program puts table constants into array table block DIAG CUST PIEC table_block 1 132 163 Send table for channels 32 63 to HP E1413 SENS FUNC CUST 1 1 132 163 Link custom EU with channels 32 63 and set the 1V A D range INITiate then TRIGger module Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 79 Loading Tables for DIAGnostic CUSTom PlECewise lt table_range gt lt table_block gt lt ch_list gt Non Linear Conversions command downloads a custom piecewise EU conversion table to the HP E1413 for each channel specified table block is a block of 1 024 bytes that define 512 16 bit values SCPI requires that table block include the definite length block data header C SCPI adds the header for you e table range specifies the range of input voltage that the table covers from table range to table range The value you specify must be within 5 of 0156251 031251 06251 1251 251 5111214181161321 64 ch list specifies which channels will have this custom EU table loaded Usage Example Your program puts table constants into array fable block DIAG CUST PIEC table_block 1 124 131 Send tab
39. 000 168 2 168 CALCulste LIMICPAIL ICURRe8t 64 4 446 ee a Re LEN 8 5 169 HP E1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module Contents 3 CALCulate LIMi LOWerDATA CALCulate LIMi LOWerDATA CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe CALCulate LIMit STATe CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe CALibration CONFigure RESistance CALibration CONFigure VOLTage CALIDO SETUP uo de ae Rem RO ee CALibragom SETIP uu zoe CALibraton S DOR 232443 3 5x9 xo RE CALibratiow TARE soe ye e CALibrationsTARE koe CALibration TARE RESet CALibration VALue RESistance CALibration VALue VOLTage CALIBRE ZERO 66244 684406 eee e Y DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE DIAGnostic CHECksum DIAGnostic COMMand SCPWRITE DIAGnosticcCUSTom LINear DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature DIAGnostic FLOor CONFigure DJAGnostic FLOor DUMP DIAGnostic INTemupt LINe DIJAGnostic INTer
40. 12 DSP Overvoltage on input 13 DSP Reserved error condition 14 DSP ADC hardware failure 15 DSP Reserved error condition Bits in the Error Flag Word are asserted when high 358 Register Based Programming Appendix D Note If the module does not pass its Self test the ERRFLAGS command cannot be executed However if the control processor is able it will place the Error Flag Word into the Query Response Register FILTER enable 230016 Enables 1 or disables 0 the A D filter FILTER 231016 Returns the status of the A D filter in the Query Response Register 1 means enabled 0 means disabled LOW LIMIT channel lt highword gt lt lowword gt 003016 Sets the lower limit for limit checking readings from the channel specified by channel highword and lowword combine to become a 32 bit Motorola format floating point value UP LIMIT channel lt highword gt lt lowword gt 004016 Sets the upper limit for limit checking readings from the channel specified by channel highword and lowword combine to become a 32 bit Motorola format floating point value NO LIMIT channel 005016 Turns off limit checking for the channel specified by channel NULL 000016 This command takes no actions and causes no errors REVCODE 002016 Returns a 16 bit value the lower 4 bits of which are significant 00002 indicates an HP E1413A 00012 indicates an HP E1413B and
41. Appendix D Register Based Programming 357 System Commands The System commands provide for checking errors and communicating with the Signal Conditioning Plug ons AVGRDGS enable n readings 006016 This command sets the number of readings to be averaged for each reading stored in the FIFO or CVT enable is 1 for enabled 0 for disabled It takes n scan triggers to obtain the n_readings to average No channel should be repeated in the scan list Valid values for n readings 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 ERRFLAGS 202016 This command returns the contents of the Error Flag Word in the VXI Query Response Register The Error Flag Word provides additional information about the previously executed command Note Any other command will update add the contents of the Error Flag Word Error flag bits accumulate in the Error Flag Word until an ERRFLAGS query is processed ERRFLAGS resets all flag bits to zero The following error flags are defined Bit Description 0 DSP Unrecognized command code 1 DSP Parameter out of range 2 DSP Flash rom erase failure 3 DSP Programming voltage not present 4 DSP Invalid SCP gain value 5 DSP Invalid CAL constant or checksum CAL required 6 DSP Could not cal some channels 7 DSP Re Zero of ADC failed 8 DSP Invalid Tare CAL constant or checksum 9 DSP Invalid Factory CAL constant or checksum 10 DSP DAC adjustment went to limit 11 DSP Status Do CAL
42. CH24 CH25 26 CH27 28 29 CH30 51 32 5 4 35 36 37 38 59 SE OHMS 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 FOR CHANNELS 32 63 USE NUMBERS IN rris FOR CHANNELS 32 63 USE NUMBERS IN 4 4 51 53 54 55 4 43 49 49 0 D0 NoT use center da da 000 dz 8 CHO9 CH10 11 CH12 CH13 CHI4 CH15 BLOCK FOR CH 32 63 GLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLH GLHGLH GHLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLG __________ crowns common 1 1 1 GROUNDS COMMON O ee 1 L 1 Chapter 2 Terminal Module Wiring Maps Figure 2 19 shows the terminal module map for the HP E1313 and Figure 2 20 shows the terminal module map for the HP E1413 Figure 2 19 HP E1313 Terminal Module Map 54 Field Wiring
43. ESE 277 ESR 277 executing register based 378 379 FETCh subsystem 197 198 FIFO reading count 104 105 FIFO reading transfer 102 106 107 230 232 234 FIFO status 102 231 FORMat subsystem 199 201 fundamentals 153 158 GET command 269 GMC 277 IDN 277 278 implied SCPD 154 SAMPle subsystem 226 227 SENSe Subsystem 228 251 separator 153 SRE 280 SRE 280 STATus subsystem 252 263 STB 280 SYSTem subsystem 264 265 TRG 280 TRIGger subsystem 266 274 TST 281 283 WAI 283 Comment Sheet reader 13 Common capabilities register 349 mode filter high frequency 62 mode noise 403 mode rejection 294 mode voltage limits 402 mode voltage maximum 294 Common Commands CAL 35 81 82 179 275 276 CLS 276 DMC 276 EMC 276 EMC 276 ESE 277 ESE 277 ESR 277 format 153 GMC 277 IDN 277 278 linking with SCPI commands 157 LMC 278 OPC 130 278 OPC 278 279 INITiate subsystem 202 203 PMC 279 INPut subsystem 204 208 quick reference 289 linking other commands 157 RMC 279 LMC 278 RST 15 66 279 subsystem 209 212 SRE 280 OPC 278 SRE 280 OPC 278 279 STB 127 128 280 OUTPut subsystem 213 219 TRG 280 parameters types of 154 TST 66 281 283 PMC 279 WAI 283 quick reference 284 290 Compensating for System Wiring Offsets 138 quick reference IEEE common commands 289 Compen
44. STATus QUEStionable PTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Positive Transition Filter PTF Register Comments Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 e Related Commands STATus QUEStionable PTRansition RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER PTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the PTF Register Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 263 SYSTem SYSTem The SYSTem subsystem is used to query for error messages types of Signal Conditioning Plug ons SCPs and the SCPI version currently implemented Subsystem Syntax SYSTem CTYPe lt channel gt ERRor VERSion SYSTem CTYPe SYSTem CTYPe lt channel gt returns the identification of the Signal Conditioning Plug on installed at the specified channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only Returned Value An example of the response string format is HEWLETT PACKARD E1413 Model model number and description SCP 0 0 The C SCPI type returned is string For specific response string refer to the appropriate SCP manual If channel specifies a position where no SCP is installed the module returns the response string SCP at this Address 0 0 Usage SYST CTYP 100 Return SCP t
45. Trigger ignored is generated If another trigger event is received before the instrument has completed the current trigger cycle measurement scan the Questionable Data Status bit 9 is set and Error 3012 Trigger too fast is generated 202 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 INITiate Sending the ABORt command will immediately send the trigger system back to its Trigger Idle state and terminate any scan in progress If INITiate CONTinuous is ON however it will immediately return to the Wait for Trigger state If TRIGger SOURce is IMMediate also then the module will resume scanning Use INITiate CONTinuous OFF to stop after the current scan is complete You can check the Measuring bit bit 4 with STATus OPERation CONDition to determine when the scan has completed Sending INITiate IMMediate while the system is still in the Wait for Trigger state already INITiated will cause Error 213 Init ignored Related Commands ABORt TRIGger IMMediate TRIGger SOURce RST Condition Trigger system is in the Trigger Idle state Usage INIT CONT ON Return to Initiated State after each trigger INIT CONT OFF Finish scan if triggered and return to Trigger Idle state AFTER the next trigger event if already armed INITiate IMMediate Comments INITiate IMMediate changes the trigger system from the Idle state to the Wait for Trigger state When triggered one or more depending on TRIGger COUNt t
46. Usage STATus QUEStionable EVENt returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Event Register When using the Questionable Event Register to cause SRQ interrupts STAT QUES EVENT must be executed after an SRQ to re enable future interrupts Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 Cleared By CLS power on and by reading the register e Related Commands STB SPOLL STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle STAT QUES EVENT Enter statement will return the value of bits set in the Questionable Event Register STAT QUES Same as above STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Parameters Comments STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt transition_mask gt sets bits in the Negative Transition Filter NTF Register When a bit in the NTF Register is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition Register must change from a one to a zero in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event Register When a bit in the NTF Register is zero a negative transition of the Condition Register bit will not change the Event Register bit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt transition_mask gt numeric uint16 0 32767 none e transition mask may be sent as decimal hex octal Q or binary If both the Status Questionable Positive Transition Filter STAT QU
47. e RST Condition SENSe DATA CVTable RESet Usage SENS DATA CVT RES Clear the Current Value Table SENSe DATA FIFO ALL SENSe DATA FIFO ALL returns all readings remaining in the FIFO buffer until all measurements are complete or until the number of readings returned exceeds FIFO buffer size 65 024 Comments SENSe DATA FIFO ALL may be used to acquire all readings even while they are being made into a single large buffer or can be used after one or more SENSe DATA FIFO HALF commands to return the remaining readings from the FIFO The format of readings returned is set using the FORMat DATA command e Returned Value ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 234567E 4123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000 001 Each reading is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOD follow the last reading The C SCPI data type returned is a string array REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program and Response Data section on page 156 of this chapter For REAL 32 each reading is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is a float32 array For REAL 64 and 64 each reading is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is a float64 array Note Channel readings which a positive overvoltage return IEEE
48. lt ch_list gt LOW lt channel gt INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency cutoff freq Q ch list sets the cutoff frequency of the filter on the specified channels Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units cutoff freq numeric float32 See Comments below Hz string MIN MAX ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments cutoff freq may be specified in kiloHertz khz A programmable Filter SCP has a choice of several discrete cutoff frequencies The cutoff frequency set will be the one closest to the value specified by cutoff freq Refer to Chapter 6 for specific information on the SCP you are programming Sending MAX for the cutoff freq selects the SCP s highest cutoff frequency Sending MIN for the cutoff freq selects the SCP s lowest cutoff frequency To disable filtering the pass through mode execute the INPut FILTer LPASs STATe OFF command Sending a value greater than the SCP s highest cutoff frequency or less than the SCP s lowest cutoff frequency generates Error 222 Data out of range error This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands INPut FIL Ter LPASs FREQuency INPut FILTer LPASs STATe RST Condition Set to MIN 204 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 INPut Usage INP FILT FREQ 100 100 119
49. strain relief bar i G32 G40 G48 G56 32 L40 L48 56 H32 H40 H48 H56 33 G41 049 G57 L33 L41 L49 L57 H33 41 49 H57 G34 G42 G50 G58 L34 L42 50 L58 m H34 H42 H50 H58 G35 G43 G51 G59 EN L35 L43 L51 L59 H35 H43 H51 H59 3 0367 G44 G52 G60 _ 6 L44 L52 L60 H36 H44 H52 H60 xe G37 G45 G53 G61 137 45 L53 L61 1 H37 H45 H53 H61 G38 G46 G54 G62 L38 L46 L54 L62 H38 H46 H54 H62 f G39 G47 55 63 Heavy line indicates the side E 147 bee LeS T F of the terminal block on which the wire enters GSEs 5555 8858 BS Ze Figure 2 20 HP E1413 Terminal Module Map Chapter 2 Field Wiring 55 Terminal Module Options Option A3E Note Besides the standard terminal module with push in connectors the HP E1313 E1413 can be ordered with the following two options One option Option A3F allows connection to an HP E1586 Rack Mount Terminal Panel and the other option A3E allows direct connections to the HP E1313 E1413 A D Module s Faceplate using connectors HP E1313 E1413 Option A3E can be ordered if a crimp and insert terminal module is desired This allows you to crimp connectors onto wires which are then inserted directly into the HP E1313 E1413 faceplate connector Refer to the pin out diagram on pages 63 and 64 to make the connec
50. tee de Pee 217 OUTPOR TTL UG SOURCE ERS SRE Oh ew 218 CHIT Paul Litres Sele uuo ok do eS e OO ES ede 218 DOUTPUETTLIISSSDSLDEIDISI onc cord ee eee cao tho SOR 218 5 2 5585 219 OUTPutWOLTage AMPLat de 219 dos EE SEES GRE RAS DER RS 220 ROUTES AN quae dude CLG SS ew ES SERED G e EER 220 neice DEERING oo 55255585 eR oe 222 ROUTe SEQuenceDEBPEime kk 224 ROUTeSEQuenc POING ARE RED E A 229 SANIP PC Hew 226 DAXMPISSTIMGE ee E eodd 226 SAMPE 227 SENSE ho SESW RE CLUS EG SOE CEP pq ded peque 228 SENSE DATA CV TARE un gk ae Ge om OR OR 3 we Ree 229 SENSe JDATA CVTable RESet 230 ISENSE amp TIDATA PIPORALL T 4 42 G5 2604402 5 OF PRESS 230 SENSE IDATA uua dog kode p e e e 231 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF 231 SENSE DATA FIFO HALF ORE RES EEE CR 232 SENSE IDATA FIFOMODE e 233 ISENS amp IDATA FIPCEMODE ee bee RR 233 SENSEIDATA BIPCEPART oes 2 eee A RR 234 SENS DATA FINI RESE 20459504 d
51. 2 SS 2 Replace side panels 2 side panel screws and 2 front panel screws for each side 20 Getting Started Chapter 1 HP E1313 Step 4 Installing SCPs Apply label to the cover of the HP E1313 Peel off Label from Card and Stick on the appropriate place on the Cover F Check off in the Box the SCP s Option Number 255 S gt yaa pe T 3 Peel off Label from Card and Stick on the Terminal Module to be Connected to the A D Module CF D ee EY Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 i e following illustrations show the steps you will use to install the Installing HP E1413 The following how the steps you will Il th Sig nal Conditioning HP E1413 Signal Conditioning Plug on modules SCPs Plug ons CAUTION Use approved Static Discharge Safe handling procedures anytime you have the covers removed from the HP Scanning A D Converter modules or are handling SCPs HP E1413 Step 1 Installing SCPs Remove the cover from the HP E1413 A 2 2 2 2 2 A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ANNU Remove the SCP Retaining Screws Remove 2 screws 10 Torx lif
52. 280 _ 281 uo ri 2 och gba hdd 283 Command Quick Reference REOR o 284 Chapter 6 Signal Conditioning Plug on 291 Appendix A Specifications 293 Appendix B Error Messages 222 Appendix C Glossary 331 Appendix D Register Based Programming 333 Rester Ad ects uds Kh EES OE d RU 336 Required VR Regge 338 ID Register Base DUNG RE RR EE Re PC PRG 338 Device Type Register Base 2d6 sss xz XAR ARES 339 VXI Status RegisterBase 0416 339 VXI Control Register 0416 340 Offset Register Base 0646 222225525554 341 HP E1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module Contents 7 Query Response Register Base 086 2 2 5 55 55 341 Command and Parameter Registers Base 0816 0 16 342 Scan Status and Control Register 1016 342 Card Control Register Base 1214 m m Re eS 345 Interrupt Configuration Register 1416 347 Interrupt Status Register Base 1616 2 347 Common Capabilities Register Base 1 16 349 Description R
53. Opt 15 required 80 to 160 C RTD s Opt 15 required 200 to 850 C Resistance Opt 15 with opt 11 512 ohms to 131 Kohms FS Strain 25 000 or limit of linear range of strain gage Measurement resolution 16 bits including sign Maximum SENSe FILT OFF 100K rdgs sec divided by the number of channels in the scan for example reading rate 100K rdgs sec 64 channels 1 56K rdgs sec ch 100K rdgs sec 16 channels 6 25K rdgs sec ch SENSe FILT ON 6 4K rdgs sec divided by the number of channels in the scan for example 6 4K rdgs sec 64 channels 100 rdgs sec ch 6 4K rdgs sec 16 channels 400 rdgs sec ch Appendix A Specifications 293 Trigger Timer and 100ppm 01 from 10 C to 70 C Sample Timer Accuracy External Trigger Input TTL compatible input Negative true edge triggered except first trigger will occur if external trigger input is held low when module is INITiated Minimum pulse width 100nS Since each trigger starts a complete scan of 2 or more channel readings maximum trigger rate depends on module configuration Maximum input voltage Operating lt 16 V peak Damage level gt 42 V peak Normal mode plus common mode Maximum common mode Operating lt 16 V peak Damage level gt 42 V peak voltage Common mode rejection 0 to 60Hz 105dB Input impedance greater than 100 Mohm differential On board Current Source 122 uA 0 02 with 17 Volts Compliance Maximum ta
54. Parameters Comments Usage SENSe STRain Parameters Comments Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature RST Condition Reference temperature is 0 C SENS REF TEMP 40 Subsequent thermocouple conversion will assume compensation junction at 40 degrees C EXCitation SENSe STRain EXCitation excite v Q ch list specifies the excitation voltage value to be used to convert strain bridge readings for the channels specified by ch list This command does not control the output voltage of any source but declares the excitation voltage applied by a voltage source outside the HP E1413 Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units excite v numeric float32 01 99 volts ch list channel list string 100 163 none ch list must specify the channel used to sense the bridge voltage not the channel position on a Bridge Completion SCP Related Commands SENSe STRain commands SENSe FUNCtion S TRain commands e RST Condition 3 9 V SENS STRAIN EXC 4 100 107 Set excitation voltage for channels 0 through 7 to 4 V EXCitation SENSe STRain EXCitation lt channel gt returns the excitation voltage value currently set for the sense channel specified by channel Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none e Returned Value Numeric
55. Specify order of channel measurements for Scan LISTn or all Scan Lists Returns the number of points channels in Scan LISTn Sets the time interval in seconds between channel measurements for Scan LISTn or all four Scan Lists Returns the timer interval in seconds for Scan LISTn Returns elements of Current Value Table specified by ch_list Resets all entries in the Current Value Table to IEEE Not a number Fetch all readings until instrument returns to trigger idle state Returns the number of measurements in the FIFO buffer Returns 1 if at least 32 768 readings are in FIFO else returns 0 Fetch 32 768 readings half the FIFO when available Set FIFO mode Return the currently set FIFO mode Fetch n_readings from FIFO reading buffer when available Reset the FIFO counter to 0 Enables disables A D s 12 KHz low pass filter Returns the state of the A D s low pass filter 286 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Command Quick Reference SCPI Command Quick Reference Command Description FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt REFerence range Q ch list type range Q ch list RESistance excite current range ch list STRain FBENding range 9 ch list Full BENding FBPoisson range ch list FPOisson range ch list Full POisson HBENding lt range gt lt
56. The filter s cut off frequency is 12 KHz Autorange the default voltage range is not allowed while the A D low pass filter is enabled If channels contained in the current Scan List specify autorange while the A D filter is ON an error will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e When the A D filter is ON the minimum allowable value for SAMPle TIMer is 145 usec Note If SAMPIe TIMer for the current scan list is less than 145 usec and the A D filter is ON an error will be generated at INIT time Related Commands SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe e RST Condition SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe OFF Usage SENS FILT LPAS STAT ON Enable A D low pass filter Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 235 SENSe SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe SENSe FILTer L PASs STATe returns the current state of the A D s low pass filter Comments This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e Returned Value Returns numeric value 0 off or 1 on The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands SENSe FlLTer LPASs STATe Usage SENS FILT LPAS STAT Enter statement returns either 1 or O SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom Parameters SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt links channels with the custom Engineering Unit Conversion table loaded with the DIAGnos
57. range may be specified in millivollts mv e If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal voltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC or an input out of range condition will exist The type EEXTended applies to E type thermocouples at 800 C and above e The CAL command calibrates temperature channels based on Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again Related Commands DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise CAL SENSe REFerence SENSe REFerence TEMPerature e RST Condition All custom EU tables are erased Usage Program must put table constants into array table block DIAG CUST PIEC 1 table_block 100 107 Send characterized thermocouple table for use by channels 0 7 SENS FUNC CUST TC N 25 100 107 Link custom thermocouple EU with channels 0 7 use reference temperature compensation for N type wire SENS REF RTD 92 120 Designate a channel to measure the reference junction temperature Include these channels in a scan list REF channel first INITiate then TRIGger module Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 239 SENSe SENSe FUNCtion RESistance SENSe FUNCtion RESistanc
58. 00 8 2 Sog Specifications 297 Appendix A 00008 00 009 00 007 00002 000 Seg 00 0 aw DAS v 227737 REPE 5v Y D AAT A oaa 00 007 00 OSZ 007006 00056 00 00t u A PRETI id pn e HORN CPP Type E 0 to 800 filter off 00 OSP 00 005 00056 JAO JOU 051 dH AHO 19111 IT 140 I0STH dH 007059 01 20 Appendix 298 Specifications 007008 007009 00 007 00 007 00 0 o 3aq 272 nn meth Type E 0 to 800 filter off HP E1508 09 JO 6T LdO 60614 dH SAO 191114 81 808518 dH 01 82 Specifications 299 Appendix A 01 X o 82 Type EEXtended filter off SHO p9X 140 COSTA dH AAO 11 130 10519 dH 0071 060 000 001 00 OU E 007 005 009 007 008 A 006 00 01 00 TI 0071 00 lt 1 00 1 0051 Seq Appendix A 300 Specifications 01 Seq Type EEXtended filter off HP E1508 09 popus xy 9d T Specifications 301 Appendix A 00008 007009 0
59. 113 Extecaallo Paced Scat an cack 114 Synchronizing Multiple Cards EK EO REE RR 115 2 HP 131 1413 High Speed A D Module Contents Continuous Fee Run Mode 115 Jotes Tiner Based SONS sucus deo em KO ORO eoe dA OS UR ERR RS 116 Timer Based Scans at Different Rates osse e o RR 118 Using Automatic Scan List Sequencing Lis of Lists len 120 ASusple Exaile uuu zug wo mg OR REGE QR KRESS OR ORE ES 120 Programming Four Different Rates a sa o RR REO 121 Setting the Absolute Scan Rat oak Ka ke 121 Using the Status ek dues PORE DOR RR do Roo RPE 122 Enabling Events to be Reported in the Status Byte 123 Reading the Stanis 127 Cleaning the Enable Registers ssa sa 42444420048 64048 OR OR 127 The Status Byte Group s Enable Register 128 Reading Status Groups Directly 128 Updating the Status System and VXIbus 129 HP 1313 1413 Background Operation 130 Ayeraging 131 Lut Tengene a quy SRE 133 Checkin Ress oom doo dedo ORAS eS Roco ob We diede de oe d 133 Custom EU Conversion Tables EE do UR NOR ORO REOR RO 136 Compensating Tor System Offsets 138 Sp
60. 339 ID register 338 360 offset register 341 required 338 341 VXI control register 340 VXI status register 339 340 VXI Status Register 339 340 V XIbus Interrupt level setting 15 347 line setting 193 operation status group 255 questionable data group 260 updating 129 130 W Wagner Voltage Ground 208 WAI 283 Wait to Continue Command WAT 283 Waits reducing settling 144 146 WARNINGS 10 Warranty 9 voiding 26 Whole SCP Registers 360 361 Wiring HP E1313 terminal module 49 HP E1413 terminal module 50 51 maps terminal module 54 58 noise reduction 401 406 planning for thermocouple measurements 36 planning layout 33 shielded 401 signal connection 43 44 techniques for noise reduction 401 406 the terminal module 52 unshielded 401 Writing data to SCP registers 189 to scan control bits 343 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 425 Notes 426 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index
61. Advanced FIFO Data Retrieval The discussion of FIFO data access in Chapter 3 Step 10 Retrieving Data assumed that the number of readings to be transferred from the HP E1313 E1413 is a known quantity The SENSe DATA FIFO PART command works well in that situation This section is applicable when You do not want the data retrieval section of your program to need to know the total number of readings to be transferred during scanning Making the data retrieval section independent of the configuration section reduces the complexity of your program Youcannot define the total number of readings that will be transferred This is very likely when the number of scans to be made is open ended INITiate CONTinuous is ON TRIGger COUNt is set to INFinite Your system contains several HP E1313 E1413s and your program must execute as fast as possible to maintain a reading transfer rate greater than the total reading acquisition rate Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 101 The commands used to access the contents of the FIFO buffer are FIFO Reading Transfer Commands SENSe DATA FIFO ALL returns all readings in the FIFO This command completes only after measuring stops or 65 024 readings have been transferred SENSe DATA FIFO HALF returns 32 768 readings half of the FIFO capacity when they become available This command completes only after the 32 768 readings are transferred SENSe DAT
62. All custom EU tables erased Usage Program puts table constants into array table block DIAG CUST PIEC table_block 124 131 Send table for channels 24 31 to HP E1413 SENS FUNC CUST PIEC 1 1 124 131 Link custom EU with channels 24 31 INITiate then TRIGger module Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 191 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature Usage DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature extracts the current Reference Temperature Register contents converts it to 32 bit floating point format and sends it to the FIFO This command is used to verify that the reference temperature is as expected after measuring it using a custom reference temperature EU conversion table Your program must have EU table values stored in table block Download the new reference EU table DIAG CUST PIEC table range table block Q ch list Designate channel as reference SENS FUNC CUST REF lt range gt lt ch_list gt Set up scan list sequence channel 0 in this case ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 100 Initiate trigger and retrieve data from FIFO INIT TRIG SENS DATA FIFO Dump reference temp register to FIFO DIAG CUST REF TEMP Read the diagnostic reference temperature value SENS DATA FIFO DIAGnostic FLOor CONFigure Parameters DIAGnostic FLOor CONFigure lt range gt lt ch_list gt sets the lowest range that autorange can select for channels in lt ch_list gt Paramete
63. CALCulate LIMit STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt Page 171 CALCulate LIMit STATe lt channel gt Page 172 CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA lt upper_limit gt lt ch_list gt Page 172 CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA lt channel gt Page 173 CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe enable Q ch Page 173 CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe lt channel gt Page 174 CALibration CONFigure RESistance ee Page 177 CALibration CONFigure VOLTage gt Page 177 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 149 CATabratiomSETup i 2 tup eR tuom Eam Secun que qe ana qus e ardere ene en e A Page 179 CALibration STORe lt gt 22 2 2 Page 180 CALibration TARE Q ch list Page 181 CALibration LARB bw KA Gb tute dos soe EA Page 183 CALibration TARE RES ook edu me Ro eR or mo m mo eck eG AAR Page 184 CALibration V ALue RESistance ref gt Page 184 CALibration V ALue VOLTage ref volts Page 185 CAlabration ZERO Rede ue bee d AP alec dos bs Shae RR e RR D s Page 186 DIAG
64. Command STAT OPER COND bit 4 Measuring yes Measurements Complete Any Readings In FIFO yes Execute clean up Transfer Command Exit Data Retrieval Figure 4 1 General Form of FIFO Data Retrieval It is not necessary that the instrument be triggered at this time since the program will loop waiting for readings to appear in the FIFO buffer While the instrument is still making measurements Measuring bit is 1 the program will stay on the left side of the flow chart By executing a FIFO status command the program will determine when there are enough readings to transfer When there are enough readings count depends on which status FIFO command used flow will fall through to execute the FIFO bulk data transfer command After transferring readings program flow returns to the decision block which determines if the instrument has completed all measurements or is still measuring If measurements are complete Measuring bit is 0 program flow goes to the right side of the diagram Here a FIFO status command is executed to determine if there are any readings remaining in the FIFO If readings are present the program executes a FIFO data retrieval command to transfer the remaining readings Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 103 Choosing the Data Retrieval Method Controlled Reading Count Note There are two command sets available to retrieve large blocks
65. Comments Strain measurements require the use of Bridge Completion Signal Conditioning Plug ons Bridge Completion SCPs provide the strain measurement bridges and their excitation voltage sources lt ch_list gt specifies the voltage sensing channels that are to measure the bridge outputs Measuring channels on a Bridge Completion SCP only returns that SCP s excitation source voltage The range parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates Error 222 Data out of range Specifying O selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange range may be specified in millivollts mv e If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal voltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for
66. Connecting and Mounting the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel Connecting the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel The HP E1586 Rack Mount Terminal Panel provides extended connections to the HP E1313 E1413 modules The Terminal Panel is recommended if the HP E1313 E1413 is located a distance away from the measurement connections The Terminal Panel provides up to 32 3 wire connections to allow for 32 channel connections to the A D modules See Using the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel on page 93 for operating information Figure 2 25 shows how to connect the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel to the HP E1413 E1413 A D Module SCSI Cables Optional Option 001 Board 1586 77 Terminal Panel HP E1586A Terminal Panel Option A3F Terminal Module Option A3F Terminal Module SCSI Cables To use the HP E1586 Terminal Panel WITHOUT the Option 001 Board Plug the SCSI Cables Optional directly into the E1586 Terminal Panel Option 001 Board Figure 2 25 Connecting the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel Chapter 2 Field Wiring 61 Interconnect Cables Standard Cable Custom Length Cable Mounting the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel HP E1586A Option 001 HF Common Mode Filters There are two different cables available for connecting the HP E1586 Rack Mount Terminal Panel to the HP E1313 E1413 Option
67. DATA FIFO HALF SENSe DATA FIFO PART SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt RST Condition SENSe DATA FIFO MODE BLOCk SENS DATA FIFO MODE OVERWRITE Set FIFO to overwrite mode SENS DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK Set FIFO to block mode SENSe DATA FIFO MODE SENSe DATA FIFO MODE returns the currently set FIFO mode Comments Returned Value String value either BLOCK or OVERWRITE The C SCPI type returned is string e Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO MODE Usage SENSe DATA FIFO MODE Enter statement returns either BLOCK or OVERWRITE Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 233 SENSe SENSe DATA FIFO PART Parameters Comments Note SENSe DATA FIFO PART lt readings returns n readings from the FIFO buffer Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n readings numeric int32 1 2 147 483 647 none Use the SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt command to determine the number of readings in the FIFO buffer The format of readings returned is set using the FORMat DATA command Returned Value ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 234567 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000 001 Each reading is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOD follow the last reading The C SCPI data type returned is a string array REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block D
68. INP FILT LPAS FREQ 205 INP FILT LPAS STATe 71 206 INP FILT LPAS STATe 206 INP GAIN 70 207 INP GAIN 207 INP LOW 208 INP LOW 208 Installing SCPs 18 25 Instrument Drivers 29 414 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index Interconnect Cables 62 Internal timer based scans 116 119 Interrupt configuration register 347 level 347 348 level V XIbus 15 347 line V XIbus 193 SRQ 256 261 status register 347 348 strobed 347 348 system registers 347 348 updating 129 130 Isothermal Reference Temperature 41 77 237 J Jumpers flash memory protect 26 28 180 ground guard shorting 45 J1 47 JMI 46 L Learn Macros Query LMC 278 Level Interrupts 347 348 Limit Testing 133 135 171 querying 172 Linking channels to EU conversion 72 80 236 247 commands 157 custom EU conversions 79 custom EU tables 80 resistance measurements 73 strain measurements 78 241 242 temperature measurements 75 voltage measurements 73 List of Lists 331 automatic scan list sequencing 120 121 description 113 initialize to null 372 scanning channels at different rates 120 121 LMC 278 Loading custom EU tables 79 136 190 191 Logical Address 16 17 Low Noise Measurements 36 Low Pass Filter enabling disabling 235 query state 236 LOW LIMIT 359 Lower Limit querying 170 setting 169 testing 170 171 Maximum CALibration TARE offsets 140 182 common mode voltage 294 i
69. Module from the A D Module Extraction Lever HP E1413 A D Module lt Extraction Lever Figure 2 18 Removing the HP E1413 Terminal Module Chapter 2 Field Wiring 53 DONA ee ee O O OD O ee ee ee 000 Oo O OOOO poop po 0000 GROUNDS COMMON H H HH H r r GROUNDS COMMON tak L3 HLG HLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLG US HIS UH HTI GND LCALHCAL LO HI GLH GLHGLHGLHGLHGLH GLHGLH CHOO CHO CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 CHOS CHOG 07 5g
70. Set cutoff frequency of 100 Hz for first 20 channels INP FILT FREQ 2 155 Set cutoff frequency of 2 Hz for channel 55 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt channel gt returns the cutoff frequency currently set for channel Non programmable SCP channels may be queried to determine their fixed cutoff frequency Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only This command is for programmable filter SCPs only Returned Value Numeric value of Hz as set by the INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency command The C SCPI type returned is float32 Related Commands INPut FILTer L PASs FREQuency INPut FILTer LPASs STATe RST Condition MIN Usage INP FILT LPAS FREQ 155 Check cutoff frequency on channel 55 INP FILT LPAS FREQ 100 Check cutoff frequency on channel 0 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 205 INPut INPut FILTer LPASs STATe Parameters Comments Usage INPut FILTer LPASs STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables or disables a programmable filter SCP channel When disabled lt enable gt OFF these channels are in their pass through mode and provide no filtering When re enabled lt enable gt ON the SCP channel reverts to its previously programmed setting Parameter
71. all channels Usage OUTP CURR STAT OFF 100 108 Turn off current source channels 0 and 8 OUTPut CURRent STATe OUTPut CURRent STATe lt channel gt returns the state of the Current Source SCP channel specified by channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only Returned Value Returns 1 for enabled 0 for disabled The C SCPI type returned is uint16 Related Commands OUTPut CURRent STATe OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude Usage OUTP CURR STAT 108 Query for state of Current SCP channel 8 Execute enter statement here Enter query value either 1 or 0 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 215 OUTPut OUTPut SHUNt STATe OUTPUut SHUNI STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt adds shunt resistance to one leg of bridge on Strain Bridge Completion SCPs This can be used for diagnostic purposes and characterization of bridge response Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable gt boolean uint16 1 0 OFF ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments If ch list specifies a non strain SCP Error 3007 Invalid signal conditioning module is generated e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated
72. e Related Commands DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD For HP E1505 Current Source set channel 7 Usage DIAG COMM SCPWRITE 696 3 on SCP 2 to 488 mA with output enabled Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 189 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear lt table_range gt lt table_block gt lt ch_list gt downloads a custom linear Engineering Unit Conversion table in lt table_block gt to the HP E1313 E1413 Contact your Hewlett Packard System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for your application Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units table range numeric float32 015625 03125 0625 125 25 5 volts 1121418116132164 table block definite length block See Comments below none data ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments able block is a block of 8 bytes that define 4 16 bit values SCPI requires that table block include the definite length block data header C SCPI adds the header for you table range specifies the range of voltage that the table covers from table range to table range The value you specify must be within 5 of one of the nominal values from the table above ch list specifies which channels may use this custom EU table Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom e RST Condition All custom EU tables
73. gt Page 241 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FPOisson range G ch list Page 241 SENSe FUNCtion STRain HBENding range QG ch list Page 241 SENSe FUNCtion STRain HPOisson range G ch list Page 241 SENSe FUNCtion STRain QUARter lt range gt lt ch_list gt Page 241 SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt Page 243 SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt Page 245 SENSe REFerence lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt Page 246 SENSe REFerence TEMPerature degrees gt Page 247 SENSe STRain EXCitation lt excite_v gt lt ch_list gt Page 248 SENSe STRain EXCitation lt channel gt Page 248 SENSe STRain GFACtor lt gage_factor gt lt ch_list gt Page 249 SENSe STRain GFACtor lt channel gt Page 249 SENSe STRain POISson lt poisson_ratio gt lt ch_list gt Page 250 SENSe STRain POISson G channel Page 250 SENSe STRain UNS Trained unstrained v Q ch list
74. returns 1 never failed failed in scan2 and scan3 never failed failed in scan1 gt did not fail in latest scan did not fail in latest scan did not fail in latest scan did not fail in latest scan returns 0 returns 0 returns 0 returns 0 2101 2103 0105 9107 annn lt 5 lt Within Limit Figure 4 8 Querying Limit Test Results Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 135 Custom EU Conversion Tables Standard EU Operation Custom EU Operation Note Custom EU Tables Custom Thermocouple EU Conversions The HP E1313 E1413 provides for loading custom EU conversion tables This allows you to have on board conversion of transducers not otherwise supported by the HP E1313 E1413 The EU conversion tables built into the HP E1313 E1413 are stored in a library in the module s non volatile Flash Memory When you link a specific channel to a standard EU conversion using the SENSe FUNCtion command the module copies that table from the library to a segment of RAM allocated to the specified channel When a single EU conversion is specified for multiple channels multiple copies of that conversion table are put in RAM one copy into each channel s Table RAM Segment The conversion table per channel arrangement allows higher speed scanning since the table is already loaded and ready to use when the channel is scanned Custom EU conve
75. u uua apa argon H HLGHLGH UBMHLGHLGHLGHLGHLG GLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLH 16 7 1 19 20 2 22 23 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 24 25 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 HLGHLOGH HLGHLGHLGHLGHLE CLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLH B 9 I ON BOARD B B Remote Temperature Sensing Trigger and other Connections Terminal Block with Figure 2 4 HP E1413 Terminal Module Layout GND B E TRICE E HCAL LonM 8 JB B BB BB EE EE ZE ND PPRE HLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLG OO dee 59 00
76. 00102 indicates an HP E1413C This command is provided to allow your custom application to determine if you can access the extended hardware capability of the B or C version The B and C version can respond to V XIbus D32 data transfers while the A version is a D16 device The VXIbus resource manager in your system will automatically use the proper data transfer mode Appendix D Register Based Programming 359 SCBREAD lt regaddr gt 080016 Returns a 16 bit value which is the contents of the requested register on the SCP Bus regaddr is an 11 bit address which has the two formats shown below Accessing SCP Channel Registers 10 9 8 6 5 3 2 0 CAL Plug on Chan addr Reg addr Accessing Whole SCP Registers 10 9 8 6 5 3 2 0 CAL Plug on Reg_addr Plug on SCP slot number 0 7 Chan_addr Channel number on SCP 7 Reg_addr register address see individual SCP reference To access registers which apply to the whole SCP set the CHN bit to zero To access registers for individual channels set CHN bit to one The CAL bit is zero when accessing SCPs and one when accessing registers which control the calibration relays SCBWRITE lt regaddr gt lt word gt 081016 Writes the 16 bit value word to a location on the SCP Bus determined by regaddr The format of regaddr is documented above Required Signal Signal Conditioning Plug ons have several requ
77. 1 0 0 IRQ4 1 0 1 IRQ5 1 1 0 IRQ6 1 1 1 IRQ7 Interrupt Status Register Base 1616 Read Write The Interrupt Status Register returns the state of all sources of interrupt regardless of state of the Interrupt Mask Register There are two types of interrupts level and strobed Level interrupts are interrupts that persist from an interrupt source and requires the host to service the interrupt through reads and writes to the interrupt source Strobed interrupts are interrupts that do not persist and require the host to acknowledge the interrupt by writing a one 1 back to the appropriate bit in the Interrupt Status Register Appendix D Register Based Programming 347 Level Interrupts FIFO Half Full Strobed Interrupts FIFO Overflowed Meas Complete Over voltage Detect Trigger Too Fast SCP Trigger Limit Test Exceeded Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0 Base 4 1616 Limit Test Exceeded SCP Trig Meas Trig Too Over V Scan FIFO FIFO not used Complete Fast Detect Complete Over Half Full flowed A one 1 in a bit indicates that the interrupt source is asserted A zero 0 in a bit indicates that the interrupt source is de asserted Limit Test Exceeded This bit will be set to one 1 at the end of each Scan List in which a channel has exceeded its limit test SCP Trigger A one 1 in this bit indicates that a Signal Conditioning Plug on SCP h
78. 107 Upper limit set to 2VDC CALC LIM LOW DATA 01 105 107 Lower limit set to 01 VDC CALC LIM STAT ON 101 103 105 107 Enable overall limit testing CALC LIM UPP STAT ON 101 103 105 107 Znable upper limit testing CALC LIM LOW STAT ON 101 103 105 107 Enable lower limit testing SAMP TIM LIST1 lt t gt tc can be 10 5 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM PER fp tp can be Ims 6 5536 s TRIG COUN count count can be 1 32768 or INF ARM SOUR source source can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTrgo TTLTrg7 INIT IMM Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping Stops when Trigger Count is reached unless count is INF then use ABORt 134 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 1 Scan 4 last scan lt O00 CALC LIM FAIL CURR CALC LIM FAIL CURR CALC LIM FAIL CURR E CALC LIM FAIL CURR Querying Limit Test Results CALC CLIM FAIL CUMULATIVE returns 1 failed chs 3 3 and 7 CALC CLIM FAIL CURRENT returns 0 none failed latest scan CALC CLIM FLIMITS CHAN CUM returns 64 element 16 bit array with elements 3 and 7 1 all others 20 CALC CLIM FLIMITS CHAN CURR returns 64 element 16 bit array with all 0 none failed latest scan CALC LIM FAIL CUM 101 CALC LIM FAIL CUM 103 CALC LIM FAIL CUM 105 CALC LIM FAIL CUM 107 returns 0 returns 1 returns 0
79. 19 31 i ej 6 H19 65 20 45 095 92 30 fel 5 02 45 21 46 145 L18 29 4 H18 Chan nen 46 22 e je 47 146 I 1 54 HE 16 31 J L17 28 Jig e 3 H17 NOSE HE TEST G5 23 e 48 095 62 27 i 2 02 E er H47 24 49 147 116 26 lel fel 1 H16 aa GND 25 e 50 GND HE Channel 00 15 Channel 48 63 LI 50 lle e 25 H Chan Chan H48 1 26 148 115 49 6 el 24 H15 0 15 9252 Ge 2 lel 27 Ge G1 48 ie 23 G1 26 1 H49 3 e 28 L49 L14 47 6 22 H14 PEHD i H50 4 e 29 150 L13 46 e 21 H13 06 5 le 30 G6 G1 45 20 G1 51 6 31 151 12 44 fe 19 H12 52 7 1 32 152 11 43 18 H11 i Ge e8 1 33 G6 G1 42 fe 17 G1 H53 9 34 L53 L10 41 e 16 H10 i H54 10 9 35 154 09 40 e 15 H9 i G6 11 9 36 G6 G1 29 e 14 G1 j P 55 12 1 37 155 108 38 6 e 13 56 13 6 38 156 117 27 12 H07 G7 14 39 G7 G0 36 je 11 GO 5 H57 15 9 40 157 06 35 e e 10
80. 264 SYSTem VERSion 265 T Table of Registers 335 Tare Cal Offset maximum 294 TAREAPPEND 366 TARECAL 367 TARECAL 367 TARENULL 367 Temperature accuracy 295 isothermal reference 41 77 237 measuring the reference 77 78 scanning two channels 42 thermocouple reference 77 Temperature Measurements 75 linking 75 reference 93 99 Terminal Blocks 331 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 423 Terminal Module 37 332 adding components to E1413 48 and SCPs 37 attaching HP E1413 52 attaching removing HP E1413 53 crimp and insert option 56 57 crimp and insert option accessories 57 GRD GND circuitry 45 grounding the guard terminal 45 layout 37 39 option A3E 56 57 option A3E accessories 57 option A3F 58 62 93 99 option A3F accessories 62 options 56 62 rack mount terminal panel 58 62 93 99 rack mount terminal panel accessories 62 removing HP E1413 53 tc measurements 42 temperature sensing 46 47 thermistor 46 47 wiring 49 52 wiring maps 54 58 Test Limits 133 135 Thermistor connecting 46 47 connections and operations 93 99 excitation sources 93 HP E1586 terminal panel 93 99 measurements 75 243 244 on board 40 41 operations and connections 93 99 using the center thermistor 95 96 using the left center and right 97 99 Thermocouple CALibration TARE command 138 181 custom EU conversions 136 238 239 measurements 46 76 measurements
81. 32 REAL 64 and 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program and Response Data section on page 156 of this chapter For REAL 32 each reading is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is a float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 each reading is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is a float64 array After RST Power on each channel location in the CVT contains the IEEE 754 value Not a number NaN Channels specified in the SENSe DATA CVT command that have not been measured during the scan will return the value 9 91E37 Channel readings which a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF anda negative overvoltage return EEE INF see table on page 200 for actual values for each data format RST Condition CVT contains IEEE 754 Not a Number SENS DATA CVT 9100 163 Return entire CVT 64 channels DATA CVTABLE 108 110 Return latest values from channels 8 and 10 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 229 SENSe SENSe DATA CVTable RESet SENSe DATA CVTable RESet sets all 64 Current Value Table entries to the IEEE 754 Not a number Comments The value of NaN is 9 910000E 037 ASCII e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e Related Commands SENSe DATA CVTable
82. 5 Checks FIFO and CVT 6 Checks measurement complete Measuring status bit 7 Checks operation of FIFO half and FIFO full IRQ generation 8 9 Checks trigger operation Analog Front End Digital Tests Test Description 20 Checks that SCP ID makes sense 30 32 Checks relay driver and FET multiplexer interface with EU CPU 33 71 Checks opening of all relays on power down or input overvoltage 34 37 Check FET multiplexer interface with A D digital 282 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 WAI Note Common Command Reference Analog Tests Test 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 53 54 55 56 57 58 58 60 63 64 65 70 71 72 78 74 75 76 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 88 89 91 92 93 Description Checks internal voltage reference Checks zero of A D internal cal source and relay drives Checks fine offset calibration DAC Checks coarse offset calibration DAC Checks internal and 15V supplies Checks internal calibration source Checks gain calibration DAC Checks that autorange works Checks internal current source Checks front end and A D noise and A D filter Checks zeroing of coarse and fine offset calibration DACs Checks current source and CAL BUS relay and relay drives and OHM relay drive See 33 Checks continuity through SCPs bank relays and relay drivers Checks open transducer detect Checks current leakage of the SCPs Checks voltage offset of the SCPs Checks mid scale strai
83. 535 The C SCPI type returned is int32 Related Commands TRIGger COUNt RST Condition TRIGger COUNt returns 1 Usage TRIG COUN Query for trigger count setting Enter statement Returns the TRIG COUN setting 268 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 TRIGger TRIGger IMMediate TRIGger IMMediate causes one trigger when the module is set to the TRIGger SOURce BUS or TRIGger SOURce HOLD mode Comments This command is equivalent to the TRG common command or the IEEE 488 2 GET bus command e Related Commands TRIGger SOURce Usage TRIG IMM Use TRIGGER to start a measurement scan TRIGger SOURce TRIGger SOURce frig source configures the trigger system to respond to the trigger event Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units trig source discrete string BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TIM none TTLTrg lt n gt HP E1313 Note Most B Size mainframes do not support VXIbus TTLTRG lines Comments The following table explains the possible choices Parameter Value Source of Trigger BUS TRIGger IMMediate TRG GET for HP IB EXTernal Trig signal on terminal module HOLD TRIGger IMMediate IMMediate The trigger event is always satisfied SCP SCP Trigger Bus future HP or SCP Breadboard TIMer The internal trigger timer See also TRIGger TIMer MODE TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines n 0 through 7
84. 6 Route signal leads as far as possible from the sources of greatest noise 7 In general do not connect Hi or Lo to Guard or Ground at the HP E1413 8 Itis best if there is a DC path somewhere in the system from Hi or Lo to Guard Ground 9 The impedance from Hi to Guard Ground should be the same as from Lo to Guard Ground balanced 10 Since each system is different do not be afraid to experiment using the suggestions presented here until you find an acceptable noise level Chapter 2 Field Wiring 43 power TE Shield Device Y Under Test pressure power A Example for T1 Powered power Transducers Shield B Shield Hi Device Under Test Lo Guard Fr Example for Thermocouples hi Shield Hi Device Under Test Lo D Guard Shield Hi Lo Example for E Guard Resistive Transducers Current Hi Current Lo Figure 2 8 Preferred Signal Connections Hi Lo Guard Remove Jumper to break Ground Loop e shield connected to ground at transducer Hi Lo Guard Leave Jumper in Place transducer floating Remove Jumper to break Ground Loop shield connected to ground at transducer Leave Jumper in Place transducer floating Jumper may be left in place since Current Lo is at HP E1413 GND Potential 44 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Termina
85. 64 channels A value of one indicates that the channel has exceeded its limits Individual Returns a single value for a specific channel A value of Channel one indicates that the channel has exceeded its test limits There are two versions of each of the query types explained above Cumulative Cumulative limit results are accumulated from the time the module is INITiated If a channel has exceeded its limits since INITiate even if it currently is within limits the event is recorded Current Current limit results indicate the status of limits tested during the last completed scan list Checking Results with the Status System Polling Poll by accessing bit 11 of the Operation Status Event Register When bit 11 is set to one one or more limits were exceeded Interrupt If bit 11 of the Operation Status Enable Register is set the Operation Summary bit will be sent to the Status Byte Register An out of limits condition can then be reported by interrupt Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 133 Example Command Sequence ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 SENS FUNC TEMP RTD 100 101 103 1000 RTD temperature channels 3 SENS FUNC VOLT DC 105 107 Autorange voltage channels 5 and 7 ROUT SCAN LIST1 Default is autorange voltage CALC LIM UPP DATA 750 101 103 Upper limit set to 750 C CALC LIM LOW DATA 450 101 103 Lower limit set to 450 C CALC LIM UPP DATA 2 105
86. 65 About Ths E 4 5 65 Module DESC 65 Default Settings After Power on RST or 572 66 Programming SOQquenOB su duode depo Rod b dor ESP de ee does 67 Step 1 Setting up Signal Conditioning Plug ons 70 SERE SUP sae qx rg do Y a TE que Rd ES 70 Senne Filter deri m 71 Setting Cument SOULCES 2555554 3 28 KR SOR Wo OR RS OR 71 Step 2 Linking Channels to EU Conversion oO ER 22 Linking Voltage Measurements 73 Linking Resistance Measurements 33 Linking Temperature Measurements 39 Linking Stam Mea melll seese e UR RUE 28 OR Ro eee eee ee Re 78 Linking Custom EU Conversions s eito ndes 79 Step 3 Performing Channel Calibration 81 Step 4 Defining and Selecting the Scan 4568 83 Denmog the Sca eoma om ob bee dedo ee a E ee aw 83 selecting the Current Scan List on ice beans cea 84 Step Set ne the Sample TINET 85 Step 6 Setting up the Trigger System 6 6 5 cs a ea ee o RR RS 86 The Dagger and Arm Model v4 usua bak hak ek eh EIL A 86 Selecting the Trigger Sous uuu debe REGE X E ORDERED ER RES 86 Selecting Timer and Continuous
87. 8 bits 1 0 16 bits Block Size These bits indicate the number of readings that may be read from the FIFO registers whenever the Block Ready bit is set The number of readings is encoded in binary such that Number of readings 2 where n is the value encoded in the Block Size field For the HP E1413 n is equal to 15 which makes the block size 32 768 readings Block Ready A one 1 indicates that there 1s a block of data available to be read from the FIFO registers The number of readings that can be read is encoded in the Block Size field A zero 0 indicates that less than a full block of readings is available FIFO Ready A one 1 indicates that there is at least one reading in the FIFO A zero 0 indicates that there is no valid data in the FIFO 352 Register Based Programming Appendix D FIFO Reading Count Register Base 2 16 Read only The FIFO Reading Count Register contains the number of 32 bit readings in the FIFO Address Base 2A16 15 0 Number of readings in FIFO Trigger System Registers Software Trigger ARM Register Base 2616 Write only A write to this register triggers a measurement scan if the trigger system is enabled and software trigger is selected as a trigger source If the above is true and bit 9 of the Trigger Mode Register is set a write to this register arms starts the trigger timer Address Base 2616 15 0 writ
88. A Trigger too Fast error occurs if the trigger timer is shortened until there is not enough overhead time to prepare for the next scan When this happens switch to the 1113MAN2 VEE program see next page 392 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E Usi ng HP VEE for The program 1413MAN2 VEE provides the full 100 sample speed 100 K Sample Notice that the Trig Source must be set to Immediate and Arm Source must be Immediate The Sample Time on the Scan list panel is what controls the pacing of readings Speed Flow Hath Help WEITE TEXT TIT OMT C Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 393 Using HP VEE with A slower but still popular system is one that uses a command module with a Command Module HP IB connection to the computer In systems that use a command module i e HP E1300 1 6 HP E1405 6 HP VEE s Direct I O register access cannot be used because there is no direct backplane connection Instead the HP E1313 E1413 data must be transferred using Direct I O SCPI commands as demonstrated in program 1413MAN3 VEE Pie Edi Fhne Dewce Daja Bailh Display ARTT TEXT Y TERT gs t RTE TEXT TOS REAL 17 ARTE TEXT CONT On EOL WEITE TEXT 70 20 1m H HW PH eet ieee F WRITE TEXT DATA PIP C COUNT 7
89. A3F In both cases four cables are required if all 64 channels are needed This also requires two HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panels since a single Terminal Panel only connects 32 channels The cables do not come with the HP E1313 E1413 Option A3F and must be ordered separately The cables are described in the following paragraphs This cable HP E1588A is a 16 channel twisted pair cable with an outer shield This cable is suitable for relatively short cable runs This cable HP Z2220A Option 050 is available in custom lengths It is a 16 channel twisted pair cable with each twisted pair individually shielded to provide better quality shielding for longer cable runs The Terminal Panel can be mounted in a standard size instrument rack To minimize temperature gradients across the panel it should be mounted in the rack such that it is away from the other heat sources The bottom of the rack is usually the preferred location Take particular care to minimize the temperature differences across the horizontal width of the Terminal Panel since it is most susceptible to horizontal temperature gradients across its longest dimension Optional high frequency common mode filters on the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel s input channels filter out AC common mode signals present in the cable that connects the terminal panel and the device under test These filters are useful for filtering out small common mode signals below 5Vp p To order these f
90. CALC CLIM FLIM POIN CURR A subsequent enter statement will return the number of limit tests exceeded CALCulate LIMit FAIL CUMulative CALCulate LIMit FAIL CUMulative lt channel gt returns the cumulative limit status for the channel specified by lt channel gt A one 1 indicates that lt channel gt has exceeded its limit test since the module was INITiated CUMulative Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt channel gt channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel Returned Value Numeric 1 or 0 The C SCPI type returned is int16 e Related Commands CALCulate LIMit STATe CALCulate LIMit LOWer commands CALCulate LIMit UPPer commands Usage CALC LIM FAIL 102 Return cumulative limit status for channel 2 168 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALCulate LIMit FAIL CURRent CALCulate LIMit FAIL CURRent lt channel gt returns the current limit status for the channel specified by lt channel gt A one 1 indicates that lt channel gt has exceeded its limit test during the last completed scan CURRent CALCulate Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel CALCulate LIMit Returned Value Numeric 1 or 0 The C SCPI ty
91. Card Control Registers Scan Status and Control Register Base 1016 Read Write This register controls and provides status of the execution of scan lists Note that bits 15 through 8 are read only and are used to report scan status and bits 7 through 0 are read write and are used to control the scan 342 Register Based Programming Appendix D Scan Control Bits Writing to these bits 7 0 controls the arming and execution of scan lists When this register is read for scan status bits 7 return their currently set values Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Base 1016 Abort List of Lists Auto arm Free run Reserved Next List Scan Status Writing to the Scan Status bits has no effect Abort Toggling this bit high then back low halts acquisition without completing the current scan list Data in the FIFO is undisturbed The number of valid readings in the FIFO can be determined from the FIFO Reading Count Register To flush the FIFO assert and de assert the FIFOCLR bit in the Card Control Register Note While the contents of registers are not disturbed Abort resets all configuration accomplished by executing register based commands Clearing both the Auto arm and Free run bits will end continuous scans when the current scan is complete without disturbing other configuration Note The control processor does not return to the command mode until the Abort bit is reset low again Leaving the A
92. Comments below none discrete string MIN MA ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments A programmable amplifier SCP has a choice of several discrete gain settings The gain set will be the one closest to the value specified by gain Refer to your SCP manual for specific information on the SCP you are programming Sending MAX will program the highest gain available with the SCP installed Sending MIN will program the lowest gain e Sending a value for gain that is greater than the highest or less than the lowest setting allowable for the SCP will generate Error 222 Data out of range e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands INPut GAIN RST Condition Gain set to MIN Usage INP GAIN 8 100 119 Set gain of 8 for first 20 channels INP GAIN 64 155 Set gain of 64 for channel 55 INPut GAIN INPut GAIN lt channel gt returns the gain currently set for channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only e If the channel specified does not have a programmable amplifier INPut GAIN will return the nominal as designed gain for that channel This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Returned Va
93. Count we 357 135 7 357 Channel Number ET Master V ARM 557 357 357 Slave tc is the sample time between channels tp is the pacing time between channel lists The large arrow is the pacing Trigger Timer The smaller arrows are sample triggers generated by the HP E1313 E1413 when stepping through the channel list The first large arrow is the arming event 116 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Example Command Sequence Card 1 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt SAMP TIM LIST n tc tc can be 105 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM PER fp lt tp gt can be Ims 6 5536 s TRIG COUN lt count gt count can be 1 32768 or INF ARM SOUR lt source gt lt source gt can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTrgo TTLTrg7 OUTP TTLT SOUR TRIG Will drive TTLT line if triggered OUTP TTLT lt n gt STAT Enable to drive selected ttltrg line n can be 1 through 7 INIT IMM Card 2 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt SAMP TIM LIST n gt lt te gt tc can be 10 5 32 768ms TRIG SOUR TTLTrg lt n gt Selects TTLTrg trigger source n can be 1 through 7 TRIG COUN lt count gt count can be 1 32768 or INF INIT IMM Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping
94. D calibration CAL STOR TARE Store channel offsets in non volatile memory after channel tare Storing A D Cal Constants Perform complete A D calibration then CAL STOR ADC Storing Channel Tare offset Values ch list To correct channel offsets 180 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALibration CAL STORE TARE Optional depending on necessity of long term storage CALibration TARE Important Note for Thermocouples Parameters CALibration TARE Q ch list measures offset or tare voltage present on the channels specified and stores the value in on board RAM as a calibration constant for those channels Future measurements made with these channels will be compensated by the amount of the tare value Use CALibration TARE to compensate for voltage offsets in system wiring and residual sensor offsets Where tare values need to be retained for long periods they can be stored in the module s Flash Memory Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory by executing the CALibration STORe TARE command For more information see Compensating for System Offsets on page 138 You must not use CALibration TARE on field wiring that is made up of thermocouple wire The voltage that a thermocouple wire pair generates cannot be removed by introducing a short anywhere between its junction and its connection to an isothermal panel either the HP E1313 E1413 s terminal module or a
95. Display Help Lintitie dt l x lor Acces MODE rcremeni On This sets up HP VEE to read the Current Value Memory that in step 2 we named CVT and store the results in variable X The Access Mode Increment on means that successive memory locations will be read to satisfy the number of readings that are specified In this case 64 readings have been specified which is the entire CVT table This results in channel zero as the first element in the 1D array and channel 63 as the 64th element 390 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E Using HP VEE with 1413MANI VEE is an example HP VEE program which operates on a Direct computer with direct VXI backplane access This program configures the HP E1313 E1413 with an instrument panel then uses Direct I O SCPI Backplane Access commands to start the collection of data Direct I O SCPI commands are used to determine the number of readings in the FIFO and then the FIFO and the CVT are transferred using Direct I O register access The instrument panel is shown with it s Trigger sub panel showing Trig Source is set to Timer which provides good control over the start of each scan however this adds overhead and prevents the full 100 K sample rate from being used Sample Time on the Scan list panel provides control over the time between channels within a scan list When the instrument panel is executed the HP E131
96. FIFO MSW FIFO LSW FIFO Reading Count and FIFO Status Registers Address 15 14 13 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1216 Rev Sub Mod 0 16 VME Slave VME Slave VME Mast Mast LBUS LBUS Type Type Send Rec Send Rec Send Rec Rev All ones indicates the current revision of the module Sub Type all bits always set to ones 1 Mod Type The Mod Type indicates the following Bit10 Bit9 Bit 8 Meaning 0 1 1 Signal Acquisition Conditioning Front Ends o 1 O0 _Analog interval to Digital Conversion 1 1 0 Data Storage 1 1 0 Data Processing 1 0 0 Digital to Analog Conversion 1 0 1 Signal Distribution Enhancement Rear Ends 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 1 Other A16 A one 1 indicates that the Virtual Instrument Basic Registers Send Data Send Count Send Status Receive Data Receive Count and Receive Status are in the A16 address space A zero 0 indicates that these registers are in A24 or A32 address space starting a address offset 816 The Send Data Send Count and Send Status Registers are the FIFO MSW and LSW Registers FIFO Reading Count and FIFO Status Registers respectively VME Slave Send A one 1 indicates that the device has the capability to send data via its VMEbus slave registers and implements both the Send Data and Send Status Registers A zero indicates that this capability is absent
97. FIFO buffer The FIFO allows the A D to maintain its high reading rate while your program transfers readings from this buffer Readings can be continuously retrieved while the instrument is scanning A single command provides access to the channel readings in the Current Value Table SENse DATA CVTable lt ch_list gt The ch list parameter specifies which channel value s to retrieve from the CVT After RST power on each channel location in the CVT contains the IEEE 754 value Not a Number NaN Channel readings which are positive overvoltage return IEEE and negative overvoltage return EEE INF Refer to the FORMat DATA command in Chapter 5 for the NaN INF and INF values for each data format To access the latest reading from each of the instrument s 64 channels SENS DATA CVT 100 163 Completes when 64 readings have been accepted by an input Statement Execute program input statement here Must input 64 readings To reset the CVT and set all values to NaN send the command SENSe DATA CVTable RESet 90 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Accessing the FIFO The command we will use here to access the contents of the FIFO buffer is SENSe DATA FIFO PART n readings This command returns the number of readings specified by lt n_readings gt 2 147 483 647 maximum The command completes only after n_readings have been transferred This is not the only FI
98. FIG1 1 22 22 221 e 2 2 2 4 2 2 oy 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Figure 1 2 Setting the HP E1413 Logical Address Chapter 1 Getting Started 17 Installing HP E1313 The following illustrations show the steps you will use to install the g ps y Sig nal Co nditioning HP E1313 Signal Conditioning Plug on modules SCPs Plug ons CAUTION Use approved Static Discharge Safe handling procedures anytime you have the covers removed from the HP Scanning A D Converter modules or are handling SCPs HP E1313 Step 1 Installing SCPs Remove the cover s from the HP E1313 D Remove 2 side panel screws and 2 front panel screws for each side 18 Getting Started Chapter 1 HP E1313 Step 2 Installing SCPs Align the SCP Connectors with the Module Connectors and then push in _ Tighten the SCP 22 retaining screw CAUTION Use approved Static Discharge handling procedures when handling the HP E1313A Scanning A D Module and SCPs NOTE No more than four HP E1510A Sample and Hold Option 020 SCPs can be used with an individual HP E1313A Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 HP E1313 Step 3 Installing SCPs Reinstall the cover s on the HP E1313
99. FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple allows you to use an EU table that is custom matched to thermocouple wire you have characterized Contact your Hewlett Packard System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for your application Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type discrete string EJJIKINIRISIT none range numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments See Linking Channels to EU Conversion in Chapter 3 for more information 238 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe e The range parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates Error 222 Data out of range Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange
100. Filter Registers For space reasons they are shown together but are controlled by individual SCPI commands Table 4 5 is the truth table for the Transition Filter Registers Table 4 5 Transition Filter Registers Condition PTRansition NTRansition Event Register Bit Register Bit Register Bit Register Input 0 1 0 0 0 The power on default condition is all Positive Transition Filter Register bits set to one and all Negative Transition Filter Register bits set to 0 This applies to both the Operation and Questionable Data Groups Questionable Data Group Examples If you only wanted the FIFO overflowed condition to be reported by the QUE bit bit 3 of the Status byte you would execute STAT QUES ENAB 1024 1024 decimal value for bit 10 If you wanted the FIFO overflowed and setup changed conditions to be reported you would execute STAT QUES ENAB 9216 9216 decimal sum of values for bits 10 and 13 Operation Status Group Examples If you only wanted the FIFO half full condition to be reported by the OPR bit bit 7 of the Status byte you would execute STAT OPER ENAB 1024 1024 decimal value for bit 10 Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 123 QUESTIONABLE DATA GROUP STATus QUEStionable CONDition read only STATus QUEStionable NTR and STATus QUEStionable PTR set filters STATus QUEStionable EVENt m STATus QUEStionable ENABle sets mask reads
101. Initiated Free run Reserved Current List Scan Control Note Check for Running high and Initiated low both de asserted before writing to the Scan Control Card Control or Trigger Mode Registers Running This bit is low 0 when the module is executing a scan list or register based MEAS command The card cannot accept commands while scanning but other A16 registers may be accessed as usual Normally one should avoid A24 card accesses except for reads of the Current Value Table when this bit is low Accessing other portions of the module s A24 address space could interfere with the scan Armed When asserted 1 this bit indicates that the module is initiated and is waiting for a scan trigger Armed is de asserted after the trigger is recognized by the control processor In Auto arm mode Armed toggles Initiated When asserted 1 this bit indicates that the module is initiated Initiated is de asserted only when the scan or scans in the case of Trigger Count gt 1 are complete Free run Mode This bit is asserted 1 when the module is armed or scanning in Free run Mode It may be different than the corresponding bit in the Scan Control Register because it indicates processor state rather than register contents Reserved These bits are reserved for future use Their value is indeterminate and should not be relied upon Current List When Running is asserted 0 this field shows t
102. Mode Arm 87 the Tapper CORRIGE cc koh ee eddie Reged A et A 88 Step 7 Specifying the Data 88 Step 8 Selecting the FIPO Mode 2424444452445 4 ODER RES 89 Step Initiating the Trigger Systemi 4 445444 oo EERE ROEDER S 4 89 Step TO Retieving Datei deu ke Roe rs e 90 Access the 90 Cie FIFO S 4s udo ae d E X pde RP ee A TS E ee AS 91 Exampl uode ORO EUREN SE HE 91 Example Command Seguente s c e sss sere EE He AR eA e 92 Using the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel 93 Thermistor Connections and Operations 93 Reference Temperature Measurements ac s oor ERA 93 Chapter 4 Understanding the HP 1313 1413 101 Advanced FIFO Data 101 General Form of the FIFO Data Retrieval Section 103 Choosing the Data Retrieval Method 104 Controlling Data Conversion and Destination 108 Understanding Scanning Modes ee ece ke RE 109 Triggering and Scanning Modes soe eb koe eRe RD 111 Continuous FreeRun Mode lt er RASS ES 111 Timer Paced Sans SS 112 Scan LINE RR ee Aide
103. Or I 0 1 00 1 08 0 09 0 o gt ox c 000 2 deg Appendix A 320 Specifications 009021 dog 00001 0008 0009 00 0 0000 000 09 0 0c c 00 Thermistor 10KQ filter off HP E1508 09 WA 61 140 60618 dH HAO 29114 81 140 80519 dH 08 I is MOT 091 Ov 1 001 08 0 reme 090 00 0c 07 Seq Specifications 321 Appendix A Notes 322 Specifications Appendix A Appendix B Error Messages Possible Error Messages 101 102 103 104 108 109 113 123 131 138 141 148 151 158 160 211 212 213 221 222 224 Invalid character Syntax error Invalid separator Data type error Parameter not allowed Missing parameter Undefined header Numeric overflow Invalid suffix Suffix not allowed Invalid character data Character data not allowed Invalid string data String data not allowed Block data error Trigger ignored Arm ignored Init ignored Settings conflict out of range Illegal parameter value Appendix B Error Messages 323 240 Hardware error Execute TST 253 Corrupt media 281 Cannot create program 282 Illegal program name 3
104. Or SMG ciere diei i ok Je e aede di 270 6 HPE1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module Contents TE reor DIMGENIDDES ERS 66 PERiod i499 RARO GH OER RAH 273 TRG ger amp uiid 274 Common Command R ference xu ee ERA X ENR VR ODS 275 U MET ee RAS SS SAADEH PER Law ERE 215 Qo P rmv DP 276 DMC lt gt lt gt 276 G e Oa doo Cee RR Ae We 276 ucc we oe 276 ESE NGS ok OK be OS Ped ESE EEK dob obe 277 ko A 277 amp CDSS cR ud 217 UME cad a poke ded 277 ip ah Be eek 277 278 2 278 POPE 278 PRI que Oe ee Eq eed de Ud d Vo 279 5554 abdo dede ao dede 9e e gere e a RC Bok 279 Lune Gk AE CE SRM KE E ak Eoo SEEMS 219 2555 OE EERE EUR Ure E 280 eB he det diode Ne gie eerie ect 280 ke bib 280 555 owed UE
105. Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable gt discrete string ON OFF none lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none e If the SCP has not yet been programmed ON enables the SCP s default cutoff frequency This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e RST Condition ON INP FILT LPAS STAT ON 115 117 Channels 115 and 117 return to previously set or default cutoff frequency INP FILT LPAS STAT OFF 100 115 Set channels 0 15 to pass through state INPut FILTer LPASs STATe Parameters INPut FILTer LPASs STATe Q channel returns the currently set state of filtering for the specified channel Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only Usage e Returned Value Numeric value either O off or pass through 1 on The C SCPI type returned is int16 INP FILT LPAS STAT 115 Enter statement returns either 0 or 1 INP FILT 69115 Same as above 206 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 INPut INPut GAIN INPut GAIN chan gain Q ch list sets the channel gain on programmable amplifier Signal Conditioning Plug ons Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan gain numeric float32 See
106. RUE Page 365 Ee ers Page 365 SORESGALE neges sive Page 365 euet a eres Page 365 SOURCE Page 366 ye SORES EO oR Page 366 SPANEO ionem D DISSI ei Page 366 ZOSTORBCADL 2213 eye dade th Cue dee Page 366 STORET R e ATA REN SS Page 366 TAREAPPEND Page 366 SCDARECALD eee SE Qa DE aded Page 367 2 eb 3 A a Page 367 zCTARENULL uen 367 er Or V Page 367 Scan List Commands ADVRATEM LL lube s ee NR REUS Page 367 ADVRATBL keue5eveesim RAICES Page 368 Lei EVER v ek E dedos Page 368 APPENDE vias sed t eR ee Page 368 ASSIGN ee qug REE EA Page 369 eyed e eret Page 372 NEW Direne da ned how Gaetan fein bara Page 372 SCPCHAR BSS BORE Y Page 372 SGPGAINS Pe Ore Page 372 CVT Commands to oat ode er Ere smt d Page 372 Trigger Commands amp ete eee ESO RUE APO alee ea Page 373 SCPTRIGEN s conce REPRE AER Page 373 TRIGCOUNT ign his Ae S xs Page 373 Debugging Commands AVERAGE erue eR env ERN Ex Page 373 zUDSPBBK err eee PU Page 374 IDSPOKB S Seve ee RU das Page 374 PSPEEK soe tes esee eoe Page 374
107. SOUR Ask HP E1413 to return trigger source configuration TRIGger TIMer MODE TRIGger TIMer MODE imer mode configures the trigger timer for either synchronous or asynchronous operation Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units timer mode discrete string SYNChronous ASYNchronous none Comments have time triggered scans while TRIGger TIMer MODE is ASYN you set TRIGger COUNt to the number of scans you wish to execute or INF for continuous scans A Timer Arm event will immediately trigger the first scan and start the Timer When the trigger count is reached and INITiate CONTinuous is ON the module stops the trigger timer and returns to the Waiting For Arm State At this point any asynchronous Arm event can immediately trigger a scan and 270 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 TRIGger restart the timer Use this mode when you want the Timer Arm to control the start of multiple timed scans See Figure 5 7 for operation Trigger Idle 4 INIT CONT OFF State INIT IMM or INIT CONT ON Sets Current lt Scan List Here yes no INIT CONT ON Initiated State Stop Timer Evenly timed triggers are assured only while inside this box Leaving this loop to change the Scan List for instance will cause Timer to be reset and re started Waiting For Timer Arm yes Trig Co
108. SOURce is TIMer or the continuous mode is set INITiate CONTinuous ON and TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Subsystem Syntax ARM IMMediate SOURce source SOURce Only while INIT CONT is ON amp TRIG SOUR is IMM TRIGger SOURce lt source gt TIMer 8 8 BUS 8 5 External gt intemal 2 HOLD gt 8 Trigger gger Signa 2 8 IMMediate 2 Enable TTLTrg lt n gt o sep Tii 8 lt Trigger Counter TRIGger COUNt lt count gt Figure 5 1 Logical Trigger Model 160 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 ARM IMMediate Comments Usage ARM SOURce Parameters Comments ARM Figure 5 1 shows the overall logical model of the Trigger System ARM IMMediate arms the trigger system when the module is set to the ARM SOURce BUS or ARM SOURce HOLD mode ARM IMMediate will cause Error 221 Settings Conflict unless ARM SOURce is BUS or HOLD e Related Commands ARM SOURce RST Condition ARM SOURce IMMediate ARM IMM After INIT system is ready for trigger event ARM Same as above IMM is optional ARM SOURce source configures ARM system to respond to the specified source Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units Source discrete string BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP none TTLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 1 through 7 The following table exp
109. STL Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units scan list discrete string LIST1 LIST2 LISTS LISTA LISTL none Comments Returned Value Numeric The C SCPI type returned is float32 Related Commands RST Condition Sample Timer for all Channel Lists is set to 1 0E 5 seconds Usage SAMP TIM LISTA Check the interval between channel measurements for scan list 4 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 227 SENSe SENSe Subsystem Syntax SENSe DATA CVTable QQ ch list RESet FIFO COUNt HALF HALF MODE lt mode gt MODE PART lt n_readings gt RESet FILTer LPASs STATe enable STATe FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt lt type lt range gt lt ch_list gt RESistance lt excite_current lt range gt lt ch_list gt STRain FBENding lt range gt lt ch_list gt FBPoisson lt range gt lt ch_list gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt HBENding lt range gt lt ch_list gt range Q ch list QUARter lt range gt lt ch_list gt TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt REFerence lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt
110. and the HP E1313 E1413 without writing any compiled C code The hardware in the HP E1313 E1413 is designed such that it can constantly transfer readings to a computer while it continues to take more readings The rate at which these readings are transferred determines the rate at which data can be continuously acquired There are three main ways that HP VEE can communicate with the HP E1313 E1413 Communication Method Characteristic Instrument panel Easy to use slow to execute Direct SCPI commands Harder to use medium speed Direct I O register access Hardest to use fast How to Use HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 A good strategy to use with HP VEE and the HP E1313 E1413 is to use an instrument panel to send SCPI commands to configure the HP E1313 E1413 as this will be easy and for the most part execution speed does not matter After the HP E1313 E1413 has been configured using an instrument panel then use Direct I O SCPI commands to start and monitor operations Readings should be moved using Direct I O register access in systems with a direct backplane connection or with Direct I O SCPI commands if a command module HP E1406A for example is used Moving data in the fastest possible manner is described as follows 1 The HP E1313 E1413 has registers that contain data in 32 bit real format This data can be used directly by HP VEE if one requirement is met This requirement is to have HP VEE version 3
111. bits set 258 263 setting bits 257 262 Purge Macros Command PMC 279 Q Quarter Bridge 78 241 242 Query address for VME memory 210 amplifier gain 207 averaging state 165 bytes for VME memory 211 channels limit testing 172 channels lower limit 170 channels upper limit 173 condition register bits set 254 259 current source SCP range 214 current source SCP state 215 current value table CVT 229 data format 201 enable register bits set 255 260 error queue 264 event register bits set 256 261 excitation voltage 219 248 FIFO buffer 230 FIFO buffer number of readings 231 232 FIFO mode 233 firmware version 196 gage factor 249 limit testing 135 166 169 low pass filter state 236 lower limit state 171 measurement pacing 227 measurements averaged 164 NTF register bits 257 262 NTF register bits set 257 262 OTD current 188 OTD state 195 poisson ratio 250 programmable filter SCP state 206 PTF register bits 258 263 PTF register bits set 258 263 readings in VME memory 197 response register 341 356 scan list 224 225 SCP filter cutoff 205 SCPI version compliance 265 shunt resistance 216 the module 379 380 trigger count 268 trigger source 270 trigger timer 272 trigger timer interval 274 TTLTrg line source 218 TTLTrg line state 218 unstrained voltage 251 upper limit state 174 VME memory state 212 Questionable Data Group 252 259 condition reg
112. can start a CALibration SETup operation on each and then execute a CALibration SETup command to complete the operation on each instrument e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands CALibration SETup CAL Usage CAL SET Start SCP Calibration on first HP E1413 5 Start SCP Calibration HP 14135 CAL SET Start SCP Calibration on last HP E1413 CAL SET Query for results from first HP E1413 5 Query for results from more HP E1413s CAL SET Query for results from last HP E1413 CALibration SETup CALibration SETup returns a value to indicate the success of the last CAL SETup or CAL operation CALibration SETup returns the value only after the CALibration SETup operation is complete Comments Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYSTem ERRor See Error Messages in Appendix B Also run TST 2 No results available No CAL or CALibration SETup done The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Related Commands CALibration SETup CAL Usage See CALibration SETup Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 179 CALibration CALibration STORe Note Parameters Comments Usage Command Sequence CALibration STORe fype stores the most recently measured calibration constants into Flash Memory Electrically Erasable Progra
113. ch_list gt Half BENding HPOisson lt range gt lt ch_list gt Half Poisson QUARter range Q ch list RTD 85192 TCouple CUST E BEXTIJIKINISIT THERmistor 2250 5000 10000 TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt RTD 85 92 THERmistor 5000 REFerence lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt TEMPerature degrees c STRain EXCitation excite v G9 ch list EXCitation lt channel gt GFACtor gage factor G ch list GFACtor lt channel gt POISson lt poisson_ratio gt lt ch_list gt POISson lt channel gt UNSTrained lt unstrained_v gt lt ch_list gt UNSTrained lt channel gt STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle lt enable_mask gt ENABle 7 NTRansition transition mask NTRansition PTRansition transition mask PTRansition PRESet QUEStionable CONDition ENABle lt enable_mask gt ENABle Equate a function and range with groups of channels Links channels to custom EU conversion table loaded by DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear or DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise commands Links channels to custom reference temperature EU conversion table loaded by DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise commands Links channels to custom temperature EU conversion table loaded by DIAGnostic C
114. clears register 0 dah 1 dh n 2 Eu 3 tH 4 dh IE 5 6 ctm 0c 7 ctm p 5 Lost Calibration 8 n 8 b 1 Trigger Too Fast 9 ctm FIFO Overflowed 10 Overvoltage 11 cmd Ih VME Memory Overflow 42 9 Lh Setup Changed 43 14 tp 15 t STATUS BYTE GROUP He Summary Enable Condition Filter Event Enable m real time latched 1 enable realtime 0 1 2 tc Summary Bit QUE e 5 ESB SRQ Summary Bit OPR OPERATION STATUS GROUP STB SRE mask value 2 STATus OPERation CONDition reads register SESS Se STATus OPERation NTR and STATus OPERatiorcE TR set filters Summary Bi
115. command sequences These are not example programs because they are not written in any computer language They are meant to show the HP E1313 E1413 SCPI commands and in which sequence they should be sent Where necessary these sequences include comments to describe program flow and control such as loop end loop and if end if See the code sequence on page 105 for an example Chapter 1 Getting Started 29 Typical C SCPI Verify program file name verif cs is printed below to show a typical Example Program program for the HP E1313 E1413 ie vents cs 1 Prints the HP E1413A Module s identification manufacturer and revision number 2 Prints the Signal Conditioning Plug ons SCPs identification if any at each of the SCP positions 3 Takes voltage measurements on channels 100 to 163 and returns the readings from the Current Value Table CVT and include lt stdio h gt include lt cscpi h gt Defines module s logical address define LADD 24 Declares module as a register device INST_DECL e1413 E1413A REGISTER Prototypes of functions declared later void rst clr void void id scps void void start ad void void get readng void void prt readng float32 int32 check error char KICK Kk kk kk I RRR kk kc kk ckckckck ck kckck KR main Main function c
116. depends on the parameters range and lt lowhigh gt range is an integer from 1 to 4 where 4 indicates the highest range If lt lowhigh gt 0 the output voltage is approximately zero volts If lt lowhigh gt 1 the output voltage is approximately 90 of A D full scale for the indicated range SPANHI range lt highword gt lt lowword gt 408016 Tells the CPU the voltage of the on card source as measured by an external DMM after the source has been set up by a SOURCE range 1 command range is an integer from 1 to 4 where 4 indicates the highest range The concatenation of lt highword gt and lt lowword gt is an IEEE floating point number in Motorola format representing the source voltage SPANLO range highword lt lowword gt 404016 Tells the CPU the voltage of the on card source as measured by an external DMM after the source has been set up by a SOURCE range 0 command range is an integer from 1 to 4 where 4 indicates the highest range The concatenation of lt highword gt and lt lowword gt is an IEEE floating point number in Motorola format representing the source voltage STORECAL 800016 If the Flash Memory Enable jumper JM2201 is enabled calibration constants which apply to the A D subsystem and channel gain and offset are copied into Flash Memory STORETAR 801016 If the Flash Memory Enable jumper JM2201 is set to enable the Channel Tare offset constants are co
117. exceeded its limit test since the module was INITiated the returned value will be 1 If no channel has exceeded its limit test the returned value will be 0 e This condition is also reported to bit 11 of the Operation Status Group and can generate a VXIbus interrupt Returned Value Numeric 0 or 1 The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CUMulative CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CURRent CALCulate LIMit commands Usage CALC CLIM FAIL CUM A subsequent enter statement will return 0 for no limit failures or 1 for one or more limit failures CALCulate CLIMits FAIL CURRent CALCulate CLIMits FAIL CURRent returns the composite limit test status for all channels measured in the last completed scan CURRent Comments If any channel in the last completed scan has exceeded its limit test the returned value will be 1 If no channel in the last completed scan has exceeded its limit test the returned value will be 0 This condition is also reported to bit 11 of the Operation Status Group and can generate a V XIbus interrupt Returned Value Numeric 0 or 1 The C SCPI type returned is int16 e Related Commands CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits commands CALCulate LIMit commands Usage CALC CLIM FAIL CURR A subsequent enter statement will return 0 for no limit failures or 1 for one or more limit failures 166 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference C
118. faceplate connector pin out 64 flash memory protect jumper 28 input protect jumper 28 logical address switch 17 option A3E 56 57 option A3E accessories 57 option A3F 58 62 93 99 option A3F connector pin out 59 60 option A3F accessories 62 reference temperature sensing 41 removing terminal module 52 53 SCPs installing 22 25 temperature sensing 47 terminal module layout 39 terminal module map 55 terminal module options 56 62 terminal module wiring 50 51 thermistor 47 using with HP VEE 385 400 HP E1504 Breadboard SCP using 195 HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel connecting 61 HP common mode filters 62 mounting 61 62 option 001 62 thermistor connections 93 99 using the 93 99 HP VEE accessing FIFO 387 communication methods 385 for 100K sample speed 393 measurement speeds 395 using 385 400 using with command module 394 using with V XI backplane 391 HP IB serial poll SPOLL 128 service request SRQ 280 ID Register 338 360 Identity Query IDN 277 278 IDN 277 IEEE INF 200 IEEE INF 200 IEEE GET command 269 Impedance input 294 Implied SCPI Commands 154 Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block 156 INITiate Subsystem 202 203 INIT CONTinuous 89 202 203 INIT IMMediate 89 203 Initiating the Trigger System 89 Input external trigger 294 impedance 294 protect feature disabling 26 28 voltage maximum 294 INPut Subsystem 204 208 INP FILT LPAS FREQ 71 204
119. filter off HP E1508 09 HAO 2191119 61 140 60 1H dH SAO 293115 81 LdO 80614 dH 00 08 0009 00 00 0C HAA WYL MS 00 081 091 0c T 001 08 0 09 0 0 0c 07 000 Appendix 312 Specifications Reference RTD filter off 80q SHO J T 140 061H dH SHO J9 11 LdO 10519 dH 00 0S 00001 00706 00001 007001 00 007 00 05 00 00 ede POT ET AT 2 4 GLa l4 enpara 00 05 5 00 007 0006 007005 007056 007009 00059 gt 00 00 000627 O1 83 Specifications 313 Appendix A RTD filter off 83 JUL 9X 1 140 051 dH AHO 124 11 1 0 10618 dH 001 050 000 e l 000 00705 00001 00051 00002 00 0 2 00 00 00 0st 00007 00057 0000 00 055 01 83 Appendix A 314 Specifications RTD filter off HP E1508 09 0071 080 090 0t 0 000 000 0c 0 82 cel 9X 000 00706 wi 0001 00002 00 0S 00 00 00 0S THO 291119 61 140 60618 dH AHO 291114 81 LdO 80614 dH 01 Seq Specifications 315 Appendix A Thermistor 225
120. following table and Figure D 2 show the relationship between bits 10 8 and the memory pages mapped Bit10 Bit9 Bits 0 0 0 A24 Window shows Current Value Table default An example of accessing module memory through the A24 Window is retrieving the module ID information Set the A24 Window bits to 1102 to point to the module s Flash Memory Now at Base 8016 begins a string of characters that form the module s ID string An example of this string is HEWLETT PACKARD E1413A 0894A05779 A 03 23 Mon Aug 15 16 13 44 MDT 1994 d B model serial firmware creation date firmware revision Appendix D Register Based Programming 345 SFFFF 16 Flash Memory RAM 32k words high byte FF ROM table page 2 ROM table page 1 256k byte 32k words A24 window 16 bit Words Code page 3 Code page 2 Code page 1 16k words DSP 1 0 space 64k words 4k Ca 4k Ca DSP OOOFF 6 Fixed Data Ram page 0 CNT 32k words output 8k Boot 0000016 enable JM220 to write Card Control Register A24 Window bits 000 001 110 111 10 8 Figure D 2 A24 Memory Mapping Notes 1 Normally bits 10 8 are zero 0 so that the Current Value Table can be accessed through A24 address space 2 CVT channel values start at Base 0000016 channel 0 with each channel location
121. for channels 31 through 63 see below SENS FUNC TEMP 131 163 76 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Note A scan list must include a reference temperature channel before related thermocouple channels or the fixed reference temperature must have been supplied before starting to scan thermocouple channels see following section Thermocouple The isothermal reference temperature is required for thermocouple Reference Tem perature temperature EU conversions The Reference Temperature Register must be loaded with the current reference temperature before thermocouple channels are scanned The Reference Temperature Register can be loaded two ways 1 By measuring the temperature of an isothermal reference junction during a scan 2 By supplying a constant temperature value that of a controlled temperature reference junction before a scan is started Setting up a Reference The SENSe REFerence sensor type sub type range D ch list Temperature Measurement command links channels to the reference temperature EU conversion When the channel is scanned the reference temperature is measured and stored in the Reference Temperature Register the FIFO and the CVT The reference value is applied to all subsequent thermocouple channel measurements until another reference temperature value is stored in the Reference Temperature Register The ch list parameter specifies any sense channel that is connected to
122. for the first and third SCP complete channel lists for readability only DIAG OTD STAT ON 100 115 DIAG OTD STAT OFF 108 Same function as example above only first channel of each SCP specified Disable OTD for the 8 channels on the second SCP only first channel of SCP specified 194 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe lt channel gt returns the current state of Open Transducer Detection for the SCP containing the specified channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only Returned Value Returns 1 enabled or 0 disabled The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands DIAGnostic OTDetect S TATe Usage DIAG OTD STAT 108 Enter statement returns either a 1 or a 0 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD reg addr returns data word from a custom Signal Conditioning Plug on register Use to control custom SCPs created using the HP E1504 Breadboard SCP Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units reg gt numeric int32 0 65 535 none Comments See the Register Programming Section of your SCP Manual for parameter values Returned Value Returns numeric register
123. for thermocouple measurements Figure 2 11 shows the configuration for the HP E1313 terminal module and Figure 2 12 shows the configuration for the HP E1413 terminal module Under Cover REMote Place both JM1 jumpers here to route current source to terminals HTI and LTI Connect these terminals to remote thermistor or RTD Sense with any sense channel LOCAL Place both JM1 jumpers here to connect current source to on board thermistor RT1 Sense RT1 by connecting any sense oo LT LT LT N Pry Pry at this point fig2 7r Figure 2 11 Temperature Sensing for HP E1313 Terminal Module 46 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Under Cover ON BOARD Place both J1 jumpers here to connect current source to on b
124. gain of x16 and so forth Example 2 If an SCP module has SCALE 0000b fixed since SHIFT is always zero the SCP module has gain permanently fixed at unity for all channels Example 3 If an SCP module has CHGAIN 0001b fixed for all channels and if the bottom 3 bits of SCALE are programmable with the sign bit is fixed at 1 Then the SCP is a programmable attenuator gain 1 0 and attenuation is programmed for the entire SCP as follows Scale Shift Function 10002 0 unity gain 10012 1 divide by 2 10102 2 divide by 4 10112 3 divide by 8 etc Note that the HP E1413 does not support attenuation by greater than 2 on standard SCP modules due to fixed point arithmetic limits This does not prevent SCPs from implementing larger attenuation factors but such factors will not work correctly on the HP E1413 Configuring an SCP for a larger attenuation will cause an error during execution of the CARDCAL command Note The Control Processor needs to know the SCP channel gain settings to properly perform an EU conversion for each channel The SCPGAINS command reads all channel gains and must be executed once the gains are set and scan lists are defined see ASSIGN and APPEND commands 362 Register Based Programming Appendix D Calibration Commands The Calibration commands provide for four levels of calibration A D Calibration In these procedures an external multimeter is used to det
125. gh aus e tee ek Page 280 ETSE aah al SP ROE a Die nha UTC Page 281 SWATI x cee sens tita or oS Page 283 152 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Command Fundamentals Common Command Format SCPI Command Format Command Separator Abbreviated Commands Commands are separated into two types IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and SCPI Commands The SCPI command set for the HP E1313 E1413 is 1990 compatible The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the Common commands that perform functions like reset self test status byte query etc Common commands are four or five characters in length always begin with the asterisk character and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character Some examples of Common commands are 5 ESR32 5 SCPI commands perform functions like starting a scan making measurements and querying instrument states or retrieving data A subsystem command structure is a hierarchical structure that usually consists of a top level or root command one or more lower level commands and their parameters The following example shows part of a typical subsystem ROUTe SCAN scan list SEQuence DEFine lt scan_list gt lt ch_list gt POINtS scan list ROUTe is the root command SCA
126. groups we will use two scan lists The scan list to be executed least often contains the channels from both the high rate group and the low rate group ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LIST1 100 107 The scan list to be executed most often contains only the channels from the high rate group ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LIST2 100 103 Now we will define LISTL to scan the high rate group four times for every scan of the low rate group Define LISTL to reference scan list 2 three times and scan list 1 once ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LISTL 2 2 2 1 When triggered the module will scan these channels LIST2 LIST2 LIST2 LIST1 LIST2 LIST2 LIST2 5711 LISTL LISTL repeated 120 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Programming Four Different Rates Setting the Absolute Scan Rate To program four groups of channels to scan at different rates we will use all four scan lists Our example scan channels 0 through 15 300 times each second scan channels 16 through 31 150 times each second scan channels 32 through 47 50 times each second scan channels 48 through 63 10 times each second We will define the minimum rate group channels 0 63 in scan list 1 Scan list 2 will be defined as channels 0 47 Scan list 3 will be channels 0 31 Scan list 4 will be only channels 0 15 As you can see the higher rate scan lists are subsets of the lowest rate scan list The maximum rate is 30 times the minimum rate so we will need thirty e
127. have 64 channels DONE A zero 0 in bit 7 indicates that the module is processing a command and its parameters Bit 7 is set to a one 1 to indicate that the command is finished Appendix D Register Based Programming 339 Status Bit Precedence VXI Control Register The validity of this bit is determined by bit 0 and in turn bit 7 determines the validity of bit 1 See Status Bit Precedence for more information NOERR A zero 0 in bit 6 indicates that an error has occurred Ready A zero 0 in bit 3 with a one 1 in bit 2 indicates that the module has not completed its initialization process Passed A zero 0 in bit 2 indicates that the module is executing a reset or has failed it self test A one 1 in bit 2 indicates that the reset has finished or the self test passed Query Resp Ready A one 1 in bit 1 indicates that data returned by a query command is available in the Query Response Register The bit is cleared 0 when the register is read Cmd Parm Ready A one 1 in bit 0 indicates that a command or parameter op code can be written to the Command or Parameter Register The bit is cleared 0 when the Command Register is written to Certain Status bits indicate the validity of other bits in the Status Register This solves race condition between the selected bits When Cmd Parm Ready is zero 0 DONE is invalid This allows the module to clear DONE to indicate that a command is being processed
128. hex octal Q or binary B VXI Interrupts When Operation Status Group bits 4 8 9 10 or 11 are enabled VXI card interrupts will occur as follows When the event corresponding to bit 4 occurs and then is cleared the card will generate a VXI interrupt When the event corresponding to bit 8 9 10 or 11 occurs the card will generate a V XI interrupt NOTE In C SCPI the C SCPI overlap mode must be on for V XIbus interrupts to occur e Related Commands STB SPOLL STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation ENABle Cleared By STATus PRESet and power on RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER ENABLE 1 Set bit 0 in the Operation Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle returns the value of bits set in the Operation Enable Register Comments Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 e Related Commands STB SPOLL STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation ENABle e RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER ENABLE Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the Operation Enable Register Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 255 STATus STATus OPERation EVENt Comments Usage STATus OPERation EVENt returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Event Register When using the Operation Event Register to
129. incremented by 4 byte addressing CVT Channel to address Base 0000016 channel numberx 4 Open Transducer Detect Writing a one 1 to a bit enables open transducer detect on the particular signal conditioning module Writing a Zero 0 to a bit disables open transducer detect Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit2 Bit 1 Bit 0 SCP7 SCP6 SCP5 SCP4 SCP3 SCP2 SCP1 SCPO 346 Register Based Programming Appendix D Interrupt System Registers Interrupt Configuration Register Base 1416 Read Write The Interrupt Configuration Register is used to select the VXI interrupt level to be used when the module interrupts and controls which events are enabled to cause a VXI interrupt Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 3 2 0 Base 1416 Limit Test SCP Trig Meas Too Over V Scan FIFO FIFO not Interrupt Exceeded Complete Fast Detect Complete over Half full used Level flowed Interrupt Mask bits 15 8 Writing a one 1 to a bit enables that bits interrupt Writing a zero 0 to a bit disables that bits interrupt Interrupt Level This field sets the interrupt level that the module will interrupt on Setting the interrupt level to 0 will disable the card from interrupting Bit 2 Bit 1 BitO Interrupt Level 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 1 IRQ1 0 1 0 IRQ2 0 1 1 IRQ3
130. is int16 e Executing CALibration TARE sets the Calibrating bit bit 0 in Operation Status Group Executing CALibration TARE resets the bit e Related Commands CALibration STORe TARE DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE Command Seq uence CAL TARE lt ch_list gt Correct channel offsets CAL TARE Return the success flag from the CAL TARE operation CAL STOR TARE Optional depending on necessity of long term Storage Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 183 CALibration CALibration TARE RESet Command Sequence CALibration TARE RESet resets the tare calibration constants to zero for all 64 channels Executing CALibration TARE RESet affects the tare cal constants in RAM only To reset the tare cal constants in Flash Memory execute CALibration TARE RESet and then execute CALibration STORe TARE CAL TARE RES Reset channel offsets CAL STOR TARE Optional if necessary to reset tare cal constants in Flash Memory CALibration VALue RESistance Parameters Comments Command Sequence CALibration VALue RESistance ref gt sends the just measured value of the on board reference resistor to the module for A D calibration Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Value Units ref ohms numeric float32 7 500 596 ohms e ref ohms must be within 5 of the nominal reference resistor value 7 500 Ohms and may be specified in Kohm kohm e A four wire
131. is not furnished by HP U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 October 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved 7 HEWLETT PACKARD HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Edition 6 Copyright 1996 Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual 9 Documentation History All Editions and Updates of this manual and their creation date are listed below The first Edition of the manual is Edition 1 The Edi tion number increments by 1 whenever the manual is revised Updates which are issued between Editions contain replacement pages to correct or add additional information to the current Edition of the manual Whenever a new Edition is created it will contain all of the Update information for the previous Edition Each new Edition or Update also includes a revised copy of this documentation his tory page Edition
132. list lt channel gt STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 163 CALCulate CALCulate AVERage COUNt CALCulate AVERage COUNt lt readings sets the number of A D measurements that will be averaged to produce a stored reading The same count applies to all measured channels in all scan lists when CAL Culate AVERage STATe is set to ON Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n readings numeric int16 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 Comments If INITiate CONTinuous is OFF n readings must be less than or equal to TRIGger COUNt Related Commands CALCulate AVERage COUNt CALCulate AVERage STATe e RST Condition CALCulate AVERage COUNt 2 Usage CALC AVER COUN 8 8 measurements averaged per reading stored CALCulate AVERage COUNt CALCulate AVERage COUNt returns the value which sets the number of measurements averaged per stored reading Comments Returned Value Numeric value either 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 or 256 The C SCPI type is int16 Related Commands CALCulate AVERage COUNt CALCulate AVERage STATe Usage CALC AVER COUN A subsequent enter statement will return the value currently set 164 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALCulate CALCulate AVERage STATe CALCulate AVERage STATe enable control
133. measurement 293 Response Registers 341 Retrieving data 90 FIFO data 101 107 230 232 234 FIFO data methods 104 firmware ID string 345 REVCODE 359 RMC 279 ROUTe Subsystem 220 225 ROUT SCAN 84 220 221 ROUT SEQuence DEFine 83 108 143 222 223 ROUT SEQuence DEFine 224 ROUT SEQuence POINts 225 RQS Bit 128 15 279 default settings 66 RTD Measurements 75 243 244 S Safety Warnings 10 SAMPle Subsystem 226 227 SAMP TIMer 85 145 226 SAMP TIMer 227 Sample Timer accuracy 294 setting 85 Scale Register 361 Scan control bits 343 status bits 344 status register 342 Scan List 331 absolute scan rate 121 automatic sequencing 113 120 121 current 109 defining 83 222 223 description 109 List of Lists 113 120 121 pacing 226 227 query 224 225 selecting 84 220 221 Scan List Commands ADVRATEL 368 ADVRATEn 367 APPENDL 368 APPENDn 368 ASSIGN 369 371 NEWL 372 372 register based 367 372 SCPCHAR 372 SCPGAINS 372 Scan Register 342 Scanning channel groups 120 121 channels at absolute rates 121 channels at different rates 120 121 externally paced scans 114 internal timer based 116 119 modes 111 modes continuous 110 111 115 202 modes counted 109 110 modes default 109 110 modes external 114 modes internal timer based 116 119 modes sequenced 113 modes timer paced 112 modes understanding the 109 110 rate absolute 121 reducing settling
134. measurement of the resistor can be made with an external multimeter connected to the H Cal L Cal H ohm and L ohm terminals on the terminal module or the V H V L and L terminals on the Cal Bus connector Use the CALibration CONFigure RESistance command to configure the reference resistor for measurement at the Cal Bus connector Use the CALibration CONFigure RESistance command prior to CALibration VALue RESistance or Error 3004 illegal command will occur Related Commands CALibration CONFigure RESistance CALibration STORe ADC CAL CONF RES Now measure voltage with external DMM CAL VAL RES measured value Send measured value to module 184 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALibration CALibration VALue VOLTage CALibration VALue VOLTage ref vol s sends the value of the just measured DC reference source to the module for A D calibration Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ref volts numeric float32 must be within 1096 of range nominal volts Comments The value sent must be for the currently configured range and output ZERO or FSCale as set by the previous CALibration CONFigure VOLTage range zero fs command Full scale values must be within 1046 of 0625 25 1 4 or 10 the voltage reference provides 10 VDC on the 16 V range ref volts may be specified in millivolts mv A measurement of the
135. more than 65 024 readings FIFO 11 2048 080016 Over voltage input protection jumper has not been cut the input Detected on Input relays have been opened and RST is required to reset the module Overvoltage will also generate an error 12 4096 100016 VME Memory The number of readings taken exceeds VME memory space Overflow 13 8192 200016 Setup Changed Channel Calibration in doubt because SCP setup may have changed since last CAL or CALibration SETup command RST always sets this bit STATus QUEStionable CONDition Comments STATus QUEStionable CONDition returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Condition Register The Condition Register reflects the real time state of the status signals The signals are not latched and therefore past events are not retained in this register see STATus QUEStionable EVENt Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 e Related Commands CALibration VALue RESistance CALibration VALue VOLTage STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle RST Condition No change Usage STATUS QUESTIONABLE CONDITION Enter statement will return value from the Condition Register Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 259 STATus STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt enable_mask gt sets bits in the Enable Register that will enabl
136. n a Changing Gains or Filters Unexpected Channel Offsets or Overloads If you decide to change channel s SCP setup after a CALibration TARE operation you must perform a CAL operation to generate new DAC constants and reset the range floor for the stored Tare value You must also consider the tare capability of the range gain setup you are changing to For instance if the actual offset present is 0 6 Volts and was Tared for a 4 Volt range Gain x1 setup moving to a 1 Volt range Gain x1 setup will return overload values for that channel since the 1 Volt range is below the range floor as set by CALibration TARE See the table under FORMat DATA in Chapter 5 for more on values returned for overload readings This can occur when your HP E1313 E1413 s Flash Memory contains CALibration TARE offset constants that no longer appropriate for its current application Execute CALibration TARE RESet then CAL to reset the tare constants in RAM Measure the affected channels again If the problems go away you can now reset the tare constants in Flash memory by executing CALibration STORe TARE 140 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Detecting Open Transducers Notes Most of the HP E1313 E1413 s SCPs provide a method to detect open transducers When Open Transducer Detect OTD is enabled the SCP injects a small current into the HIGH and LOW input of each channel The polarity of
137. on board voltage reference to the Calibration Bus A measurement of the source voltage can be made with an external multimeter connected to the H Cal and L Cal terminals on the terminal module or the V H and V L terminals on the Cal Bus connector The range parameter controls the voltage level available when the zero fs parameter is set to FSCale full scale Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 volts See Comments zero fs discrete string ZERO FSCale none Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 177 CALibration Comments The range parameter must be within 5 of one of the 5 following values 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC 16 VDC range may be specified in millivolts mv CALibration CONFigure RESistance or CALibration CONFigure VOL Tage commands must be sent before CALibration VALue RESistance or CALibration VALue VOLTage commands The only CALibration command accepted after CALibration C ONFigure VOLTage is CALibration VALue VOL Tage The CALibration STORe command may be used to store the calibration constants in non volatile memory Perform ZERO before FSCale or Error 3050 will be generated The FSCale output voltage of the calibration source will be greater than 90 of the nominal value for each range except the 16 V range where the output is 10 V This command will cause Err
138. on this device VME Slave Rec A one 1 indicates that the device has the capability to receive data via its VMEbus slave registers and implements both the Receive Data and Receive Status Registers A zero indicates that this capability is absent on this device VME Mast Send A one 1 indicates that the device is a VMEbus master having the capability to send data to another Virtual Instrument device s Receive Data Register A zero indicates that this capability is absent on this device 350 Register Based Programming Appendix D Subclass Register FIFO Registers VME Mast Receive A one 1 indicates that the device is a VMEbus master having the capability to receive data from another Virtual Instrument device s Send Data Register A zero indicates that this capability is absent on this device LBUS Send A one 1 indicates that this device is capable of sending Local Bus data A zero 0 indicates that it is unable to send data over the Local Bus LBUS Rec A one 1 indicates that this device is capable of receiving Local Bus data A zero 0 indicates that it 1s unable to receive data over the Local Bus Base 1E16 Read only returns 7 16 The Subclass Register identifies the HP E1413 as an HP virtual instrument device The FIFO registers consist of the FIFO MSW FIFO LSW the FIFO Status and FIFO Reading Count Registers FIFO MSW and LSW Registers Base 2016 and 2216 Note Read only IEEE 32 bit rea
139. planning for 36 measurements type K 99 reference compensation 142 143 243 244 reference temperature 77 Timer asynchronous mode 270 271 internal based scans 116 119 interval while scanning 273 paced scans 112 query trigger 272 setting the sample 85 226 synchronous mode 270 271 trigger 270 272 trigger register 353 Transfer commands reading FIFO 102 Transfer Commands reading FIFO 230 Transition Filters 123 256 258 261 263 TRG 280 TRIGCOUNT 373 Trigger arm configurations 267 asynchronous timer mode 270 common command TRG 280 count 268 counter 88 268 externally 114 idle state 268 input external 294 mode register 354 355 modes 111 query timer 272 scan sequence diagram 267 sources 269 270 synchronous timer mode 270 timer 112 116 119 timer accuracy 294 timer interval 273 274 timer register 353 TRIGger Subsystem 266 274 TRIG COUNt 88 132 268 TRIG COUNt 268 TRIG IMMediate 269 TRIG SOURCce 86 87 121 269 270 TRIG SOURce 270 TRIG TIMer MODE 270 272 TRIG TIMer MODE 272 TRIG TIMer PERiod 121 273 TRIG TIMer PERiod 274 Trigger System ABORt command 159 ARM commands 266 arming 161 commands ARM 373 commands register based 373 commands SCPTRIGEN 373 commands TRIGCOUNT 373 initiating 89 registers 353 355 registers software trigger ARM 353 registers trigger mode 354 355 registers trigger timer
140. programming step Linking Channels to EU Conversion you must also take into account the SCP channel gains set in this programming step In general most measurements can be made at full speed using autorange Autorange will choose the optimum A D range for the amplified signal level 70 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Setting Filter Cutoff commands for programmable filters are INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuenoy cutoff freq ch 115 to select cutoff frequency and INPut FlLTer LPASs STATe ON OFF Q ch list to enable or disable input filtering The cutoff frequency selections provided by the SCP can be assigned to any channel individually or in groups Send a separate command for each frequency selection For example To set 10 Hz cutoff for channels 0 4 6 and 10 through 19 send INP FILT LPAS FREQ 10 100 104 106 110 119 To set 10 Hz cutoff for channels 0 through 15 and 100 Hz cutoff for channels 16 through 23 send INP FILT LPAS FREQ 10 100 115 INP FILT LPAS FREQ 100 116 123 or to combine into a single command message INP FILT LPAS FREQ 10 100 115 FREQ 100 116 123 By default after RST or at power on the filters are enabled To disable or re enable individual or all channels use the INPut FILTer LPASs STATe ON command For example to program all but a few filters on send INP FILT LPAS STAT ON 100 163 All channel s filters on same as at RST INP FILT LPAS
141. reference panel using custom characterized RTDs or thermistors Contact your Hewlett Packard System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for your application Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 See Comments VDC below lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none e See Linking Channels to EU Conversion in Chapter 3 for more information e The lt range gt parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates Error 222 Data out of range Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on will be generated at Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 237 SENSe INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange range may be specified in millivollts mv e If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them fir
142. see the table on page 358 READTEMP 200016 Reads the value of the reference junction temperature either measured or set with the REFTEMP command The value is returned in the FIFO buffer as a 32 bit IEEE floating point number degrees C Temperature range is 128 C REFTEMP lt highword gt lt lowword gt 201016 Sets the reference temperature value used for thermocouple compensation The concatenation of lt highword gt and lt lowword gt is an IEEE floating point number in Motorola format interpreted as degrees Celsius The principal use of this command is in situations where the reference junction is servo controlled to a fixed value and is never measured RESCAL lt highword gt lt lowword gt 104016 Tells the CPU the value of the on card resistance reference as measured by an external DMM The concatenation of lt highword gt and lt lowword gt is an IEEE floating point number in Motorola format representing resistance in ohms Nominal value of the on card resistor is 7500 0 Ohms RESIST 402016 The Calibration Bus Relay and the Ohm Relay switched to allow 4 wire ohms measurement of the on card reference resistor by an external DMM using Calibration Bus connectors Appendix D Register Based Programming 365 SOURCE range lt lowhigh gt 401016 Configures the Calibration Bus Relay and associated multiplexers to allow the on board calibration source to be measured by an external voltmeter The output voltage
143. shows how to connect and measure the thermistors Channels 24 27 or 56 59 Terminal Block Channels 16 19 or 48 51 Terminal Block Channels 8 11 or 40 43 Terminal Block 18 50 19 51 SS SIS S S 9 9 9 9 DAP Ae 4 36 5 37 6 38 eeeeep BAADA 12 44 13 45 14 46 15 47 20 52 21653 22 54 23 55 29 61 30462 31 63 Channels Thermistor 4 7 or 36 39 Terminal Terminal Block Block Thermistor Excitation Sources Reference Temperature Measurements Channels Channels Thermistor Channels 12 15 or 44 47 20 23 or 52 55 Terminal 28 31 or 60 63 Terminal Block Terminal Block Block Terminal Block Figure 3 5 Terminal Panel Connections The HP E1313 E1413 provides a 122A current source as the excitation for the thermistors This is available on the Terminal Panel s terminals labeled HI I and LO I The excitation current is ONLY available to the Terminal panel connected to channels 00 31 of the HP E1413 This current is NOT on the Terminal Panel connected to channels 32 63 of the HP E1413 The following section shows how to connect the thermistors to the HP E1413 current source For the Terminal Panel s on board thermistors excitation connect HI I to HI TI and LO I to LO TI resp
144. source Several software trigger methods The VXIbus TTLTRG lines The external trigger input Anon board programmable trigger timer Continuously triggered TRIGger SOURce IMMediate The module provides three main modes of scanning The Default Mode is set when INITiate CONTinuous is set to OFF and the TRIGger COUNt is set to 1 Power on and the RST command also set this mode The sequence of events for this mode is shown in Figure 4 4 A Note that starting at the trigger idle state you must execute an INITiate command to begin each scan The sequence also shows that the current scan list as set by ROUTe SCAN scan list becomes effective after the INITiate command The Counted Mode is set when INITiate CONTinuous is set to OFF and the TRIGger COUNt is set greater than 1 In this mode a single INITiate command will allow as many scans as TRIGger COUNt specifies Note that TRIGger COUNt can be from 2 to 32768 or INFinity The sequence of events for this mode is shown in Figure 4 4 B The sequence shows that the current scan list is only set at the start of the counted scan This means that the current scan list can not be changed while the module is scanning However by specifying LISTL as the current scan list before INITiate CONTinuous ON the sequence of scan lists specified in LISTL will be executed Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 109 Default Scanning Mode Initiate Continuous
145. source voltage can be made with an external multimeter connected to the H Cal and L Cal terminals on the terminal module or the V H and V L terminals on the Cal Bus connector Use the CALibration CONFigure VOL Tage command prior to CALibration VALue VOL Tage or Error 3004 illegal command will occur Use the CALibration CONFigure VOL Tage command to configure the on board voltage source for measurement at the Cal Bus connector Related Commands CALibration CONFigure VOLTage CALibrationSSTORe ADC Command Sequence CAL CONF VOLT 0625 ZERO Connect zero voltage reference to Calibration Bus Must wait for CAL CONF VOLT to complete Now measure voltage with external DMM CAL VAL VOLT measured value Send measured value to module CAL STOR ADC Store calibration constants in non volatile memory use only at end of complete cal sequence Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 185 CALibration CALibration ZERO CALibration ZERO corrects Analog to Digital converter offset for any drift since the last CAL or CALibration ZERO command was executed Comments The CALibration ZERO command only corrects for A D offset drift zero Use the CAL common command to perform on line calibration of channels as well as A D offset CAL performs gain and offset correction of the A D and each channel out to the field wiring module connector e Returned Value Value Meaning Further Act
146. terminal The HP E1313 E1413 guard terminal connection shown earlier in this manual does not consider the high frequency Ecm problem and is there to limit the shield current and to allow the DUT to float up to some DC common mode voltage subject to the maximum 16 volt input specification limit This conflicts with the often recommended good practice of grounding the shield at the signal source and only at that point to eliminate line frequency ground loops which can be high enough to burn up a shield We recommend that you follow this practice and if you see high frequency common mode noise or suspect it tie the shield to the HP E1313 E1413 ground through a 0 1 uF capacitor At high frequencies this drives the shield voltage to volts at the HP E1313 E1413 input Due to inductive coupling to the signal leads the Ecm voltage on the signal leads is also driven to zero Reducing Common One E1413 customer determined that greater than 100 dB CMR to 10 MHz Mode Rejection was required to get good thermocouple TC measurements in his test Usin g Tri Filar environment To accomplish this requires the use of tri filar transformers which are an option to the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel This also Transformers provides superior isothermal reference block performance for thermocouple measurements This works by virtue of the inductance in the shield connected winding presenting a significant impedance to high frequency common mode noi
147. that channel has a gain of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC or an input out of range condition will exist e The channel calibration command CAL calibrates the excitation voltage source on each Bridge Completion SCP Related Commands CAL SENSe STRain commands e RST Condition SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage AUTO 100 163 Usage SENS FUNC STRain 1 100 105 107 242 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature Parameters SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt links channels to an EU conversion for temperature based on the sensor specified in lt sensor_type gt and lt sub_type gt Not for sensing thermocouple reference temperature for that use the SENSe REFerence command Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt sensor_type gt discrete string RTD THERmistor TCouple none lt sub_type gt numeric float32 for RTD use 85 92 none numeric float32 for THER use 2250 5000 10000 Ohms discrete string for TC use CUSTom EEXT J K none NIRISIT range numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments Resistance temperature measurements RTDs and THERmistors require the use of Current Source Signal Conditioning Plug Ons The following table shows the C
148. the Buyer HP does not warrant the Buyer s circuitry or malfunctions of HP products that result from the Buyer s circuitry In addition HP does not warrant any damage that oc curs as a result of the Buyer s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer supplied products NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CON TRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HEWLETT PACKARD HP MAKES NO WAR RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HP shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This docu ment contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photo copied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company HP assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that
149. through 63 OUTP CURR AMPL 30e 6 148 163 Set excite current to on current SCP channels 48 through 63 SENS FUNC TEMP THER 10000 9132 147 Link channels 32 through 47 to temperature EU conversion for 10 000Q thermistor To set channels 48 through 63 to measure temperature using 100 Ohm RTDs with a TC of 00385 Ohm Ohm C in this case paired to current source SCP channels 32 through 47 OUTP CURR AMPL 488 6 132 147 Set excite current to 488 on current SCP channels 32 through 47 SENS FUNC TEMP RTD 85 148 163 Link channels 48 through 63 to temperature EU conversion for 100 RTDs with 00385 TC Thermocouple Thermocouple measurements are voltage measurements that the EU Measurements conversion changes into temperature readings based on the sub type parameter and latest reference temperature value As mentioned in Setting SCP Gains on page 70 higher SCP channel gain provides quieter measurements However it is possible to specify a channel gain high enough to cause an A D over range reading for the highest temperature ranges for some thermocouples For Thermocouples the sub type parameter can specify CUSTom E EEXT J K N R S T CUSTomis predefined as Type K no reference junction compensation EEXT is the type E for extended temperatures of 800 F or above To set channels 31 through 63 to measure temperature using type E thermocouples first measure or supply reference temperature
150. to initiate the HP E1413 are INITiate IMMediate and INITiate CONTinuous ON The INITiate commands move the HP E1313 E1413 from the trigger idle state to the wait for trigger state When initiated the instrument is ready to receive one INITiate IMMediate or more INITiate CONTinuous ON trigger events To initiate the instrument for the number of triggers specified with the TRIGger COUNt command INIT Or INIT IMM To have the instrument continuously in the wait for trigger state INITiate CONTinuous ON If INITiate CONTinuous is ON and TRIGger SOURce is IMMediate the module scans continuously until you execute INITiate CONTinuous OFF Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 89 When an INITiate command is executed the driver checks several interrelated settings programmed in the previous steps If there are conflicts in these settings an error message is placed in the error queue read with the SYSTem ERRor command Some examples If TRIGger SOURce is not or IMMediate with INITiate CONTinuous ON then ARM SOURce must be IMMediate Have programmable SCP gain or Current Source SCP settings changed since the CAL command was executed Step 10 Retrieving Data Accessing the CVT Note Each reading made during a scan is by default stored in two places The 64 channel Current Value Table CVT As the name implies the CVT contains the most current value read for each channel The 65 024 reading
151. to take the readings is much less than the time to transfer the readings into the computer HP WEE De Ct Device FO Dem asic direct 1 0 bo imitiskw of manr eed thes ramriar che dara back cba rumgarar This dace pards ba Lascia To Fae raat Fog ap enn Oen SCTE 400 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E Appendix F Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods Recommended Wiring and Noise Reduction Techniques Unshielded signal wiring is very common in Data Acquisition applications While this worked well for low speed integrating A D measurements and or for measuring high level signals it does not work for high speed sampling A Ds particularly when measuring low level signals like thermocouples or strain gage bridge outputs Unshielded wiring will pick up environmental noise causing measurement errors Shielded twisted pair signal wiring although it is expensive is required for these measurements unless an even more expensive amplifier at the signal source or individual A D at the source is used Generally the shield should be connected to ground at the DUT and left open at the HP E1313 E1413 Floating DUTS or transducers are an exception Connect the shield to HP E1313 E1413 GND or GRD terminals for this case whichever gives the best performance This will usually be
152. to the appropriate thermistor terminals e g channel 100 HI and LO terminals to thermistor 1 15 and LO T1S terminals respectively These connections are shown in Figure 3 10 5 58 29 99298 oooooo0 E One HP E1586 Terminal Panel Measuring Three Thermistors on Reference Channels 100 101 102 Figure 3 10 Left Center and Right Thermistor Measurements on a Single Panel If two Terminal Panels are used each panel must be connected as above so that both panels provide reference temperature measurements These connections are shown in Figure 3 11 Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 97 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 5 S 99 9 9 9 9 9 S 9 9 9 9 S S S 7 39 55 28 60 29 61 30 62 31163 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 5 Oo
153. trigger EXTernal trigger When using EXTernal trigger the trigger can occur at any time 198 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 FORMat FORMat Subsystem Syntax FORMat DATA Parameters Comments The FORMat subsystem provides commands to set and query the response data format of readings returned using the SENSe DATA FIFO commands FORMat DATA lt format gt lt size gt DATA FORMat DATA lt format gt lt size gt sets the format for data returned using the SENSe DATA FIFO SENSe DATA CVTable and FETCh commands Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt format gt discrete string REAL ASCii PACKed none lt size gt numeric for ASCii 7 none for REAL 32 64 for PACKed 64 The REAL format is IEEE 754 Floating Point representation REAL 32 provides the highest data transfer performance since no format conversion step is placed between reading and returning the data The default size for the REAL format is 32 bits PACKed 64 returns the same values as REAL 64 except for Not a Number NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF The NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF values returned by PACKed 64 are in a form compatible with HP Workstation BASIC and HP BASIC UX see table on following page REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Arbitrary Block Data format The Block Data may be either Definite Length or In
154. unless attenuated with an HP E1513 i i a 2 4 to 20 mA Sense 5 V full scale with 250 Ohm must use 16 Volt range 4 V full scale with 200 Ohm can use 4 Volt range for better resolution tmschems cdr Figure 2 14 Serial and Parallel Component Examples 48 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Wiring Attaching the HP E1313 Terminal Module Figure 2 15 shows how to wire and attach an HP E1313 terminal module Remove Clear Cover 2 Unscrew and Remove Strain Relief Repeat At this Slot Relief Depress Terminal Lever s Insert wire s into Terminal s Release Lever s Use Wire Size 22 26 Gage 6 Connect Terminal to A D Module SS Installed in Mainframe Terminal Module Figure 2 15 Wiring and Connecting the HP E1313 Terminal Module Chapter 2 Field Wiring 49 Wiring the HP E1413 Terminal Module Figure 2 16 shows how to open and wire the HP E1413 terminal module 1 Remove Clear Cover 2 Remove and Retain Wiring Exit Panel CLD A Release Screws Remove 1 of the 3 B Press Tab Forward CA wire exit panels and Release Tighten wraps to secure wires Push down on lever insert wire into terminal and release Figure 2 16 Wiring the HP E1413 Terminal Module Continued on Next Page 50 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Replace Wiring Exit Panel Keep wiring exit panel hole as small as possible required holes in pan
155. will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange range may be specified in millivollts mv If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal voltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC or an input out of range condition will exist The CAL command calibrates channels based on Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated See Linking Channels to EU Conversion in Chapter 3 for more information Related Commands CAL INPut GAIN commands RST Condition SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage AUTO 100 163 Usage SENSe FUNC VOLT 140 163 Channels 40 63 measure voltage in autorange Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 245 SENSe SENSe REFerence SENSe REFerence sensor type sub type range list links the channel in cA list to the reference junction temperature EU conversion based on sensor type and sub type When scanned the resultant value is stored in the Reference Temperature Register and by default the FIFO and CVT Th
156. will set the corresponding bit in the Event Register If neither the Status Operation Positive Transition Filter STAT OPER PTR or Status Operation Negative Transition Filter STAT OPER NTR Registers have a corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition Register will have no effect on the Event Register 256 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 STATus e Related Commands STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition Cleared By STATus PRESet and power on RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER NTR 16 When Measuring bit goes false set bit 4 in Status Operation Event Register STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation NTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Negative Transition Filter NTF Register Comments Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 e Related Commands STATus OPERation NTRansition RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER NTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the NTF register STATus OPERation PTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition fransition mask sets bits in the Positive Transition Filter PTF Register When a bit in the PTF Register is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition Register must change from a zero to a one in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event Register When a bit in the PTF Register is zero a positive transition of the
157. with AVERAGE on Duplicate channels in list not allowed with AVERAGE on TRIG COUNT must be gt CALC AVER COUNT if INIT CONT not on 328 Error Messages Appendix B 3065 Scan list used in LISTL list must have at least 6 channels 3066 Autorange not allowed with AVERAGE on 3067 Multiple attempts to erase Flash Memory failed 3068 Multiple attempts to program Flash Memory failed 3069 Programming voltage jumper not set properly See Disabling Flash Memory Access in Chapter 1 2201 3070 Identification of Flash ROM incorrect 3071 Checksum error on Flash Memory 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on This filter is the A D filter Use of SCP filtering filtering at channels allows autoranging at high speed 3073 Scan rate too fast with SENSE FILTER on Minimum interval is 145 usec while A D filter is on Use of SCP filtering filtering at channels allows sampling at maximum speed SAMP TIM 10us Appendix B Error Messages 329 Notes 330 Error Messages Appendix B Appendix C Glossary Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 The following terms are either unique to Hewlett Packard s V XIbus modules or are unique to the HP E1413 Automatic Scan List Sequencing Control Processor Continuous Mode DSP EU EU Conversion Flash or Flash Memory List of Lists Scan L
158. 0 00t 00 007 000 00 00c 2 deg TARA A Ace astu ann Type J filter off NDA JAO T LdO EOSTA dH PE 440 JM 8X 140 0519 AAO JN CI 140 ZOSTA dH AHO 11 140 10519 dH f addy 000 000 070 090 080 0071 Oc I 0971 081 00 0cc 09 lt 2 Appendix 302 Specifications 9 Se Type J filter off HP E1508 09 19M4 81 80618 dH 00 008 007009 00007 00002 Specifications 303 Appendix 01 X o Seg Type K filter off SHO 29119 9 COSTA dH AHO Jot 11 140 10519 dH 001 050 000 LAM SAN CO re E me gt PIU d Paone SA 05 00 9d T 00 Appendix 304 Specifications 01 XD eq Type R filter off THO IWA 9X T LdO OS1A dH 291119 11 LdO 10519 dH Specifications 305 Appendix A Type R filter off HP E1508 09 001 080 090 0 0 000 000 x o 824 2 4 I 2 EAT oe DEPO 5
159. 0 or later for UNIX controllers or HP VEE version 3 2 for PCs This version of HP VEE has a global parameter that must be configured Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 385 In the HP VEE menu Files Edit Preferences check Convert infinity to 9 9E37 Ty Data Math AdvMath Display Help Untitle d Edit Flow Device 1 0 New Open 0 Merge Merge Library Savc 5 Save Edit Default Preferences _ Edit Properties Print Screen Print All Print Sctup a Properties General Title m Trig Mode Transaction Operations Degrees Ix Convert Infinity to 9 9 37 on Binary Reads lt Radians lt Gradians OK Cancel Help This sets up HP VEE so it can directly access data from the HP E1313 E1413 FIFO and CVT registers This is required because the HP E1313 E1413 has implemented IEEE 754 Floating Point Format which includes special codes for plus infinity minus infinity and not a number These special codes causes a floating point math error in HP VEE thus they must be converted to a number which HP VEE can handle such as 9 9E37 386 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E 2 If you have a configuration that provides direct VXI backplane access VXLINK MXI Embedded you need to configure the HP VEE I O to be able to directly access the HP E1313 E141
160. 0 should execute the appropriate query command Bit 5 ESB Read the Standard Event Group s Event Register using bit value 3210 the ESR command This will return bit values for events which have occurred in this group After reading this Status Register is cleared Note that bits 2 through 5 in this group indicate error conditions If any of these bits are set error messages will be found in the Error Queue Use the SYSTem ERRor command to read these Bit 7 OPR Read the Operation Status Group s Event Register using bit value 12810 STATus OPERation EVENt command This will return bit values for events which have occurred in this group After reading the Event Register is cleared Clea ring the the Enable Registers execute Enable Reg Isters STAT PRES For Operation Status and Questionable Data Groups ESE 0 For the Standard Event Group 0 For the Status Byte Group Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 127 The Status Byte Group s Enable Register Reading Status Groups Directly Reading Event Registers Clearing Event Registers Reading Condition Registers The Enable Register for the Status Byte Group has a special purpose Notice in Figure 4 6 how the Status Byte Summary bit wraps back around to the Status Byte The Summary bit sets the RQS request service bit in the Status Byte Using this Summary bit and those from the other status groups you can poll the Status Byte
161. 00 filter off 440 J 11 140 10519 dH 00 00T 00 08 00 09 00 0t 000 000 uri up CSCC Appendix A 316 Specifications Thermistor 22500 filter off HP E1508 09 1234 61 140 60519 dH HAO JL 81 140 80618 dH 00 00T 00 08 00709 000 WUL cscc Or C OTT 00 C 08 I 091 Or 1 0c I 001 08 0 09 0 0 020 000 Specifications 317 Appendix 00 08 00 09 00 0 00 02 00 2 8 00 2 lt p MEN MEM 0 1 E 001 5 08 0 09 0 0f 0 TK dO POX CT 140 05 18 dH ozo NEN 340 SX EL 140 COSI dH dO 19114 140 ZOSTA dH 000 THO 19119 T1 140 10519 urTou MS Appendix A 318 Specifications Thermistor 5KQ filter off HP E1508 09 THO 2994 61 140 60519 dH JAO 291 81 140 80618 dH 00 08 00709 000 0000 000 EDS wy MS 00 08 1 091 0 1 0c T 001 080 09 0 0 0c 0 00 0 Specifications 319 Appendix 00 0ZI 9 30q 00 001 00 08 00 09 000 00 02 000 Thermistor 10 filter off JAO 2911 T 140 20614 dH SHO 19119 11 LdO 1018 dH 9 MOT 09 ih 00 08 I 091
162. 01 02 03 04 05 06 5 en B gc 96565 ut 09 to 11 12 13 14 zo 220 58 HLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLGHLG ou 220 m LIE LE rr pr gr gr 90 mS EH NE 2 5 ESO ES SEE E On board Thermistor for Temperature Sensing Chapter 2 Reference Temperature Sensing with the HP E1313 The HP E1313 can have two terminal modules installed To obtain the specified accuracy through each terminal module the temperature of both must be sensed A sense channel is required on each terminal module which leaves 31 channels on each terminal module for thermocouple and other measurements Figure 2 5 shows how the HP E1313 internally connects its single current source to the two reference thermistors in series Note that a diode provides a current path when terminal module 2 is absent but that terminal module 1 must be in place and configured properly to provide a current path to terminal module 2 Figure 2 7 shows sensing the on board thermistor Refer to Figure 2 6 for remote thermistor connection HP E1313 Module Terminal Module 1 Chs 0 31 Field Wir
163. 1 B14 NC A14 A15 ZGND1 c15 NC ZGND1 15 A16 ZGND1 c16 20 01 4 s16 ZGND1 16 A7 ZGND1 c17 H_I 817 A18 ZGND1 NC 18 19 ZGND1 c19 NC s19 NC a19 A20 20 01 4 ZGND1 4 ZGND1 A20 21 GRD5 c21 GRD5 j GRD5 21 HI14 c22 15 B22 A22 HI46 c22 H147 B22 LO47 A22 L014 ces B23 A23 L046 c23 Hl45 B23 LO45 A23 HI11 c24 12 824 A24 c24 H144 B24 LO44 A24 a LO11 cas HI10 B25 A25 LO43 cas 42 B25 LO42 A25 3 08 26 09 B26 A26 H140 H141 B26 LO41 A26 LO08 c27 HI07 827 A27 LO40 c27 HI39 27 LO39 A27 s GRD0 1c s8 06 B28 A28 GRD4 c28 HI38 B28 LO38 26 e HI04 c29 HI05 B29 A29 HI36 c29 HI37 B29 LO37 LO04 c30 H103 B30 A30 LO36 c30 HI35 830 LO35 HI01 c31 HI02 831 A31 HI33 cst HI34 B31 LO34 31 Per LO01 c32 100 A32 LO33 c32 HI32 B32 1032 CAL 27 5 BUS Ji 12 2 e sjL tle ele HCAL LCAL GND HOHM LOHM GND 9 Figure 2 26 H
164. 10 System error 350 Too many errors 410 Query INTERRUPTED 420 Query unterminated 430 Query deadlocked 1500 External trigger source already allocated 2000 Invalid card number 2001 Invalid channel number 2002 Invalid logical address 2003 Invalid word address 2005 No card at logical address 2007 Bus error 2008 Scan list not initialized 2009 Too many channels in channel list 2016 Byte count is not a multiple of two 2101 Failed Device 2103 Config warning Device driver not found 2105 Config error 5 A24 memory overflow 2108 Config error 8 Inaccessible A24 memory 2110 Config error 10 Insufficient system memory 2111 Config error 11 Invalid instrument address 324 Error Messages Appendix B 2129 3000 3001 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3012 3015 3019 3020 3021 3026 Config warning Sysfail detected Illegal while initiated Operation must be performed before INIT or ON Illegal while continuous While ON and TRIG SOUR IMM Illegal command CAL CONF RES or CAL CONF VOLT not sent Incorrect sequence of calibration commands Send CAL CONF RES or CAL CONF VOLT command before CAL VAL RES or CAL VAL VOLT command Illegal command Send CAL VAL RES The only command accepted after a CAL CONF RES is a C
165. 113571357135713571357 Channel Number tc is the sample time between channels The large arrow is the arming event or signal The smaller arrows are sample triggers generated by the HP E1313 E1413 when stepping through the channel list Sample clocks on each card are not synchronized to each other Example Command Sequence Card 1 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt SAMP TIM LIST n gt lt te gt tc can be 10 5 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR IMM ARM SOUR source source can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTrgo TTLTrg7 ON Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 115 Internal Timer Based Scans Card 2 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt SAMP TIM 5 lt gt lt 1 gt tc can be 10 5 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR IMM ARM SOUR lt source gt lt source gt can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTrg0O TTLTrg7 ON Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping INIT CONT OFF To both cards stops at end of scan list In this case both cards are set up to be paced by their trigger timers Card 1 is also set up to source a trigger on one of the VXIbus TTLTRG lines and card 2 is set up to be triggered by that line This means that triggering card 1 will start both cards p Trigger
166. 13 121 Using the Status System The HP E1313 E1413 s Status system allows you to quickly poll a single register the Status byte to see if any internal condition needs attention Figure 4 5 shows that the three Status Groups Operation Status Questionable Data and the Standard Event Groups and the Output Queue all send summary information to the Status byte By this method the Status Byte can report many more events than its eight bits would otherwise allow Figure 4 6 shows the Status system in detail Note The C SCPI program status cs on your C SCPI driver tape the C and Visual BASIC programs status xx on the driver example program disk show how to use the status system Questionable Data Group Output Queue Status Byte read with STB Operation Status Group Standard Event Group Figure 4 5 Simplified Status System Diagram 122 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Enabling Events to be Reported in the Status Byte Configuring the Transition Filters There are two sets of registers that individual status conditions must pass through before that condition can be recorded in a group s Event Register These are the Transition Filter Registers and the Enable Registers They provide selectivity in recording and reporting module status conditions Figure 4 6 shows that the Condition Register outputs are routed to the input of the Negative Transition and Positive Transition
167. 1505 Current Source SCP are 30e 6 or MIN and 488e 6 or MAX Select 488uA for measuring resistances of less than 8 000 Ohms Select for resistances of 8 000 Ohms and above Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 73 The optional range parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified or set to zero the module uses autorange The ch list parameter specifies which channel s to link to the resistance EU conversion These channels will sense the voltage across the unknown resistance Each can be a Current Source SCP channel a two wire resistance measurement or a sense channel separate from the Current Source SCP channel a four wire resistance measurement See Figure 3 2 for diagrams of these measurement connections Two Wire Measurement not recommended Current Source SCP Field Wiring G 150 Ohm 596 oO LO o 150 Ohm 5 Because of the 150 Ohm resistor in series with each of the current source outputs Two Wire resistance and temperature measurements will have a 300 Ohm offset The current source HI terminal is the negative voltage node The current source LO terminal is the positive voltage node Sense Channel Four Wire Measurement Current Source SCP HI Field Wiring R LO Any Sense SCP HI LO Figure 3 2 Resistance Measurement Sensing To set channels 0 through 15 to measure re
168. 1F16 Reserved not used Appendix D Register Based Programming 369 ASSIGN for Custom ASSIGN command is also used to access custom EU tables previously EU Conversions loaded into the specified channels linearization table area The compensation parameter is used only if the custom EU is a thermocouple conversion which needs reference compensation For custom EU conversion the bit positions of the conversion parameter take on the following meanings 15 7 6 5 4 3 0 always 0 Custom Reference Piecewise Shift Factor Bit 6 Custom determines whether the EU conversion is standard as previously discussed or custom Set bit 6 to 1 for custom 4016 Bit 5 Reference when set specifies that this channel is a custom temperature conversion that is to be used as the thermocouple reference junction temperature for all subsequent thermocouple measurements Bit 4 Piece Wise when 1 indicates that the linearization table is a piece wise conversion table When 0 indicates the table is linear Bit 3 0 Shift Factor specifies the Shift Factor based on the range the table was built on This is the negative to positive voltage range that the custom conversion table covers The Shift Factor versus voltage range is as follows Shift Factor t Voltage Range 016 015625 116 03125 246 0625 316 125 446 25 516 5 616 1 716 2 816 4 916 8 A16 16 B16 32
169. 2 58 16 41 158 105 34 9 05 SO G7 17 e 42 G7 GO 33 6 8 GO BE 59 18 43 159 104 32 7 H04 uo 19 e 44 160 L03 31 fe 6 pa 67 20 45 6G7 G0 30 fel 5 GO b He1 21 e 46 Let Lo2 29 6 4 H02 h J h 62 22 47 162 101 28 e 3 G7 23 48 07 GO 27 e 2 00 H63 24 lel 49 163 100 226 e 1 GND 25 5o Figure 2 23 HP E1313 Option Pin out Chapter 2 Field Wiring 59 Channel 00 15 Channel 16 31
170. 2 Current scan list becomes 2 when module initiated to wait for trigger 84 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Step 5 Setting the Sample Timer The SAMPle TIMer scan list interval command individually programs channel to channel sample pacing The power on default allows maximum sample rate The scan list parameter can specify LIST2 LISTS or LIST4 or LISTL When scan list is LISTL the sample interval will apply to all scan lists defined for LISTL while ROUTe SCAN selects LISTL The interval parameter can specify 10 0e 6 MIN to 32 7680 3 MAX seconds with a resolution of 0 5e 6 seconds Note While the A D filter is on SENSe FILTer L PASs STATe ON the minimum sample time is 145usec Use SCP filtering filtering at channels to allow scanning at high speed To set the sample timer for scan list 1 to 005 seconds LIST1 5ms 5 ms for each channel in scan list 1 Chapter 3 Using the E1313 E1413 85 Step 6 Setting up the Trigger System The Trigger and Figure 3 4 shows the trigger and arm model for the HP E1413 Note that Arm Model when the trigger source selected is or IMM with INITiate CONTinuous ON the remaining sources become arm sources Using ARM SOURce allows you to specify an event that must occur in order to start scanning Only while INIT CONT is ON amp TRIG SOUR is IMM TRIGger SOURce source
171. 3 Usage Example Program must put table constants into array table block DIAG CUST LIN 1 table_block 116 123 Send table to HP E1413 for channels 16 23 SENS FUNC CUST 1 124 131 Link custom EU with channels 24 31 and set the IV A D range INITiate then TRIGger module Step 3 Performing Channel Calibration Important Operation and Restrictions How to Use CAL What CAL Does CAL also performed using CAL SETup then CAL SETup is a very important step CAL generates calibration correction constants for all analog input and output channels CAL must be performed in order for the HP E1313 E1413 to deliver its specified accuracy CAL generates calibration correction constants for each analog input channel for offset and gain at all 5 A D range settings For programmable input SCPs these calibration constants are only valid for the current configuration gain and filter cut off frequency This means that CAL calibration is no longer valid if you change channel gain or filter settings INPut FILTer or INPut GAIN but is still valid for changes of channel function or range using SENSe FUNCtion commands The calibration becomes invalid if you move these SCPs to different SCP locations For analog measurement excitation SCPs such as the HP E1505 CAL also generates calibration correction constants These calibration constants are valid only for the specific SCPs in the positions they are currently in
172. 3 Command Reference 219 ROUTe ROUTe The ROUTe subsystem controls which of four Scan Lists will be executed at the next trigger event and defines the channel content of each Scan List Subsystem Syntax ROUTe SCAN scan list SEQuence DEFine scan gt lt list DEFine scan list mode POINtS scan list ROUTe SCAN ROUTe SCAN scan list establishes which of the four Scan Lists will be used for measurement scans Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units scan list discrete string LIST1 LIST2 LISTA LISTL none Comments When ROUTe SCAN is LISTL the module will automatically sequence through the scan lists specified by ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LISTL lt ch_list gt LISTL Notes 1 When ROUTe SCAN selects LISTL List of Lists each scan list it specifies must contain at least 6 channels 2 LISTL can only be selected while module is in Trigger Idle State not INITiated 3 When CALCulate AVERage STATe is ON LISTL is not allowed e Normally the specified scan list number becomes effective when the Trigger System moves from the Initiated State to the Wait for Trigger State If ROUTe SCAN LIST1 LIST4 is executed after this point it will become effective for the next scan If INITiate CONTinuous is ON and TRIGger SOURce is IMMediate ROUTe SCAN will generate an error Refer to Figure 5 3 for scanning eve
173. 3 E1413 is configured to match the total state which includes all of the other sub panels that are not visible in this picture HP VEE 14 E3IAN WEE Trig coun DE Trig aurea Trig Tima BCR us Peo tore EC TELT 3nuxca MST NN WEL ITLTES Line Stater Whe TEXT TET CUM ELI EE CE WEITE TEXT ere T EREFI EOL AM cs TEXT x WRITE TE WRITE TE XT AT CONT ECL E Fie amp Open 2 708 psa ed 5 AATE BINARY gt 22 Ese ORR RRR E 1Ha E m tia 14 44 PEG PRO 3 x BEAD MEM 5CVT y ICR ARRAY B 7 HEE Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 391 As the program runs the FIFO is written to a disk file and all of the CVT values are printed each time the FIFO is emptied The amount of data in the FIFO and the total readings taken are also displayed as a progress monitor When a programmed break condition occurs the HP E1313 E1413 is commanded to stop taking readings and is then queried for any errors that may have occurred If errors occur such as FIFO OVERFLOW then you need to go back to the instrument panel and adjust parameters such as the Trigger Timer If FIFO OVERFLOW occurs the timer that calculates a sustained data rate should be used to select a new Trigger Timer value
174. 3 FIFO register and the CVT table Configuring to access the FIFO is done by selecting Instrument Highlight the HP E1313 E1413 in your system Edit instrument A16 Space Config Then set the following fields Byte Access D16 NONE Word Access D16 D16 Access always selected Long Word Access 032 032 Access Name Offset Format Mode FIFO 32 Real32 Read E HP VEE File Flow Device JO Dala Math AdvMalh Display Help D InHrumertSEettrComgre 7 instrumen To 1412 p 1412 gg Fen Mami L socana Di NOMI E1313 4 OT Interface 2 Word Arcees 418 mis 5 Cumponant Driver ELI A 4 Dinetun LongWord diah Dere Type hpatat3 I Tree eet eee i __ Hama Don Fomu Dei nao 32 rai READ Edtinsrumes iunea Detear Cong Cog _ z Ger Hele A The FIFO register which is the top of the 64K reading first in first out hardware is located in A16 address space at offset 32 Each time this register is read one reading is removed from the hardware FIFO Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 387 Direct access to the HP E1313 E1413 CVT table is configur
175. 331 DSPEEK 374 DSPOKE 374 E EMC 276 EMC 276 Enable Macro Command 276 Enable Macro Query 276 Enable Register clearing the 127 command ESE 277 query ESE 277 query bits set 255 260 setting bits 255 260 status byte group 128 Enabling channels limit testing 171 channels lower limit 170 channels upper limit 173 current output 215 events to the status byte 123 low pass filter 235 measurement averaging 131 132 165 open transducer detect OTD 141 194 346 programmable filter SCP channel 206 VME memory card 212 ERRFLAGS 358 Error flags 358 messages 323 330 messages self test 327 queue 264 ESE 277 ESE 277 ESR 277 EU 331 EU Conversion 331 downloading custom linear tables 190 downloading custom piecewise tables 191 412 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index linear tables 136 linking channels to 72 80 136 241 247 linking channels with tables 236 241 loading custom EU tables 79 136 piecewise tables 136 reference temperature 137 192 237 thermocouple 136 238 239 using ASSIGN 369 371 Event Register clearing the 128 276 operation status group 128 query bits 256 261 questionable data group 128 standard event group 128 Example Programs about 29 command sequence 92 command sequences 29 fast FIFO reading transfer 107 measuring type K thermocouples 99 on disc 29 retrieve FIFO data 105 typical C SCPI 30 32 using programming sequence 91
176. 353 resetting 159 setting up 86 88 TST 281 283 default settings 66 TTLTrg query source 218 424 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index query state 218 source 217 state 218 TRIGger SOURce 269 U Understanding scanning modes 109 110 the HP E1313 E1413 101 148 UNHOOK 367 Unshielded Wiring 401 Unstrained Voltage 251 UP LIMIT 359 Updating status system 129 VXI interrupts 129 130 Upper Limit querying 173 setting 172 testing 173 174 Using HP E1313 E1413 65 100 HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel 93 99 HP VEE 385 400 HP VEE 100K sample speed 393 HP VEE with command module 394 HP VEE with VXI backplane 391 status system 122 123 125 128 252 263 tri filar transformers 404 trigger mode register 355 V Variable SCPI Command Syntax 154 Verifying a Successful Configuration 32 Virtual Instrument Registers 349 351 description register 350 subclass register 351 VME Memory A24 address 210 bytes allocated 211 enabling 212 query address 210 query bytes allocated 211 query readings stored 197 query state 212 Voiding Warranty 26 Voltage DC 245 excitation 219 248 maximum common mode 294 maximum input 204 unstrained 251 Voltage Measurements linking 73 source voltage 177 185 Voltage Reference connecting to calibration bus 177 sending DC for calibration 185 VXI Backplane using with HP VEE 391 VXI Control Register 340 VXI Registers device type register
177. 413 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 This chapter introduces more advanced SCPI programming procedures for the HP A D Scanning Converter and includes programming examples Chapter contents include e Advanced FIFO Data Page 101 Controlling Data Conversion and Destination Page 108 Understanding Scanning Modes Page 109 e Triggering and Scanning Modes Page 111 e Synchronizing Multiple Page 115 Using Automatic Scan List Sequencing Last ofsLists doula e te exacted abs Page 120 Using the Status Page 122 Updating the Status System and VXIbus Interrupts Page 129 e HP E1313 E1413 Background Operation Page 130 Averaging 5 Page 131 Limit Vestn gs ase brewed cate Hee eds Page 133 Custom EU Conversion Page 136 Compensating for System Page 138 Detecting Open Transducers Page 141 e Thermocouple Reference Compensation Page 142 More On Autoranging Page 144 e Reducing Settling Page 144
178. 5 e 30 G4 G6 5 lel 30 G6 H35 6 e 31 135 51 6 lel 31 151 E H36 7 e 32 L36 H52 7 32 152 G4 8 e e 33 64 6 8 lel 33 G6 ot H37 9 e 34 137 H53 9 e 34 153 E H38 10 35 138 H54 10 lel 35 L54 G4 11 e 36 G4 G6 11 el 36 Ge H39 12 e 37 L39 55 12 el 37 155 H40 13 e 38 140 QR ere H56 13 1 38 156 65 14 e 39 G5 G7 14 el 39 G7 41 15 e 40 L41 57 15 40 157 H42 16 e e 414 L42 l H58 16 41 L58 G5 17 42 05 G7 17 lel 42 67 H43 18 e 43 L43 i H59 18 9 43 159 H44 19 e 44 L44 19 e 44 160 G5 20 45 G5 7 20 el 45 G7 H45 21 e 46 145 H61 21 e e 46 L61 H46 22 47 L46 H62 22 47 162 G5 23 e 48 G5 67 23 9 el 48 7 47 24 49 147 He3 24 49 163 GND 25 e 50 GND GND 25 9 50 GND n 1 1 Q 1 14 Figure 2 24 HP E1413 Option Pin out Field Wiring Chapter 2
179. 5 6 12345678 9 23456 Channel Number LIST1 LIST2 LIST1 te is the sample time between channels tp is the pacing time between channel lists The large arrow is the pacing Trigger Timer The smaller arrows are sample triggers generated by the HP E1313 E1413 when stepping through the channel list The first large arrow is the arming event Example Command Sequence ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 101 106 First 6 channels ROUT SEQ DEF LIST2 101 109 Add 7 8 and 9 ROUT SEQ DEF LISTL 1 2 List of Lists is List 1 and List 2 ROUT SCAN LISTL Use LISTL SAMP TIM LISTL lt te gt Set sample time for lists in LISTL TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM PER lt tp gt lt tp gt can be Ims 6 5536 s TRIG COUN lt count gt count can be 1 32768 or INF ARM SOUR lt source gt lt source gt can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTrgo TTLTrg7 INIT IMM Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping Before Trigger Count is Reached TRIG SOUR HOLD Stops at end of scan still initiated TRIG IMM One more scan now idle or Stops immediately must use ABORt ABOR if TRIG COUNt is INF Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 113 Exte rnally Paced This mode is much like the Timer Paced Scans except the trigger source is Scans external to the HP E1313 E1413 The trigger could come from a software command such as TRIGger or a hardware trigger from either the External Trigger input or one o
180. 6 Related Commands CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe Usage CALC LIM UPP STAT 104 Returns the state of upper limit testing for channel 4 174 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALibration CALibration The CALibration subsystem provides for two major categories of calibration 1 A D Calibration In these procedures an external multimeter is used to determine the actual voltage or resistance values of the HP E1313 E1413 s internal calibration sources The known values are then sent to the HP E1313 E1413 where they are stored and used to perform internal A D calibration These procedures each require a sequence of several commands from the CALibration subsystem CALibration CONFigure CALibration VALUE and CALibration STORe ADC For an actual calibration example see the HP E1313A E1413C Service Manual Always execute CAL or a CALibration TARE operation after A D Calibration 2 Working Calibration of which there are three levels see Figure 5 2 A D Zero This function quickly compensates for any short term A D converter offset drift This would be called the autozero function in a conventional voltmeter In the HP E1313 E1413 where channel scanning speed is of primary importance this function is performed only when the CALibration ZERO command is executed Channel Calibration This function corrects for offset and gain errors for each module channel The internal current sour
181. 79 408 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index CAL SETup 81 82 179 CAL STORe 26 140 180 CAL TARE 138 140 181 182 CAL TARE changing gains or filters 140 182 CAL TARE maximum tare offsets 140 182 CAL TARE operation 138 CAL TARE resetting 139 CAL TARE thermocouple wire 138 181 CAL TARE RESet 140 184 CAL TARE 183 CAL V ALue RESistance 184 CAL VALue VOLTage 185 CAL ZERO 186 Card control registers 342 345 346 grounding causing noise 402 synchronizing multiple 115 VME memory 210 212 scanning reference temperature 42 settling time adding 146 settling time checking 145 signal connection 43 44 upper limit 172 174 Checking channel settling time 145 Clear Status Command 276 Clearing auto arm bits 343 current value table 202 203 enable registers 127 event registers 128 276 FIFO 202 203 235 free run bits 343 CDS 276 Command module base address 337 CARDCAL 364 CARDCAL 365 Certification 9 Changing gains or filters 140 182 timer interval while scanning 162 273 Channel calibration 179 275 276 See also Channels data modifier 108 dummy 108 gain amplifier SCPs 207 groups scanning rate 120 121 list parameters 155 lowest autorange 192 measurements averaging 132 measurements pacing 226 227 numbers and SCP positions 34 offsets 182 offsets calibration 275 offsets unexpected 140 SCP registers 361 362 strain bridge SCPs 208 Channels calibr
182. 8 ERRFLA GS ELLE ERAS Page 358 SGbIDTER ueterem EP eue et Page 359 e BUG TER lic cep unen nce ees Page 359 cho imm me dccem eae Page 359 LOW LIMIT bE ee SE Page 359 s NO LEIMIE sac aint bass Rete Page 359 eee ee otiera tenes eee EE Page 359 REVCODE iot Out ette Page 359 SOSCBREAD bw ua hoor ae eae Page 360 SCBWRITE ue eee ears Page 360 Appendix D Register Based Programming 333 Calibration Commands S Page 364 ADZERO s pb mers ER Page 364 soar oe Dee Page 364 CARDCAL n Page 365 b eR Page 365 So We ee ees oes ERI RESI Page 365 Page 365 RESIST nse ods pene IECIT Page 365 SOURCE cee Dene ete Page 366 5 Page 366 SUSPANLO eer ade qp de eet Page 366 SOSTORECAL ep ELLE RE Page 366 STORETAR eet Page 366 TAREAPPEND 2 snb perpe ens Page 366 Page 367 SCTARBCAL Page 367 TARENULD os La aes a Page 367 UNHOOK 522 5 5820 kb toes eia Page 367 Scan List Commands
183. A FIFO PART n readings returns the number of readings specified by n readings 2 147 483 647 maximum This command completes only after n readings have been transferred FIFO Status Commands SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt returns a count of the readings in the FIFO buffer Use with the SENSe DATA FIFO PART or SENSe DATA FIFO ALL commands SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF returns a 1 if the FIFO is at least half full 32 768 readings or returns a if not Use with the SENSe DATA FIFO HALF command All of these FIFO commands can execute while the instrument continues to take readings Once a FIFO reading transfer command is executed the instrument cannot accept other commands until the transfer is complete as specified for each command above The FIFO status commands allow you to poll the instrument for availability of readings before executing a transfer command 102 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 General Form of Figure the FIFO Data Retrieval Section _ 4 1 shows program flow in the FIFO data retrieval section for a single HP E1313 E1413 The conditions before entering the data retrieval section are Signal conditioning is set up Channel EU functions are set Scan list 1s defined Instrument initiated INITiate sets the Measuring bit checked in the first decision block in Figure 4 1 Begin Data Retrieval a T Comments Readings FIFO Execute Bulk Transfer
184. A rack mount terminal panel 62 Multimeter connecting 177 184 185 Multiple cards synchronizing 115 N NaN 90 200 230 Negative Transition Filter NTF Register See NTF Register NEWL 372 NEWnn 372 NO LIMIT 359 Noise common mode 403 due to inadequate grounding 402 normal mode 403 reduction 401 406 rejection 402 Normal Mode Noise 403 NTF Register bits query 257 262 bits setting 256 261 query bits set 257 262 setting bits 256 261 NULL 359 Numeric Parameters 154 Offset Register 341 Offsets A D calibration 275 A D drift correction 186 calibrating A D 179 channel 182 channel calibration 275 compensating for system wiring 138 maximum tare 140 182 maximum tare cal 294 removing 138 residual sensor 138 unexpected channel 140 OPC 130 278 OPC 278 279 Open Transducer Detect OTD 141 182 disabling 194 346 enabling 194 346 query 188 195 setting current 188 when CAL is executed 276 Operation enable register 255 event register 256 summary bit 255 Operation Complete Command OPC 278 Operation Complete Query OPC 278 279 Operation Group example 126 Operation Status Group 252 calibrating bit 182 condition register 128 diagram 126 event register 128 examples 123 status bit descriptions 125 254 VXI interrupts 255 Option A3E 56 57 Option A3F 58 62 93 99 pinout and signal lines 59 Optional SCPI Parameters 156 OTD See Open Transducer De
185. AL V AL RES command Illegal command Send CAL VAL VOLT The only command accepted after a CAL CONF VOLT is a CAL VAL VOLT command Invalid signal conditioning module The command sent to an SCP was illegal for its type Too few channels in scan list A Scan List must contain at least two channels Trigger too fast Scan list not completed before another trigger event occurs Channel modifier not permitted here TRIG TIM interval too small for SAMP TIM interval and scan list size TRIG TIM interval must allow for completion of entire scan list at currently set SAMP TIM interval See TRIG TIM in Chapter 5 the Command Reference Input overvoltage Calibration relays opened if JM2202 not cut to protect module inputs and Questionable Data Status bit 11 set Execute RST to close relays and or reset status bit FIFO overflow Lets you know that the FIFO buffer has filled and that one or more readings have been lost Usually caused by continuous measurements taken faster than FIFO was read Calibration failed Appendix B Error Messages 325 3027 3028 3030 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 Unable to map A24 VXI memory Incorrect range value Range value sent is not supported by instrument Command not yet implemented 0 1 DSP Unrecognized command code 0x2 DS
186. ALC LIM STAT 107 Returns state of limit testing for channel 7 CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA lt upper_limit gt lt ch_list gt sets the upper limit value for channels specified in lt ch_list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units upper limit numeric float32 MAX of any valid float32 none ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments A channel s upper limit value value must be numerically higher than its lower limit value or an error will be generated when the module is INITiated The upper limit is exceeded when the returned value is greater than the value specified by upper limit Related Commands CALCulate LIMit STATe CALOulate LIMit UPPer S TATe CALCulate LIMit _LOWer commands RST Condition Upper limit for all channels set to INFinity Usage CALC LIM UPP DATA 11 6 102 105 Sets the upper limit for channels 2 and 5 to 11 6 VDC 172 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALCulate CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA lt channel gt returns the upper limit value currently set for the channel specified by channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel Returned Value Numeric The C S
187. ARDCAL commands also do this as a side effect These commands are used to assign a conversion algorithm to each module channel establish which channels are to be assigned to each scan list and establish the pace of measurements during the scan ADVRATEn clocks 020016 020316 Sets the interval between successive samples for scan list n The sample rate is 2 2 clocks 1 The minimum value for clocks is 19 decimal corresponding 10 uS advance interval For values smaller than 19 19 will be used Appendix D Register Based Programming 367 ADVRATEL clocks 020416 Sets the interval between successive samples for all scan lists in the List of Lists The sample rate is 2 MHz clocks 1 The minimum value for clocks is 19 decimal corresponding 10 uS advance interval For values smaller than 19 19 will be used APPENDn channel range data flags 011016 011316 Adds an item to scan list n where n is 0 3 and is determined by the last op code digit channel is the channel on which to make the measurement range is an integer from 1 to 4 where 4 indicates the highest range A value of OFFFFh is also allowed and indicates autorange Unless you choose autorange you must set the range so the A D can accommodate the expected SCP output from the specified channel The data flags parameter has the format ddc where dd are destination bits and c is the conversion flag bit T
188. Based Programming Appendix D ASSIGN channel conversion compensation 001016 ASSIGN for Standard See the next discussion for Custom EU Conversions ASSIGN loads the EU Conversions specified channel s linear table area with the correct values for the indicated conversion If conversion is from 1 through 1516 it indicates a standard linearization such as an RTD or a type K thermocouple Thermocouple conversions incorporate reference junction compensation Some conversions are specifically for transducers measuring a reference junction If conversion is zero no conversion is performed and the channel returns voltage The supported standard conversions are Code EU Conversion Use Range 016 Volts 0 4 FFFF16 116 Reserved straight line conversion 216 Ohms 31 uA FFFF16 316 Ohms 488 pA FFFF 16 416 Reference Thermistor 5K 122 3 516 Reference RTD 85 121 uA 0 616 Reference RTD 92 121 uA 0 716 Reference Custom 0 816 Thermocouple Type J 0 916 Thermocouple Type K 0 A16 Thermocouple Type T 0 Bie Thermocouple Type E high accuracy 0 C16 Thermocouple Type E extended range 1 016 Thermocouple 0 E16 Thermocouple Type S 0 F16 Thermocouple Custom no compensation 0 1016 Thermistor 2 25K 488 uA FFFF 16 1116 Thermistor 5K 31 FFFF 16 1216 Thermistor 10K 31 FFFFi6 1316 RTD 85 488 uA 1416 RTD 92 488 uA 0 1516 Thermocouple Type N 0 1616
189. Before Trigger Count is Reached TRIG SOUR HOLD Stops at end of scan list still initiated TRIG IMM One more scan now idle or ABOR Stops immediately must use ABOR if TRIG COUNt is INF Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 117 Timer Based Scans at Different Rates Card 1 Master This example shows how to use the HP E1313 E1413 s internal FTRigger First TRigger event to source triggers onto a V XIbus TTLTRG line FTRigger sets the module to source a trigger when the module receives its first trigger of N where N is set by TRIGger COUNt The ratio of trigger 1 TRIGger COUNt outputs to trigger inputs is Also shown is the TRIGger TIMer MODE command When TRIGger TIMer MODE is set to SYNC the trigger timer keeps running even after the trigger count is reached When TRIGger TIMer MODE is set to ASYN the default the trigger timer stops and is reset each time the trigger count is reached By using SYNC you can insure that trigger pacing stays consistent when the trigger count is reset and scanning restarts Trigger Count o tc 1357 357 ss 3 5 7 Channel Number Ud 135 7 2 357 tc is the sample time between channels tp is the pacing time between channel lists The large arrow is the pacing Trigger Timer The smaller arrows are sample triggers generated by the HP E1313 E1413 when stepping through the channel list The first large arrow is th
190. Block Program and Response Data on page 156 of this chapter For REAL 32 readings are 4 bytes in length For REAL 64 and 64 readings are 8 bytes in length PACKed 64 returns the same values as REAL 64 except for Not a Number NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF The NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF values returned by PACKed 64 are in a form compatible with HP Workstation BASIC and HP BASIC UX Refer to the FORMat DATA command for the actual values for NaN INF and INF ASCii is the default format ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 2345 67 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Each reading is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOI follow the last reading Related Commands FORMat DATA and MEMory commands RST Condition MEMory VME ADDRess 240000 MEMory VME STATe OFF MEMory VME SIZE 0 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 197 FETCh Use Sequence MEM VME ADDR H300000 MEM VME SIZE H100000 IM byte or 262144 readings MEM VME STAT ON set up HP E1413 for scanning TRIG SOUR IMM Let unit trigger on INIT INIT IMM Program execution remains here until VME memory is full or the HP E1413 has stopped taking readings FORM REAL 64 Affects only the return of data FETC Note When using the MEMory subsystem the module must be triggered before executing the INITiate IMMediate command as shown above unless you are using an external
191. C TARE The register based calibration commands STORECAL and STORETAR Any application that installs firmware updates or makes any other modification to flash memory through the A24 window With the jumper in the PROG position you can completely calibrate one or more HP E1413s without removing them from the application system An HP E1413 calibrated in its working environment will in general be better calibrated than if it were calibrated separate from its application system The multimeter you use during the periodic calibration cycle should be considered your calibration transfer standard Have your Calibration Organization control unauthorized access to its calibration constants See the HP 1313 1413 Service Manual for complete information on HP E1313 E1413 periodic calibration If you must limit access to the HP E1413 s calibration constants you can place JM2201 in the protected position and cover the shield retaining screws with calibration stickers See Figure 1 4 for the location of JM2201 See Figure 1 3 for the location of the HP E1313s flash memory protect switch 26 Getting Started Chapter 1 SR CR Sk FIG1 6 Top three switch segments not used Flash Memory Protect Switch Default Shown PROG j recommended y Move switch to Right Protect 1 Locate pes of 3 Warning Cutting this Jumper Input Protect Jumper Voids
192. C16 64 370 Register Based Programming Appendix D Notes The compensation parameter is used only for custom EU thermocouple measurements compensation specifies which built in standard table to use for reference junction compensation compensation allows the following values for thermocouple reference compensation 1 Code EU Conversion 0 No Compensation J Type Compensation K Type Compensation T Type Compensation E Type Compensation N Type Compensation R Type Compensation WD S Type Compensation The Control Processor needs to know the SCP channel gain settings to properly perform an EU conversion for each channel The SCPGAINS command reads all channel gains and must be executed once the gains are set and scan lists are defined Standard thermocouple measurements except for conversion code F are always compensated for the current reference temperature There are two types of conversions Most conversions involve a piecewise linear interpolation from tables stored in RAM An alternative conversion method consists of a simple MX B 2 computation This straight line computation is valid for the entire measurement range of the A D and is used for reading voltage and resistance Itis possible to download tables into RAM by direct memory access from A24 If a custom downloaded conversion will be used for channel lt n gt the table
193. CALibration SETup or CALibration TARE Purge Macros Command Purges all currently defined macros Remove individual Macro Command Removes the named macro command Reset Command Resets the HP E1313 E1413 as follows Sets all four scan lists to their default states Scan List l ROUTe SEQuence DEFine 100 163 Scan List 2 through 4 are zero length undefined SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC AUTO 100 163 all channels autorange Sets the trigger system as follows TRIGger SOURce HOLD TRIGger TIMer PERiod 1E 4 TRIGger COUNt 1 ARM SOURce IMMediate SAMPIe TIMer 10E 6 Aborts all pending operations returns to Trigger Idle state Disables the OPC and OPC modes MEMory VME ADDRess 240000 MEMory VME STATe OFF MEMory VME SIZE 0 Sets bit 13 in the Questionable Data Group see Table 5 4 on page 259 Calibration data The output queue e The Service Request Enable SRE register e The Event Status Enable ESE register Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 279 Common Command Reference SRE mask Service Request Enable When a service request event occurs it sets a corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register this happens whether or not the event has been enabled unmasked by SRE The SRE command allows you to identify which of these events will assert an HP IB service request SRQ When an event is enabled by SRE and that event occurs it sets a bit in the Stat
194. CONTinuous trigger events When triggered one of four scan lists or the List of Lists specified by ROUTe SCAN LIST1 LIST4 or LISTL will control the instrument See the SENSe subsystem to specify scan list contents See the TRIGger subsystem to specify the trigger source Subsystem Syntax INITiate CONTinuous enable IMMediate INITiate CONTinuous INITiate CONTinuous lt enable gt ON changes the trigger system from the Trigger Idle State to the Initiated State An arm trigger event executes one or more scans then the module returns to the Initiated State ready for the next trigger INITiate CONTinuous OFF cancels the CONTinuous mode Note INITiate CONTinuous is related to TRIGger SOURce and ARM SOURce and can in certain settings generate Error 221 Settings conflict See the note on page 266 for details Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable discrete string ON OFF none Comments The term Continuous Mode means that the module is scanning with TRIGger SOURce IMMediate and INITiate CONTinuous ON After an ARM event the module executes a single Scan List continuously until an INITiate CONTinuous OFF is received Continuous Mode provides the fastest scan rate See Figure 5 6 on page 267 Executing INITiate CONTinuous ON clears the FIFO and Current Value Table Ifa trigger event is received before the instrument is initiated Error 211
195. CPI type returned is float32 e Related Commands CALOulate LIMit UPPer DATA Usage CALC LIM UPP DATA 107 Returns the upper limit set for channel 7 CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables or disables testing of upper limits for channels specified in lt ch_list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable gt discrete string ON OFF none lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none Comments If CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe is OFF an overrange will not cause a limit exceeded status If CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe is ON an overrange will cause a limit exceeded status regardless of the setting of CALCulate LIMit UPPer DATA Related Commands CALCulate LIMit STATe CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe e RST Condition CALOulate LIMit UPPer STATe OFF Usage CALC LIM UPP ON Enables upper limit checking Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 173 CALCulate CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe lt channel gt returns the state of upper limit testing for the channel specified by channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel Returned Value Numeric 0 or 1 The C SCPI type returned is int1
196. Commands OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe Usage OUTP TTLT2 OUTP TTLT7 STAT See if TTLTRG2 line is enabled returns 1 or 0 See if TTLTRG7 line is enabled 218 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 OUTPut OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt sets the excitation voltage on programmable Strain Bridge Completion SCPs pointed to by lt ch_list gt the HP E1511 Transient Strain SCP for example Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt amplitude gt numeric float32 01 1 2 5 10 ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments To turn off excitation voltage when using external voltage source program amplitude to 0 Related Commands OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude RST Condition MIN 0 Usage OUTP VOLT AMPL 5 116 119 Set excitation voltage for channels 16 through 19 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt channel gt returns the current setting of excitation voltage for the channel specified by lt channel gt Comments channel must specify a single channel only Returned Value Numeric one of 0 1 2 5 or 10 The C SCPI type returned is float32 Related Commands OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude Usage OUTP VOLT AMPL 9103 Returns current setting of excitation voltage for channel 3 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E141
197. Condition Register bit will not change the Event Register bit Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units transition mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none Comments transition mask may be sent as decimal hex octal Q or binary If both the Status Operation Positive Transition Filter STAT OPER PTR and Status Operation Negative Transition Filter STAT OPER NTR Registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative will set the corresponding bit in the Event Register If neither the Status Operation Positive Transition Filter STAT OPER PTR or Status Operation Negative Transition Filter STAT OPER NTR Registers have a Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 257 STATus Usage corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition Register will have no effect on the Event Register e Related Commands STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition Set to all ones by STATus PRESet and power on RST Condition No change STAT OPER PTR 16 When Measuring bit goes true set bit 4 in Status Operation Event Register STATus OPERation PTRansition Comments Usage STATus PRESet Comments Usage STATus OPERation PTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Positive Transition Filter PTF Register Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI typ
198. Contents HP E1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module 9 WARNINGS 6 2 6G v EAE ESOS CR RAE 10 Dach SPD 255595 10 Declaration dk eR DR Rem RR do 11 Declaration of Conformity sc zuo KOR RRR KEE 4 12 Reader Conus SHEE eS PUE d ROS A RR RUE Rd 13 Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 About This Chapter serpi wo EOD YR RS 15 Configuring the HP Scanning A D Converter Module 15 Setting the Logical Address Switch sos se taca koe 16 Installing HP E1313 Signal Conditioning Plug ons 18 Installing HP E1413 Signal Conditioning Plug ons 22 Disabling the Input Protect Feature optional 26 Disabling Flash Memory Access optional 26 DIYE ex RRA OEC dede Oe 20 About Example POETS uu eorr RR E Sd bow ES EE OS ESE 28 Venfying Successful Configuration iussus oko o o 24 de eRe 32 Chapter 2 Field Wiring 45422642 44454244564 amp 33 osque RR BARES Se BEE dC Ho RR ES 33 Planning Your Wirmg LAVOE os RE RR o dew a 33 SCP Positions and Channel Numbers 34 Sense SCs and Output SCPs 24 gs eee ee GL EO 35 Plannin
199. D Module Chapter 1 Getting Started 25 Disabling the Input Protect Feature optional VOIDS WARRANTY Disabling Flash Memory Access optional Disabling the input protect feature voids the HP E1313 E1413 warranty The input protect feature allows the HP E1313 E1413 to open all channel input relays if any input s voltage exceeds 19 volts This feature will help to protect the card s Signal Conditioning Plug ons input multiplexer ranging amplifier and A D from destructive voltage levels The level that trips the protection function has been set to provide a high probability of protection The voltage level that is certain to cause damage is somewhat higher If in your application the importance of completing a measurement run outweighs the added risk of damage to your HP E1313 E1413 you may choose to disable the input protect feature Disabling the input protection feature voids the HP E1313 E1413 warranty To disable the input protection feature locate and cut JM2202 Make a single cut in the jumper and bend the adjacent ends apart See Figures 1 3 and 1 4 for location of JM2202 The flash memory protect jumper JM2201 is shipped in the PROG position We recommend that you leave the jumper in this position so that all of the calibration commands can function Changing the jumper to the protect position means you will not be able to execute e The SCPI calibration command CALibration STORe AD
200. DR16 4016 where 49 152 C00016 is the starting location of the register addresses LADDR is the module s logical address and 64 4016 is the number of address bytes per VXI device For example the HP E1413 s factory set logical address is 2410 1816 If this address is not changed the module will have a base address of 49 152 24 64 49 152 1 536 50 688 or C00016 1816 4016 C000 16 60016 C60016 336 Register Based Programming Appendix D FFFF 6 C000 A16 ADDRESS SPACE 000016 REGISTER 16 WOR N OFFSET FFFF 6 16 not defined for E1413 3 16 not defined for 1413 REGISTER ADDRESS 2 SPACE OE16 Parameter Register 3 OC16 Parameter Register 2 OA 16 Parameter Register 1 08 Command Query C0004 5 ES 19 Response Register 49 152 N 0615 Offset Register Ss 0416 Status Control Register 0216 Device Type Register 0016 ID Register HP E1313 E1413 Base Address 00016 logical address 64 5 Register Map or 49 152 logical address 64 Register Address Base Address Register Offset Figure D 1 HP E1313 E1413 Registers within A16 Address Space Base Address with To calculate the base address when using the HP E1413 with HP Command HP Command Modules HP E1405B E1406 add 1F000016 or 2 031 61610 to the VXIbus Modules Register Bas
201. Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel Returned Value Numeric 0 or 1 The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe Usage CALC LIM LOW STAT 104 Returns state of lower limit testing for channel 4 CALCulate LIMit STATe CALCulate LIMit STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables or disables limit testing for the channels specified in lt ch_list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable gt discrete string ON OFF none lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none Comments Related Commands CALCulate LIMit STATe e RST Condition CALCulate LIMit STATe OFF Usage CALC LIM ON 100 107 Turn on limit testing for channels 0 through 7 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 171 CALCulate CALCulate LIMit STATe CALCulate LIMit STATe Q channel returns the state of limit testing for the channel specified in lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt channel gt channel list string 100 163 none Comments lt channel gt must specify a single channel only Returned Value Returns numeric 0 or 1 The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands CALCulate LIMit STATe Usage C
202. E lt channel gt lt range gt lt m gt 048016 Takes 2 readings 1 m 16 on the specified channel and range and returns the mean value and mean squared value as IEEE floating point numbers in the FIFO buffer range is an integer from 1 to 4 where 4 indicates the highest range The mean is returned first No conversions are supported the results are in raw volts and volts respectively Reference junction compensation is not used and the Current Value Table is unaffected If lt m gt is greater than 7 the readings are taken over an even number of line cycles at 50 and 60 Hz e g m 8 yields 256 samples spaced over 1 second The mean squared value is intended to be used to calculate the rms noise on a channel as follows rms noise N mean squared value mean value Due to fixed point arithmetic limits overflow may occur while accumulating the mean squared value when lt m gt is large In these cases a very large number is returned Autoranging is supported by AVERAGE Appendix D Register Based Programming 373 as follows The first reading is taken with autoranging and subsequent readings are taken on the same range as the first DSPEEK address data page 204016 Reads a 16 bit word from the control processor s Data Space RAM and returns it in the Query Response Register Addressing is based on the Control Processor s memory map and thus depends on how the data page bits BDO BD3 are set
203. E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 ROUTe SEQuence POINts ROUTe ROUTe SEQuence POINts scan list When scan list is LIST1 LISTA this command returns the number of channels defined in the specified Scan List When scan list is LISTL returns the number of Scan Lists defined Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Default Values Units scan list discrete string LIST1 LIST2 LIST3 LIST4 LISTL none Comments The number of channels returned with this command may not reflect the number of readings that will be sent to FIFO memory This is because the Channel Data Modifier see ROUTe SEQuence DEFine command of 3 4 or 7 can be used which does not place the readings in FIFO Usage ROUT SEQ POIN LIST3 Returned Value Numeric The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands ROUTe SEQuence DEFine RST Condition Scan Lists contain zero channels Check number of channels defined for scan list 3 returns a number between 0 and 1024 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 225 SAMPle SAMPle The SAMPle subsystem provides commands to set and query the interval between channel measurements pacing for each of the four Scan Lists Subsystem Syntax SAMPle TIMer lt scan_list gt lt interval gt TIMer lt scan_list gt SAMPlIe TIMer SAMPlIe TIMer scan list interval sets the time interval between channel measur
204. EL 368 ADVRATEn 367 ADZERO 364 Amplifier Gain setting 207 Amplitude current 213 voltage 219 APPENDL 368 APPENDn 368 Arbitrary Block Program Data Parameters 156 ARM 373 ARM Subsystem 160 162 ARM IMMediate 161 ARM SOURce 86 87 161 162 ARM SOURce 162 ASCii 199 200 Asynchronous Trigger Timer 270 271 Attaching HP E1413 Terminal Module 52 Automatic Scan List Sequencing 113 331 List of Lists 120 121 scanning channels at different rates 120 121 Autorange floor 193 floor setting to FIFO 193 overflow readings 144 setting lowest range 192 AVERAGE 373 Averaging HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 407 channel measurements 132 measurements 131 132 164 165 query state 165 readings 131 132 164 165 AVGRDGS 358 B Base Address 336 337 computing 336 HP command module 337 Bits condition register bit 254 259 decimal weighted bit values 253 enable register bit 255 260 event register bit 256 261 NTF register 256 257 261 262 operation summary bit 255 PTF register 257 258 262 263 questionable summary bit 260 RQS bit 128 scan control bit 343 scan status bit 344 status bit precedence 340 summary bit 128 Boolean Parameters 155 Bridge Types full bending 78 241 242 full bending poisson 78 241 242 full poisson 78 241 242 half bending 78 241 242 half poisson 78 241 242 quarter default 78 241 242 C C SCPI Data Types 158 C SCPI Example Program 30 32 C
205. ES PTR and Status Questionable Negative Transition Filter STAT QUES NTR Registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative will set the corresponding bit in the Event Register If neither the Status Questionable Positive Transition Filter STAT QUES PTR or Status Questionable Negative Transition Filter STAT QUES NTR Registers have a corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition Register will have no effect on the Event Register e Related Commands STATus QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Cleared By STATus PRESet and power on Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 261 STATus Usage e RST Condition No change STAT QUES NTR 1024 When FIFO Overflowed bit goes false set bit 10 in Status Questionable Event Register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Comments Usage STATus QUEStionable NTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Negative Transition Filter NTF Register Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 e Related Commands STATus QUEStionable NTRansition RST Condition No change STAT QUES NTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the NTF Register STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Parameters Comments STATus QUEStionable PTRansition fransition mask sets bits in the Positive Transition Filter PTF Register When a bit in the PTF Re
206. Excitation Sources thermistor 93 Excitation Voltage 219 248 Executing Register Based Commands 378 379 External trigger input 294 Externally Paced Scans 114 F Faceplate Connector Pin Signal Lists 63 64 FETCh Subsystem 197 198 Field Wiring 33 64 offset compensation 138 FIFO accessing the 91 230 235 accessing with HP VEE 387 buffer 90 102 104 109 232 234 235 buffer count readings 102 231 clearing 202 203 clearing readings 235 data retrieval 101 107 230 232 234 data retrieval methods 104 fastest reading transfer 106 107 floor settings to 193 LSW register 351 modes 89 233 MSW register 351 query buffer 230 query number of readings 231 232 reading controlled count 104 105 reading count register 353 reading transfer commands 102 230 232 234 registers 351 registers LSW register 351 registers MSW register 351 registers reading count register 353 registers status register 352 status commands 102 231 status register 352 FILTER 359 FILTER 359 Filters adding circuits to terminal module 48 changing after CAL TARE 140 182 cutoff frequency enabling 235 cutoff frequency query 236 cutoff frequency querying 205 cutoff frequency setting 71 204 enabling programmable SCP channel 206 high frequency common mode 62 low pass 235 236 negative transition 256 257 261 262 positive transition 257 258 262 263 query programmable SCP channel 206 Firmware ID String 345 Fla
207. FO data retrieval command There are four other commands and they are covered in Advanced FIFO Data Retrieval beginning on page 101 Note Channel readings which are a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF and negative overvoltage return IEEE INF To transfer readings from the instrument simply set n readings to the exact number of readings to be made during all scans The following is a guide n readings number of channels in Scan List x number of scans The number of channels is determined by the ROUTe SEQuence DEFine command The instrument executes one scan per trigger The TRIGger SOURce TRIGger COUNt and the INITiate CONTinuous mode determine how many times the list of channels will be scanned When INITiate CONTinuous is ON the number of triggers generated by TRIGger SOURce and the specified TRIGger COUNI control the number of scans To transfer 1 024 readings from the instrument SENS DATA FIFO PART 1024 Completes after 1 024 readings are accepted by an input statement Execute program input statement here Must take all readings specified above Example Program An example C SCPI program using cs is located on the C SCPI driver tape and example C and Visual BASIC program using xx is on the driver example program disk These programs put together all of the steps discussed so far in this chapter Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 91 Example Command Sequence This com
208. IFO ALL Insure module is in default state Initiate trigger system for scan Software trigger begins scan Recover 64 readings from FIFO 66 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Programming Sequence The sequence of programming the HP E1413 is important and should be performed as the following flow chart indicates Follow along with the SCPI Programming Overview Diagram on pages 68 and 69 Important Itis very important while developing your application that you execute the SYSTem ERRor command after each programming command This is the only way you will know if there is a programming error Set Channel Amplifiers Step 1 Filters amp Current Sources INPut and OUTPut Commands Link Engineering Unit 2 Conversions to Channels SENSe FUNCtion Commands Calibrate Channel Set up 2 Step 3 Important CAL Command 4 Define an nli ROUTe SEQuence DEFine and Step efine and Select Scan List s SCAN Step 5 Set Sample Timer SAMPIe TIMer Command TRIGger SOURce Command Step 6 Select Trigger amp Arm Sources and ARM SOURce Command Step 7 Select Data Format FORMat Command Step 8 Select FIFO Mode SENSe DATA FIFO MODE Command Step 9 Initiate Trigger System INITiate Commands Trigger Event SENSe DATA FIFO Commands Step 10 Retrieve Data and SENSe DATA CVT Commands Chap
209. IMer PERiod trig interval without re INITializing the module execute ARM SOUR IMM Must be IMM when SOUR not TIMer TRIGger SOURce BUS or HOLD To stop scanning TRIG TIM lt new_interval gt Change the timer interval TRIG SOUR TIM Return to timed scans 2 To avoid a Trigger Too Fast error following INITiate IMMediate the TRIGger TIMer interval must be greater than number of channels in scan list 3 SAMPle TIMer 30us Related Commands TRIGger SOURce ARM SOURCe ARM IMMediate INITiate commands TRIGger SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger TIMer PERiod 1 0E 3 Usage TRIG TIM PER 1 0E 2 Set the module to make a measurement scan every 10 mS TRIG TIM PER 1 Set the module to make a measurement scan once every second Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 273 TRIGger TRIGger TIMer PERiod TRIGger TIMer PERiod returns the currently set Trigger Timer interval Comments Returned Value Numeric 1 through 6 5536 The C SCPI type returned is float32 Related Commands TRIGger TIMer PERiod RST Condition 1 0E 4 Usage TRIG TIM PER Query trigger timer Enter statement Returns the timer setting 274 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Common Command Reference Common Command Reference CAL The following reference discusses the HP E1313 E1413 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Calibration Command The calibration command causes the Channel Calibr
210. L 64 and PACK 64 each reading is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is a float64 array Note Channel readings which a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF anda negative overvoltage return IEEE INF see the table on page 200 for actual values for each data format Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF RST Condition FIFO buffer is empty Command SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF Poll FIFO for half full status Sequence SENSe DATA FIFO HALF Returns 32768 readings 232 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe SENSe DATA FIFO MODE Parameters Comments Usage SENSe DATA FIFO MODE rode sets the mode of operation for the FIFO reading memory Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete string BLOCK OVERwrite none In BLOCk ing mode if the FIFO becomes full and measurements are still being made the new readings are discarded In OVERwrite Mode if the FIFO becomes full and measurements are still being made new readings overwrite the oldest readings In this situation the FIFO contains only the latest 65 024 readings In both modes Error 3021 FIFO Overflow is generated to let you know that measurements have been lost This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO MODE SENSe DATA FIFO ALL SENSe
211. LGHLG HLGHL GROUNDS COMMON M 10000 IL A 288 O09 220 oco AME own 200 5 3 E On board Thermistor for Local Temperature Sensing Terminal Block with Remote Temperature Sensing Trigger and other Connections m on 8 2 an on mm FOR CH 32 ER 63 LCAL HCAL Module Layout ina HP E1313 Term Figure 2 3 Chapter 2 38 Field Wiring Field Wiring 39
212. M SOURce is IMMediate you need only INITiate the trigger system to start a measurement scan e Related Commands ARM IMMediate ARM SOURce INITiate I MMediate INITiate DONTinuous ON TRIGger SOURce RST Condition ARM SOURce IMMediate ARM SOURce BUS Arm with ARM command ARM SOURce TTLTRG3 Arm with VXIbus TTLTRG3 line ARM SOURce returns the current arm source configuration See the ARM SOURce command for more response data information e Returned Value Discrete one of BUS HOLD SCP or TTLTO through TTLT7 The C SCPI type is string ARM SOUR An enter statement return arm source configuration 162 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALCulate CALCulate The CALCulate subsystem allows testing channel measurements against limits as well as performing data reduction and or noise reduction by averaging measurements Subsystem Syntax CALCulate AVERage COUNLt n readings STATe enable STATe CLIMits FAIL CUMulative CURRent FLIMits CHANnels CUMulative CURRent POINts CUMulative CURRent LIMit FAIL CUMulative channel CURRent channel LOWer lt lower_limit gt lt ch_list gt lt channel gt STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt UPPer upper limit Q ch
213. N with a parameter and SEQuence are second level commands and DEFine and POINts are third level commands A colon always separates one command from the next lower level command as shown below ROUT SEQ POINT LIST1 Colons separate the root command from the second level command ROUTe SEQuence and the second level from the third level SEQuence POINts The parameter LIST1 is separated from the command by a space The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability send the entire command The instrument will accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command For example if the command syntax shows SEQuence then SEQ and SEQUENCE are both acceptable forms Other forms of SEQuence such as SEQU or SEQUEN Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 153 Implied Commands Variable Command Syntax Parameters will generate an error You may use upper or lower case letters Therefore SEQUENCE sequence and SeQuEnCe are all acceptable Implied commands are those which appear in square brackets in the command syntax Note that the brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument Suppose you send a second level command but do not send the preceding implied command In this case the instrumen
214. NTinuous ON ARM SOURce must be set to IMMediate the RST condition If not the INITiate command will generate Error 221 Settings conflict Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 87 To set the external trigger signal as the arm source ARM SOUR EXT Setti ng the Trigger The trigger counter controls how many trigger events will be allowed to Counter start a measurement scan When the number of trigger events set with the TRIGger COUNt command is reached the module returns to the trigger idle state needs to be INITiated again The default trigger count is 1 returns to the trigger idle state after each scan If TRIGger COUNt is set to INFinite the trigger counter is disabled and the module will accept an unlimited number of trigger events To set the trigger counter to 100 TRIG COUN 100 Can trigger 100 times after a single INITiate command Step 7 Specifying the Data Format The format of the readings stored in the FIFO buffer and CVT never changes They are always stored as IEEE 32 bit floating point numbers The DATA lt format gt lt length gt command merely specifies whether and how the readings will be converted as they are transferred from the CVT and FIFO The lt format gt lt length gt parameters can specify PACKED Same as REAL 64 except for the values of IEEE INF IEEE INF and Not a Number NaN See the FORMat command in Chapter 5 for details REAL 32 Means real 32 bit no conve
215. Name Type Values Units lt channel gt channel list string 100 163 none channel must specify a single channel Returned Value Numeric The C SCPI type returned is float32 e Related Commands CALOulate LIMit L OWer DATA CALC LIM LOW DATA 106 CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables or disables testing of lower limits for channels specified in lt ch_list gt Parameters Comments Usage Return the lower limit set for channel 6 Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable gt discrete string ON OFF none lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none If CALCulate LIMit L OWer STATe is OFF overrange will not cause a limit exceeded status If CALCulate LIMit _LOWer STATe is ON an overrange will cause a limit exceeded status regardless of the setting of CALCulate LIMit LOWer DATA CALC LIM LOW STAT ON 100 107 RST Condition CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe OFF Related Commands CALCulate LIMit STATe CALCulate LIMit UPPer S TATe Enable lower limit testing for channels 0 through 7 170 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALCulate CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe lt channel gt returns the state of lower limit testing for the channel specified by channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of
216. ON or TRIGger COUNt gt 1 9 512 020016 SCP Trigger An SCP has sourced a trigger event future HP 1413 SCPs 10 1024 040016 FIFO Half Full The FIFO contains at least 32 768 readings 11 2048 080016 Limit Test Exceeded One or more limit tests was exceeded STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation CONDition returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Condition Register Comments The Condition Register reflects the real time state of the status signals The signals are not latched and therefore past events are not retained in this register see STATus OPERation EVENt Usage STATUS OPERATION CONDITION Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 Related Commands CAL CALibration ZERO INITiate IMMediate STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle e RST Condition No Change Condition Register Enter statement will return value from the 254 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 STATus STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle lt enable_mask gt sets bits in the Enable Register that will enable corresponding bits from the Event Register to set the Operation Summary bit Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable_mask gt numeric uint16 0 32767 none Comments enable mask may be sent as decimal
217. Off Trigger Counter 1 Trigger Idle State itiate Reads Current N Scan List Wait For Trigger State lt any Trigger Execute Entire Sean List Note The Continuous is set when TRIGger SOURcCe is set to IMMediate and INITiate CONTinuous is set to ON Note that executing INITiate CONTinuous ON not only sets the Continuous Mode but also initiates the module To stop at the end of the current scan execute the INITiate DONTinuous OFF command The sequence of events for this mode is shown in Figure 4 4 C The sequence shows that the current scan list is not read while the module is scanning This means that the current scan list cannot be changed on the fly However by specifying LISTL as the current scan list before INITiate CONTinuous ON the sequence of scan lists specified in LISTL will be executed This mode is the fastest since the module does not need to read the current scan list or check for the occurrence of a trigger event Counted Scanning Mode B Initiate Continuous Off Trigger Counter gt 1 1 Trigger Idle State Reads Current Scan List Trigger Count Done Wait For Trigger State lt any Trigger Execute Entire Scan List Continuous Scanning Mode C Initiate Continuous On Trigger Source Immediate Trigger Idle State
218. P E1313 Connector Pin Signal List Chapter 2 Field Wiring 63 E 64 CHANNEL SCANNING A D CAL BUS tle 6 1413 66201 C Count From Bottom 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 gt O0 tO Figure 2 27 HP E1413 Connector Pin Signal List 64 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 About This Chapter Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 This chapter introduces programming the HP E1413 with the SCPI instrument language Chapter contents include Module Page 65 Default Settings After Power on RST or TST Page 66 Programming Page 67 Step 1 Setting up Signal Conditioning Plug ons Page 70 Step 2 Linking Channels to EU Conversion Page 72 Step 3 Performing Channel Calibration Important Page 81 Step 4 Defining and Selecting the Scan Lists Page 83 Step 5 Setting the Sample
219. P Parameter out of range 0 4 DSP Flash rom erase failure 0x8 DSP Programming voltage not present 0x10 DSP Invalid SCP gain value Check that SCP is seated or replace SCP Channel numbers are in FIFO See the SENSe DATA FIFO ALL command Results in ASCII format see the FORMat DATA command 0x20 DSP Invalid CAL constant or checksum CAL required 0x40 DSP Could not cal some channels Check that SCP is seated or replace SCP Channel numbers are in FIFO See the SENSe DATA FIFO ALL command Results in ASCII format see the FORMat DATA command 0x80 DSP Re Zero of ADC failed 0 100 DSP Invalid Tare CAL constant or checksum Perform CAL TARE CAL TARE procedure 0x200 DSP Invalid Factory CAL constant or checksum Perform A D Cal procedure 0x400 DSP DAC adjustment went to limit Execute TST 0x800 DSP Status Do CAL 0x1000 DSP Overvoltage on input 0x2000 DSP reserved error condition 0x4000 DSP ADC hardware failure 0x8000 DSP reserved error condition 326 Error Messages Appendix B 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 FIFO Value 1 99 100 163 164 200 201 202 203 204 Error ID Number 1 19 21 29 20 30 37 38 71 72 74 76 80 93 73 77 79 94 99 Calibration or Test in Process Calibration not in Process ZERO must be sent before FSCale Perform A D Cal sequence as shown i
220. Parameter Value Source of Trigger FTRigger Generated on the First TRigger of a multiple counted scan set by TRIGger COUNt lt trig_count gt LIMit Generated when a channel s limit test is exceeded SCPlugon Generated by a Signal Conditioning Plug on SCP TRIGger Generated every time a scan is triggered see TRIGger SOURce trig source e FTRigger First TRigger is used to generate a single TTLTRG output when repeated triggers are being used to make multiple passes through a scan list The TTLTRG line will go low asserted at the first trigger event and stay low through subsequent triggers until the trigger count as set by TRIGger COUNt is exhausted At this point the TTLTRG line will return to its high state de asserted This feature can be used to have one HP E1413 trigger set to OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce FTRigger and OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe ON a second HP E1413 set to TRIGger SOURce TTLTrg lt n gt The second module will be triggered in the ratio 1 TRIGger COUNtmodulatl For an example of this arrangement see Timer Based Scans at Different Rates on page 118 Related Commands OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTPut TTL Trg SOURce TRIGger SOURce TRIGger COUNt e RST Condition OUTPutTTLTrg SOURce TRIGger Usage OUTP TTLT SOUR LIM Toggle TTLTRGn line when limit test exceeded Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 217 OUTPut OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce OUTPut TTLTrg SOURc
221. Poisson ratio C SCPI type returned is f1t32 channel must specify a single channel only Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion STRain commands SENSe STRain POlSson STRAIN POISSON 131 Enter statement here Query for the Poisson ratio specified for sense channel 31 Enter the Poisson ratio value 250 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe STRain Parameters Comments Usage SENSe UNSTrained SENSe STRain UNSTrained lt unstrained_v gt lt ch_list gt specifies the unstrained voltage value to be used to convert strain bridge readings for the channels specified by lt ch_list gt This command does not control the output voltage of any source Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units unstrained v numeric float32 16 through 16 volts ch list channel list string 100 163 none Use a voltage measurement of the unstrained bridge sense channel to determine the correct value for unstrained v ch list must specify the channel used to sense the bridge voltage not the channel position on a Bridge Completion SCP Related Commands SENSe STRain UNSTrained SENSe FUNCtion STRain commands RST Condition Unstrained voltage is zero STRAIN UNST 024 100 Set unstrained voltage for channel 0 SENSe STRain UNSTrained Parameters Comments Usage SENSe STRain UNSTrained Q channel r
222. Preferred Measurement Page 43 Connecting the On Board Thermistor Page 46 Adding Components to the HP E1413 Terminal Module Page 48 Wiring Attaching the HP E1313 Terminal Module Page 49 Wiring the HP E1413 Terminal Module Page 50 e Attaching the HP E1413 Terminal Module Page 52 e Removing the HP E1413 Terminal Module Page 53 e Terminal Module Wiring Page 54 Terminal Module Options Page 56 Faceplate Connector Pin Signal Lists Page 63 An example C SCPI program entitled wiretest cs is included on the C SCPI driver tape After completing your field wiring use this program to check for bad connections The program performs Open Transducer Detection see DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe in Chapter 5 for details and continuously loops while performing measurements on all 64 channels Planning Your Wiring Layout The first point to understand is that the HP E1313 E1413 makes no assumptions about the relationship between Signal Conditioning Plug on SCP function and the position in the HP E1313 E1413 that it can occupy You can put any type of SCP into any SCP position There are however some factors you should consider when planning what mix of SCPs should Chapter 2 Field Wiring 33 SCP Positions and Chann
223. QUES COND Questionable Data Group Condition Register STAT OPER COND Operation Status Group Condition Register 128 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Updating the Status System and VXIbus Interrupts The driver needs to update the Status systems information whenever the status of the HP E1313 E1413 changes This update is always done when the Status system is accessed when CALibrate INITiate or ABORt commands are executed Most of the bits in the Operation and Questionable Registers represent conditions which can change while the HP E1313 E1413 is measuring initiated In many circumstances it is sufficient to have the Status system bits updated the next time the Status system is accessed or the INITiate or ABORt commands are given When it is desired to have the Status system bits updated closer in time to when the condition changes on the HP E1313 E1413 the HP E1313 E1413 interrupts can be used The HP E1313 E1413 can send VXIbus interrupts upon the following conditions Trigger too Fast condition is detected Trigger comes prior to trigger system being ready to receive trigger FIFO overflowed In either FIFO mode data was received after the FIFO was full Overvoltage detection on input If the input protection jumper has not been cut the input relays have all been opened and a RST is required to reset the HP E1313 E1413 Scan complete The HP E1313 E1413 has finished a scan lis
224. RESO TEXT r zm T14 17m WHITE TEXT EUR READ BINBLOCK 22 ARANY WHITE TEXT Data grod SE EOL READ REALS i 394 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E Measurement Speeds in HP VEE the disc hardware used The exact maximum sustainable speeds depends a lot on the computer and Hardware Program Sustained Speed 486 66XM DX2 SCSI disc hpib HP E1301 1413MAN4 VEE 9K readings sec 486 66XM DX2 SCSI disc hpib HP E1406 141 12K readings sec 486 66XM DX2 SCSI disc VXLINK 1413MAN1 VEE 30K readings sec EPC8 486 66Mhz DX2 Embedded 1413MAN1 VEE 50K readings sec EPC7 486 100Mhz DX4 Embedded 1413MAN1 VEE 70K readings sec V743 Embedded 7451 100Mhz 1413MAN2 VEE 1413MAN2 VEE 100K readings sec 100K readings sec None of the above speeds are measured on a real time operating system Neither Windows or HP UX is real time thus if the operating system or other programs require CPU time then the above times will not be met In command module systems the HP E1313 E1413 SCPI driver has an additional mode of operation that can be used to achieve the full 100K per second speed for short time periods This mode of operation changes the normal continuous operation to a burst then transfer mode The command module empties th
225. RI eR Page 201 INITiate CONTinuous enable ee Page 202 INITiate IMMedi te tiri Med PUE de dies AL SL AO Oe Page 203 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency cutoff freq Q ch list ee Page 204 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt channel gt Page 205 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe enable Q ch list ee Page 206 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe lt channel gt Page 206 INPut GAIN lt chan_gain gt lt ch_list eh Page 207 INPutGAIN lt channel gt Page 207 INPutLOW wvolt type Q ch Page 208 INPut LOW lt channel gt Page 208 MEMory VME ADDRess A24 4 gt Page 210 MEMory VME ADDRess 2 oe eed mA ausge Reeves ds Page 210 MEMory VME SIZE memory size 2 Page 211 MEMorty VME SIZE x s oe m ob m eR o Ge Ae ege Qt ede Page 211 MEMory VME STATe enable 2I Page 212 MEMory VMES TATE seed x AC SRM eate Page 212 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt Page 213 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt channel gt Page 214 OUTPut CURRent STATe enable Q ch
226. RO DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE CHECksum COMMand SCPWRITE reg addr reg data CUSTom LINear table range table block G ch list PIECewise table range table block G ch list REFerence TEMPerature FLOor CONFigure range Q ch list FLOor DUMP INTerrupt LINe intr line INTerrupt LINe OTDetect STATe ON OFF G cA list OTDetect STATe lt channel gt QUERy SCPREAD reg addr WERSion FETCh FORMat DATA lt format gt lt size gt ASCii 7 PACKed 64 32 REAL 64 DATA INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF IMMediate INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt cutoff_freq lt D gt lt ch_list gt FREQuency lt channel gt STATe ON OFF lt channel gt STATe lt channel gt GAIN lt chan_gain gt lt ch_list gt GAIN lt channel gt Calibrate out system field wiring offsets Resets cal constants from CALibration TARE back to zero for all channels Returns state of CALibration TARE operation returns error codes or 0 for OK Send to instrument the value of just measured reference resistor Send to instrument the value of just measured voltage reference Correct A D for short term offset drift returns error codes or 0 for OK Sets mode to control OTD current during tare calibration Returns current setting of OTD control dur
227. ROUNDS LTS HTS LTI our O LT LT EXT HH lm Dao 0000000 GROUNDS COMMO T 1 GROUNDS COMMON 7 HLGHLGHLGHLGHLGELGHLGHLG E AURA L GLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLH GLHGLH CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH28 CH29 CH30 CH31 56 67 58 59 60 62 65 FOR CHANNELS 32 63 USE NUMBERS IN 48 49 50 51 53 54 55 DO NOT USE CENTER S CH16 CH17 18 19 CH20 CH21 22 CH23 BLOCK FOR CH 32 63 GLHGLHGLHGLHGLHGLH GLHGLH Sa l GROUNDS COMMON poppoopoopopa HaBBSBBHHH ROUNDS G COMMO H LGHLGHLGHLGHLG HLGHLG CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 CH05 CHO7 33 34 35 36 37 38 R CHANNELS 32 63 USE NUMBERS IN 42 43 44 45 46 47 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 HLGHLGH
228. Rce BUS EXTI HOLD IMM SCP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce CALCulate AVERage STATe ON OFF STATe COUNt lt n gt COUNt CLIMits FAIL CUMulative CURRent FLIMits CHANnels CUMulative CURRent POINts CUMulative CURRent LIMit STATe ON OFF lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt CUMulative 9 channel CURRent lt channel gt LOWer STATe ON OFF lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt lt lower_lim gt lt ch_list gt DATA lt channel gt UPPer STATe ON OFF lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt lt upper_lim gt lt ch_list gt DATA lt channel gt CALibration CONFigure RESistance VOLTage lt range gt ZERO FSCale SETup SETup STORe ADC TARE Stops scanning immediately and sets trigger system to idle state scan lists are unaffected Arm if ARM SOURce is BUS or HOLD software ARM Specify the source of Trigger Timer ARM Return current ARM source Enables disables channel measurement averaging Returns the state of channel averaging Sets the number of measurements averaged to produce a stored reading Returns the current setting of measurements per reading Returns composite limit test status since module was INITiated Returns composite limit test status for last completed scan list Returns all channel s limit test status since module was INITiat
229. SCP at channel ERRor Returns one element of the error queue 0 if no errors VERSion Returns the version of SCPI this instrument complies with TRIGger COUNt trig count Specify the number of trigger events that will be accepted COUNt Returns the current trigger count setting Triggers instrument when TRIGger SOURce is TIMer or HOLD same as TRG and IEEE 488 1 GET commands Specify the source of instrument triggers Returns the current trigger source Sets the interval between scan triggers when TRIGger SOURce is TIMer ASYN Trigger Timer runs only while module is INITiated SYNC Trigger Timer runs continuously Returns setting of Trigger Timer Mode Sets the interval between scan triggers when TRIGger SOURce is TIMer Returns setting of trigger timer 288 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Command Quick Reference IEEE 488 2 Common Command Quick Reference Macros Synchronization DMC name cmd data EMC 110 EMC GMC name LMC PMC RMC name OPC OPC TRG WAI Define Macro Command Enable Macro Command Enable Macros query Get Macro query Learn Macro query Purge Macro Commands Remove Individual Macro Operation Complete Operation Complete query Trigger Wait to Complete Category Command Title Description Calibration CAL Calibrate Performs internal calibration on all 64 channels out to th
230. SPOKE 374 PSPEEK 374 register based 373 374 Decimal Weighted Bit Values 253 condition register 254 259 event register 256 261 Declaration of Conformity HP E1313A 11 HP E1413C 12 Default instrument settings 66 279 scanning mode 109 110 Define Macro Command 276 Defining reference junction temperature 142 247 scan list 83 222 223 Definite Length Arbitrary Block 156 Description module 65 register 350 Detecting open transducers 141 Device Type Register 339 DIAGnostic Subsystem 187 196 DIAG CAL TARE OTD MODE 188 DIAG CAL TARE OTD MODE 188 DIAG CHECksum 189 DIAG COMMand SCPWRITE 189 DIAG CUSTom LINear 79 80 136 190 DIAG CUSTom PIECewise 80 136 137 191 DIAG CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature 192 DIAG FLOor CONFigure 144 192 193 DIAG FLOor DUMP 193 DIAG INTerrupt LINE 15 193 DIAG INTerrupt LINe 194 DIAG OTDetect S TATe 33 142 194 DIAG OTDetect S TATe 195 DIAG QUERy SCPREAD 195 DIAG VERSion 196 Disabling channels limit testing 171 channels lower limit 170 channels upper limit 173 current output 215 flash memory access optional 26 28 input protect feature optional 26 28 low pass filter 235 measurement averaging 165 open transducer detection OTD 142 194 346 programmable filter SCP channel 206 VME memory card 212 Discrete Parameters 155 DMC 276 Documentation History 10 Drivers instrument 29 updating status system 129 DSP
231. STAT OFF 100 123 146 163 Only channels 0 23 46 and 63 OFF Setting Current Current Source SCPs supply excitation current for all resistance type Sources measurements These include resistance and temperature measurements using resistance temperature sensors The commands to control Current Source SCPs are OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude amplitude lt _ list and OUTPut CURRent STATe enable The amplitude parameter sets the current output level It is specified in units of ADC and for the HP E1505 Current Source SCP can take on the values 30e 6 or MIN and 488e 6 or MAX Select 488 for measuring resistances of less than 8 000 Ohms Select for resistances of 8 000 Ohms and above The ch list parameter specifies the Current Source SCP channels that will be set Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 71 To set channels 0 through 9 to output 30 and channels 10 through 19 to output 488 OUTP CURR AMPL 30e 6 100 109 OUTP CURR AMPL 488 6 110 119 Separate command per output level or to combine into a single command message OUTP CURR AMPL 30e 6 100 109 CURR 488 6 110 119 Step 2 Linking Channels to EU Conversion Notes This step links each of the module s channels to a specific measurement type This tells the on board control processor which EU conversion to apply to the value read on any channel The processor is creating a list of conversion types versus c
232. TRIG TIM 0007 TRIG SOUR TIM FORM DATA REAL 32 INIT IMM The following loop reads number of readings in FIFO while module is scanning loop while measuring bit is true See STAT OPER COND bit 4 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt lt n_readings gt n_readings is an unsigned 16 bit integer if lt n_readings gt 16384 SENSe DATA FIFO PART lt read_data gt Read_data is a 32 bit floating point array end if end loop The following checks for readings remaining in FIFO after measuring false SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt lt n_readings gt if n_readings If any readings SENSe DATA FIFO PART read data Get readings from FIFO end if Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 105 Fastest Reading This command set is made up of the following commands Transfer SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF Determine if there are at least 32 768 readings in the FIFO SENSe DATA FIFO HALF Transfer one half of the FIFO 32 768 readings SENSe DATA FIFO ALL Return the remaining readings from the FIFO after scanning is complete What makes this method fastest is that SSENSe DATA FIFO HALF and SENSe DATA FIFO ALL have no parameters for the driver and instrument to process The program flow is almost the same as described in the General Form section earlier The difference is in the right side of Figure 4 3 where there is no decision block to determine the number of remaining readings Since SENSe DATA FIFO ALL will complete even i
233. The calibration becomes invalid if you move these SCPs to different SCP locations When you turn power on to the HP E1313 E1413 after you have first installed your SCPs or after you have moved SCPs the module will use approximate values for calibration constants This means that input and output channels will function although the values will not be very accurate relative to the HP E1313 E1413 s specified capability At this point make sure the module is firmly anchored to the mainframe front panel screws are tight and let it warm up fora full hour After it has warmed up execute CAL The CAL command causes the module to calibrate A D offset and gain and all channel offsets This may take many minutes to complete The actual time it will take your HP E1313 E1413 to complete CAL depends on the mix of SCPs installed CAL performs literally hundreds of measurements of the internal calibration sources for each channel and must allow 17 time constants of settling wait each time a filtered 8 calibration source changes value The CAL procedure is internally very sophisticated and results in an extremely well calibrated module Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 81 When CAL finishes it returns a 0 value to indicate success The generated calibration constants are now in volatile memory as they always are when ready to use If the configuration just calibrated is to be fairly long term you should now execute th
234. US Tom PIECewise and performs ref temp compensation for type Configure channels for two wire resistance measurement Links measurement channels as having read bridge voltage from Full Bending Poisson QUARter two wire RTDs thermocouples two wire thermistors Configure channels for temperature measurement types above excitation current comes from Current Output SCP Configure channels for DC voltage measurement RTDs thermistors Configure channel for reference temperature measurements above Specifies the temperature of a controlled temperature reference junction Specifies the Excitation Voltage by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Excitation Voltage set for lt channel gt Specifies the Gage Factor by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Gage Factor set for lt channel gt Specifies the Poisson Ratio by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Poisson Ratio set for lt channel gt Specifies the Unstrained Voltage by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Unstrained Voltage set for lt channel gt Operation Status Group Bit assignments 0 Calibrating 4 Measuring 8 Scan Complete 10 FIFO Half Full 11 Limit Exceeded Returns state of Operation Status signals Bits set to 1 enable status events to be summarized into Status Byte Returns the decimal weighted sum of bits set in the Enable Register Returns weighted sum of bits that represent Operation status events Set
235. VT RES 90 230 SENS DATA CVT 90 229 SENS DATA FIFO ALL 102 106 230 SENS DATA FIFO COUNt HALF 102 231 SENS DATA FIFO COUNt 102 231 SENS DATA FIFO HALF 102 106 232 SENS DATA FIFO MODE 89 233 SENS DATA FIFO MODE 233 SENS DATA FIFO PART 91 102 234 SENS DATA FIFO RESet 235 SENS FILT LPAS STATe 235 SENS FIL T LPAS STATe 236 SENS FUNC CUS Tom 80 136 236 SENS FUNC CUSTom REF 80 137 237 SENS FUNC CUSTom TC 80 137 238 239 SENS FUNC RES 72 73 240 241 SENS FUNC STR FBEN 78 241 242 SENS FUNC STR FBP 78 241 242 SENS FUNC STR FPO 78 241 242 SENS FUNC STR HBEN 78 241 242 SENS FUNC STR HPO 78 241 242 SENS FUNC STR QUAR 78 241 242 SENS FUNC TEMP 75 142 243 244 SENS FUNC VOLT DC 73 245 SENS REFerence 77 142 246 247 SENS REFerence TEMPerature 78 142 247 SENS STR EXC 79 248 SENS STR EXC 248 SENS STR GFAC 79 249 SENS STR GFAC 249 SENS STR POIS 79 250 SENS STR POIS 250 SENS STR UNST 79 251 SENS STR UNST 251 Sense vs Output SCPs 35 Sensing 4 20 mA 48 reference junction temperature 46 reference temperature 40 41 Separator SCPI commands 153 Sequence programming 67 90 scan lists 113 Serial Component Examples 48 Serial Poll SPOLL 128 Service Request Enable SRE 280 Setting absolute scan rate 121 amplifier gain 207 channels lower limit 169 channels uppe
236. Values of data page between 0 and 15 inclusive specify which page to read If a value of FFFF 6 is specified for data page the current page is read The value of data page is irrelevant for addresses below 800016 Some low addresses may appear to have different contents when read via A24 access This is because the control processor s internal RAM and registers are not available via A24 DSPOKE address data page data 208016 Writes the 16 bit word specified in data to the Control Processor s Data Space RAM Many Control Processor registers are mapped into low RAM Use this command carefully The lt address gt and lt data_page gt parameters have the same meanings as for the DSPEEK command PSPEEK lt address gt lt code_page gt lt table_page gt 210016 Reads a 16 bit word from the control processor s Program Space memory Since the subsystem uses paging when accessing the Program Space the lt code_page gt and lt table_page gt parameters are necessary Valid values of table page are 0 1 or FFFF16 with the latter specifying use current page The value of lt table_page gt is irrelevant for addresses below 800016 Valid values for lt code_page gt 0 1 2 3 FFFF16 The value of code page matters only for the address range 400016 through 7FFFi16 In general the PSPEEK command reads flash memory but for the address range 200016 through 23FF16 it usually reads contro
237. When DONE is zero 0 NOERR and Query Resp Ready are invalid This allows the module to set those bits to the correct states based on the conditions they represent Base 0446 Write only The Control Register is used to reset the module and to disable the module from driving the SYSFAIL line Address 15 14 2 1 0 Base 0415 A24 Enable unused SYSINH RESET A24 Enable Writing a one 1 to bit 15 enables accesses to the A24 address space Writing a zero 0 disables accesses to the A24 address space SYSINH Writing a one 1 to bit 1 prevents the module from asserting the SYSFAIL line Writing a zero 0 allows the module to assert SYSFAIL RESET Writing a one 1 to bit O resets the module Writing a zero 0 turns the reset function off While bit 0 is 1 the module is held in the reset state 340 Register Based Programming Appendix D Offset Register Note Base 0616 Read Write The Offset Register defines the base address of the module s A24 address space Because the HP E1413 s A24 address space is 256 Kbytes only the bits 15 through 10 are used Address 15 10 9 0 Base 0616 A24 Offset not used When reading the Offset Register bits 9 through 0 always return zeros 0 A24 Offset These bits are the six most significant bits of the device s A24 base address The 10 least significant bits are all 0 Register Based Command an
238. Your Warranty Figure 1 3 Locate and Access JM2201 and JM2202 on HP E1313 Chapter 1 Getting Started 27 Flash Memory Protect Jumper Default PROG recommended 1 Locate Ce 2 Cut Input Protect Jumper Warning Cutting this Jumper Voids Your Warranty E1413 FIG1 3 Figure 1 4 Locate and Access JM2201 and JM2202 on HP E1413 28 Getting Started Chapter 1 Instrument Drivers If you will be using the HP E1313 E1413 with C SCPI the driver is supplied as an option to the C SCPI product Follow the C SCPI documentation for use The HP E1300 E1301 HP E1306 and HP E1405B E1406A downloadable driver is supplied with your HP E1313 E1413 See the manual for your HP command module mainframe for downloading procedures About Example Programs Examples on Disc Example Command Sequences All example programs mentioned by file name in this manual are available on the HP E1313 E1413 C SCPI driver media both DOS and HP UX versions Most of these example programs are also supplied in DOS C versions for users of HP command modules on the DOS formatted downloadable driver disc for the command module HP E1405B or HP E1406A An IBASIC version of the Verify program shown below is supplied on the LIF formatted downloadable command module driver Where programming concepts are discussed in this manual the commands to send to the HP E1313 E1413 are shown in the form of
239. ables HP E1588A 62 HP Z2220A Option 050 62 interconnect 62 rack mount terminal panel 62 CAL 35 81 82 275 276 difference from CAL SETup 179 how to use 81 what CAL does 81 when to re execute CAL 82 CALCulate Subsystem 163 174 CALC AVER COUNt 131 132 164 CALC AVER COUNt 164 CALC AVER STATe 131 165 CALC AVER STATe 165 CALC CLIM FAIL CUM 166 CALC CLIM FAIL CURR 166 CALC CLIM FLIM CHAN CUM 167 CALC CLIM FLIM CHAN CURR 167 CALC CLIM FLIM POIN CUM 168 CALC CLIM FLIM POIN CURR 168 CALC LIM FAIL CUM 168 CALC LIM FAIL CURR 169 CALC LIM LOW DATA 169 CALC LIM LOW DATA 170 CALC LIM LOW STATe 170 CALC LIM LOW STATe 171 CALC LIM STATe 171 CALC LIM STATe 172 CALC LIM UPP DATA 172 CALC LIM UPP DATA 173 CALC LIM UPP STATe 173 CALC LIM UPP STATe 174 Calibration background mode 130 bus 177 CAL command 275 276 channel gain 275 channel offsets 275 channels 81 82 179 command CAL 275 276 control of 26 resistor value 184 storage in flash memory 180 Calibration Commands ADGAIN 364 ADZERO 364 CARDCAL 364 CARDCAL 365 READTEMP 365 REFTEMP 365 register based 363 367 RESCAL 365 RESIST 365 SOURCE 366 SPANHI 366 SPANLO 366 STORECAL 366 STORETAR 366 TAREAPPEND 366 TARECAL 367 TARECAL 367 TARENULL 367 UNHOOK 367 CALibration Subsystem 175 186 CAL CONFigure RESistance 177 CAL CONFigure VOL Tage 177 178 CAL SETup 81 82 1
240. aging for all channels The number of measurements per reading is set using CALCulate AVERage COUNt 2 4 8 16 32 64 256 The following restrictions apply when performing channel averaging Because each channel can be allocated only one memory location for intermediate calculation results an individual channel number must appear in a scan list only once and use of LISTL List of Lists is not allowed n order to maintain high speed while averaging when CALCulate AVERage STATe is ON channels must use manual ranging Example Command Sequence ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 101 102 103 Define scan ROUT SCAN LIST1 Select scan LISTI SAMP TIM LIST1 lt te gt tc can be 10 5 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM PER fp lt tp gt can be Ims 6 5536 s TRIG COUN lt count gt lt count gt can be 1 32768 or INF but it MUST be gt CALC AVER COUNt ARM SOUR lt source gt lt source gt can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTrgo TTLTrg7 CALC AVER COUN 4 Each reading averages of 4 measurements CALC AVER ON Enable averaging INIT IMM Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 131 Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping Stops when Trigger Count is reached unless count is INF then use ABORt Note TRIGger COUNt must be greater than or equal to CALCulate AVERage COUNT in order to complete the average calculation
241. ame March 15 1996 Jim White QA Manager European contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Herrenberger Strafe 130 D 71034 B blingen Germany FAX 49 703 1 14 3143 12 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual cut along this line Please fold and tape for mailing Reader Comment Sheet HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Edition 6 You can help us improve our manuals by sharing your comments and suggestions In appreciation of your time we will enter you in a quarterly drawing for a Hewlett Packard Palmtop Personal Computer U S government employees cannot participate in the drawing Your Name City State Province Company Name Country Job Title Zip Postal Code Address Telephone Number with Area Code Please list the system controller operating system programming language and plug in modules you are using fold here NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 37 LOVELAND CO E POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE e us ap HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY Measurement Systems Division Learning Products Department P O Box 301 Loveland CO 80539 9984 fold here Please pencil in one circle for each statement below Disagree Agree The documentation is well organized Instructions are easy to understand
242. and Module 394 Measurement Speeds m HP VER uuu ac DEES eo GR UR 395 Appendix Wiring and Noise Reduction 5 401 Recommended Wiring and Noise Reduction Techniques 401 Wii Check TTE 401 E1313 E1413 Guard 402 Common Mods Voltage 4444 64 64 REOR RR Es 402 Whento Make Shield Connections o s eca ce caract niner paa phia 402 Noise Due to Inadequate Card Grounding 402 HP Noise Rejection cea eek RR t dred 402 Normal Mode Noise 403 Common Mode Noise 403 Keeping Common Mode Noise Out of the Amplifier 403 Reducing Common Mode Rejection Using Tri Filar Transformers 404 nir peee ee eE ee a k 407 8 HP E1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module Contents Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technol ogy formerly National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by that organization s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warr
243. and check the RQS bit to determine if there are any status conditions which need attention In this way the RQS bit is like the HP IB s SRQ Service Request line The difference is that while executing an HP IB serial poll SPOLL releases the SRQ line executing the STB command does not clear the RQS bit in the Status Byte You must read the Event Register of the group who s Summary bit is causing the RQS You may want to directly poll Status Groups for instrument status rather than poll the Status Byte for summary information The Questionable Data Operation Status and Standard Event Groups all have Event Registers These registers log the occurrence of even temporary status conditions When read these registers return the sum of the decimal values for the condition bits set then are cleared to make them ready to log further events The commands to read these Event Registers are STAT QUES EVEN Questionable Data Group Event Register STAT OPER EVEN Operation Status Group Event Register ESR Standard Event Group Event Register To clear the Event Registers without reading them execute CLS Clears all group s Event Registers The Questionable Data and Operation Status Groups each have a Condition Register The Condition Register reflects the group s status condition in real time These registers are not latched so transient events may be missed when the register is read The commands to read these registers are STAT
244. annels 0 through 15 are to be converted into engineering units and stored in both the FIFO data buffer and the Current Value Table CVT In addition channels 0 through 15 are to be read and the raw voltage values are to be added to the FIFO buffer The FIFO will contain 16 converted readings and 16 voltage readings The CVT will contain a converted reading for channels 0 through 15 To scan channels 0 through 63 send EU converted readings to the FIFO and send voltage readings to the CVT ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 5 00 63 4 00 63 108 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Understanding Scanning Modes The HP E1413 is a 64 Channel Scanning Analog to Digital Converter The sequence of channels to scan are specified in a scan list Scanning is the only way the module makes measurements A scan list can contain as few as two channels three if Sample and Hold SCP installed and as many as 1 024 channels Once the module has been initiated and triggered it executes the current scan list and stores the resultant readings in the 64 channel Current Value Table CVT and in the 65 023 reading FIFO buffer FIFO Different sequences of channels can be specified in each of four scan lists Any of the four scan lists that have been defined channels specified can be selected as the current scan list After being initiated the module executes the current scan list once for each trigger event There are several choices for the trigger
245. anty This Hewlett Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from date of ship ment Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into becomes a part of other HP products During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard HP Buyer shall pre pay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with a product will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that product HP does not warrant that the operation of the product or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied prod ucts or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or im proper site preparation or maintenance The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of
246. apter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 83 Selecting the When the module is triggered it will execute the current scan list After the Current Scan List command or at power up the current scan list is List 1 To select another scan list execute the ROUTe SCAN scan list command The scan list parameter can specify LIST1 LIST2 LISTS LISTA or LISTL You define LISTL as a list of scan lists when LISTL is the current scan list ROUTe SCAN is not sequence sensitive It can be executed at any time even while the module is scanning Normally the specified scan list number becomes effective when the trigger system moves from the initiated state to the waiting for trigger state If ROUTe SCAN is executed after this point it will become effective for the next scan If INITiate CONTinuous is ON and TRIGger SOURce is IMMediate ROUTe SCAN will generate an error See Figure 3 3 Trigger Idle State 4 INIT CONT OFF i Initiated State INIT CONT lt v TRIG SOUR not IMM Process Reads gt Scan List Number TRIG COUNt set gt 1 b and remaining 4 count still gt 0 Waiting For Trigger INIT CONT ON 4 and TRIG SOUR IMM Executing Scan List v Figure 3 3 Event Sequence for ROUTe SCAN To select scan list 2 as the current scan list ROUT SCAN LIST
247. as triggered A zero 0 indicates that an SCP has not triggered Measurement Complete A one 1 indicates that the measurement has completed Trigger Too Fast A one 1 in this bit indicates that a trigger too fast condition has been detected A zero 0 indicates that no trigger too fast condition has occurred Over Voltage Detect A one 1 indicates that an SCP over voltage condition has occurred A zero 0 indicates that no over voltage condition has occurred Scan Complete A one indicates that the module has completed a scan If the module is in the Free run mode Scan Complete is asserted at the end of each scan FIFO Overflowed A one 1 indicates that the FIFO has overflowed FIFO Half Full A one 1 indicates that the FIFO is half To clear this condition the FIFO is read until the FIFO is less than half full 348 Register Based Programming Appendix D Virtual Instrument Registers The Virtual Instrument Registers are used to identify what virtual instrument functionality the HP E1313 E1413 modules have Common Capabilities Register Base 1 16 Read only returns 5016 This register indicates whether the HP E1413 supports certain optional registers Address 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Base 1A16 Send Count Rec Count IRQ 1 IRQ2 Send Frame Rec Frame Slave Addr Send Count A one 1 indicates that the device has a Send Count Reg
248. ata format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program and Response Data on page 156 of this chapter For REAL 32 each reading is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 each reading is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type returned is float64 array Channel readings which a positive overvoltage return IEEE anda negative overvoltage return IEEE see the table on page 200 for actual values for each data format e Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt RST Condition FIFO buffer is empty Usage SENSe DATA FIFO PART 256 Return 256 readings from FIFO 234 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe SENSe DATA FIFO RESet Comments Usage SENSe DATA FIFO RESet clears the FIFO of readings The FIFO counter is reset to 0 This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO commands e RST Condition SENSe DATA FIFO RESet SENS DATA FIFO RES Clear the FIFO SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe Parameters Comments SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe lt enable gt enables or disables the A D s low pass filter Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable gt discrete string ON OFF none The A D low pass filter when enabled affects all channels
249. ating IMPORTANT 81 82 See also Channel cutoff frequency 204 205 floor settings to FIFO 193 limit testing 171 172 linking to EU conversion 72 80 136 241 247 lower limit 169 171 programmable filter SCP 206 scanning at absolute rate 121 scanning at different rates 120 121 module using with HP VEE 394 register 341 registers 342 356 sequences defined 29 Command Reference 149 290 ABORt subsystem 159 ARM subsystem 160 162 CAL 275 276 CALCulate subsystem 163 174 CALibration subsystem 175 186 CLS 276 DIAGnostic subsystem 187 196 DMC 276 EMC 276 EMC 276 ESE 277 ESE 277 ESR 277 FETCh command 197 198 FORMsat subsystem 199 201 GMC 277 IDN 277 278 INITiate subsystem 202 203 INPut subsystem 204 208 LMC 278 MEMory subsystem 209 212 OPC 278 OPC 278 279 OUTPut subsystem 213 219 PMC 279 register based 356 374 RMC 279 ROUTe subsystem 220 225 RST 279 SAMPle subsystem 226 227 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 409 SENSe Subsystem 228 251 SRE 280 SRE 280 STATus subsystem 252 263 STB 280 SYSTem subsystem 264 265 TRG 280 TRIGger subsystem 266 274 TST 281 283 WAI 283 Commands abbreviated 5 153 ABORt 159 ARM subsystem 160 162 CAL 275 276 CALCulate subsystem 163 174 CALibration subsystem 175 186 CLS 276 DIAGnostic subsystem 187 196 DMC 276 EMC 276 EMC 276 ESE 277
250. ation function to be performed for every module channel The Channel Calibration function includes calibration of A D Offset and Gain and Offset for all 64 channels This calibration is accomplished using internal calibration references The CAL command causes the module to calibrate A D offset and gain and all channel offsets This may take many minutes to complete The actual time it will take your HP E1313 E1413 to complete CAL depends on the mix of SCPs installed CAL performs literally hundreds of measurements of the internal calibration sources for each channel and must allow 17 time constants of settling wait each time a filtered channel s calibrations source value is changed The CAL procedure is internally very sophisticated and results in an extremely well calibrated module To perform Channel Calibration on multiple HP E1313 E1413s use the CALibration SETup command see CALibration SETup on page 179 for details Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYSTem ERRor See Error Messages in Appendix B The C SCPI type returned is int16 CALibration STORe ADC stores the calibration constants for CAL and CALibration SETup into non volatile memory Executing this command does not alter the module s programmed state function range etc but it does clear bit 13 in the Questionable Data Group see Table 5 4 on page 259 e Thi
251. atus Reg 04 until bits 3 and 2 set Passed and Ready 04 8000 382 Register Based Programming Appendix D Reset CVT Set Trigger Mode Set Trigger Count Interrupt Config Read all SCP IDs Set SCP Characteristics Reg Offset hex Value hex 08 0420 CVTINIT cmd note 2 Reg Offset hex Value hex 2E 0008 software trigger Reg Offset hex Value hex 0A 0001 trigger count param note 5 08 2330 TRIGCOUNT cmd notes 2 4 Reg Offset hex Value hex 14 0001 Int on IRQ1 For each SCP address total of eight times Reg Offset hex Value hex 0A 40 X SCP Address 08 0800 SCBREAD cmd note 4 Read SCP ID response from Query Response Register 08 note 3 For each SCP address total of eight times Reg Offset hex Value hex OA SCP Address 0 7 0C SCP attributes see page 372 08 0830 SCPCHAR cmd note 2 Programming Module After Reset Sequence Clear FIFO Link Channels to EU Conversions Reg Offset hex Value hex 12 1000 12 0000 Reg Offset hex Value hex 0A 0000 channel number 0C 0000 EU code for volts note 5 08 0010 ASSIGN cmd notes 2 4 0A 0001 channel number 0C 0004 EU code for ref thermistor note 5 08 0010 ASSIGN cmd notes 2 4 0A 0002 channel number 0C 0008 EU code for J thermocouple note 5 08 0010 ASSIGN cmd notes 2 4 OA 0003 channel number OC 0008 EU code for J thermocouple note 5 08 0010 ASSIGN cmd notes 2 4 Appendix D Register Based Programming 383 DSP c
252. ause the corresponding bit in an Event Register to be set to one Querying an Event Register reads and then clears its contents making it ready to record further event transitions from its Condition Register Enable Registers are used to select which signals from an Event Register will be logically ORed together to form a summary bit in the Status Byte Summary Register Setting a bit to one in an Enable Register enables the corresponding bit from its Event Register STATus OPERation CONDiition ENABle enable mask ENABIe 2 transition mask NTRansition PTRansition transition mask PTRansition PRESet QUEStionable CONDiition ENABle enable mask ENABIe 2 transition mask NTRansition PTRansition transition mask PTRansition The status system contains four status groups Operation Status Group Questionable Data Group Standard Event Group Status Byte Group 252 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 STATus This SCPI STATus subsystem communicates with the first two groups while IEEE 488 2 Common Commands documented later in this chapter communicate with Standard Event and Status Byte Groups Condition Event Enable 0 h 1 gt OF LI Summary Bit to Status Byte 14 015 gt Figure 5 4 General Status Register Organi
253. autorange default SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBENding SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBPoisson SENSe FUNCtion STRain FPOisson SENSe FUNCtion STRain HBENding SENSe FUNCtion STRain HPOisson SENSe FUNCtion STRain QUARter Note on Syntax Although the strain function is comprised of six separate SCPI commands the only difference between them is the bridge type they specify to the strain EU conversion algorithm SENSe FUNCtion STRain Pridge type lt range gt lt ch_list gt links the strain EU conversion with the channels specified by ch list to measure the bridge voltage See Linking Channels to EU Conversion in Chapter 3 for more information bridge type is not a parameter but is part of the command syntax The following table relates the command syntax to bridge type See the User s Manual for the optional Strain SCP for bridge schematics and field wiring information Command Bridge Type FBENding Full Bending Bridge FBPoisson Full Bending Poisson Bridge FPOisson Full Poisson Bridge HBENding Half Bending Bridge Half Poisson Bridge QUARter Quarter Bridge default Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt range gt numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments ch list channel list string 100 163 none Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 241 SENSe
254. before any of the associated thermocouple channels External wiring and connections to the HP E1313 E1413 are made using the terminal module see pages 49 51 The isothermal reference temperature measurement made by an HP E1313 E1413 applies only to thermocouple measurements made by that instrument In systems with multiple HP Scanning A D Converter modules each instrument must make its own reference measurements The reference measurement made by one HP E1313 E1413 cannot be used to compensate thermocouple measurements made by another HP E1313 E1413 To make good low noise measurements you must use shielded wiring from the device under test to the terminal module at the HP E1313 E1413 The shield must be continuous through any wiring panels or isothermal reference connector blocks and must be grounded at a single point to prevent ground loops See Preferred Measurement Connections on page 43 for more information 36 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Terminal Modules The SCPs and Terminal Module Terminal Module Layout The HP E1313 E1413 is comprised of an A D module and a spring clamp type terminal module The screwless terminals utilize a spring clamp terminal for connecting solid or stranded wire Connection is made with a simple push of a three pronged insertion tool HP part number 8710 2127 which is shipped with the HP E1313 E1413 If the spring clamp type terminal module is not desired a crimp and insert terminal mod
255. blem with a Signal Conditioning Plug on For tests 20 and 30 37 remove all SCPs and see if TST passes If so replace SCPs one at a time until you find the one causing the problem For tests 72 74 76 and 80 93 try to re seat the SCP that the channel number s points to or move the SCP and see if the failure s follow the SCP If the problems move with the SCP replace the SCP These are the only tests where the user should troubleshoot a problem Other tests which fail should be referred to qualified repair personnel Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 281 Common Command Reference Note Executing TST returns the module to its RST state RST causes the FIFO data format to return to its default of ASC 7 If you want to read the FIFO for TST diagnostic information and you want that data in other than the ASCII 7 format be certain to set the data FIFO format to the desired format FORMat DATA command after completion of TST but before executing a SENSe DATA FIFO query command The C SCPI type for this returned value 15 int16 Following TST the module is placed in the RST state This returns many of the module s programmed states to their defaults See page 66 for a list of the module s default states TST performs the following tests on the HP E1413 and installed Signal Conditioning Plug ons Digital Tests Test Description 1 3 Writes and reads patterns to registers via A16 and A24 4
256. bort bit high will cause the control processor to stay in the Abort state See Control Processor States on page 381 List of Lists Writing a one 1 enables the List of Lists While enabled the Next List field is ignored Writing a zero 0 is the default re enables the Next List field Auto arm When the module finishes executing a scan list it will arm to receive another trigger if this bit is set The Next List field will be used to determine the scan list to be executed when the next trigger is received The Auto arm bit is ignored in Free run Mode Free run Mode When this bit is set the scan list is executed continuously after an initial trigger Changes to the Next List bits after trigger will not be effective until scanning is stopped If this bit is cleared when a scan is in progress the acquisition will be halted at the end of the scan list Acquisition may be halted immediately by asserting the abort bit or by resetting the card Appendix D Register Based Programming 343 Reserved Always write zeros to these bits Next List This field denotes which of four previously defined scan lists will be used for the next arm trigger sequence Note that in Free run Mode this field 1s read only once Scan Status Bits Bits 15 8 are read only and show the present state of the scan process Writing to this register has no effect on bits 15 8 Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0 1016 Running Armed
257. by Wiley amp Sons ISBN 0 471 85068 3 Noise Due to Inadequate Card Grounding If either or both of the HP E1413 and HP E1482 MXI Extender Modules are not securely screwed into the VXIbus mainframe noise can be generated Make sure that both screws top and bottom are screwed in tight If not it is possible that CVT data could be more noisy than FIFO data because the CVT is located in A24 space the FIFO in A16 space more lines moving could cause noisier readings HP E1313 E1413 Noise Rejection See Figure F 1 for the following discussion 402 Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods Appendix F Normal Mode Noise Enm Common Mode Noise Ecm Normal Mode differential Noise Source thermocouple This noise is actually present at the signal source and is a differential noise Hi to Lo It is what is filtered out by the buffered filters on the HP E1502 HP E1503 HP E1508 and HP E1509 SCPs This noise is common to both the Hi and Lo differential signal inputs Low frequency Ecm is very effectively rejected by a good differential instrumentation amplifier and it can be averaged out when measured through the Direct Input SCP HP E1501 However high frequency Ecm is rectified and generates an offset with the amplifier and filter SCPs such as HP E1502 HP E1503 HP E1508 and HP E1509 This is since these SCPs have buffer amplifiers on board and is a characteristic of amplifiers The best way to deal with this is to preven
258. cans will be done at 001 sec intervals thus this should go for 7 seconds The Scan list subpanel is set for all 64 channels Thus 64 7000 448 000 readings will be taken which occupy 1 792 000 bytes of memory 5 VEE 1413MAN4 VEE ile Edit Flow Device WO Data Math AdvMath Display Help UJ HEWLETT Panel Detail Untitled This panel initializes the E1413 E1313 according to all of it s subpanels This needs to be executed leach time power is cycled or the E1413 E1313 is reset E1413 hpe1413 30903 Trig Count 7000 Trig Source Trig Timer 0010 Mode 21 Arm Source source VXI Line States KEEN IEEE ECA lt gt Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 399 This part of the program starts the measurement and then transfers the readings to the computer The READ BINARY x BYTE ARRAY 9 reads the IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block header The block header has the form of ndd where means block specifier n is the number of d to follow dd is number of bytes to follow In this example the header is 71792000 so 9 bytes are read and discarded Then the readings are read in groups of 10 scans of 64 channels and written to disk One large READ BINBLOCK command could have been used to read the data but this would have required a huge amount of free memory in the computer Notice that the time
259. cause SRQ interrupts STAT OPER EVENT must be executed after an to re enable future interrupts Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 e Related Commands STB SPOLL STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle Cleared By CLS power on and by reading the register RST Condition No change STAT OPER EVENT Enter statement will return the value of bits set in the Operation Event Register STAT OPER Same as above STATus OPERation NTRansition Parameters Comments STATus OPERation NTRansition fransition mask sets bits in the Negative Transition Filter NTF Register When a bit in the NTF Register is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition Register must change from a one to a zero in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event Register When a bit in the NTF Register is zero a negative transition of the Condition Register bit will not change the Event Register bit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units transition mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none e transition mask be sent as decimal hex octal Q or binary f both the Status Operation Positive Transition Filter STAT OPER PTR and Status Operation Negative Transition Filter STAT OPER NTR Registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative
260. ces are also measured This calibration function corrects for thermal offsets and component drift for each channel out to the input side of the Signal Conditioning Plug On SCP All calibration sources are on board and this function is invoked using either the CAL or CALibration SETup command Channel Tare This function CALibration T ARE corrects for voltage offsets in external system wiring Here the user places a short across transducer wiring and the voltage that the module measures is now considered the new zero value for that channel The new offset value can be stored in non volatile calibration memory CALibration STORe TARE but is in effect whether stored or not System offset constants which are considered long term should be stored Offset constants which are measured relatively often would not require non volatile storage CALibration TARE automatically executes a CAL Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 175 CALibration Subsystem Syntax CALibration CONFigure RESistance VOLTage range ZERO FSCale SETup SETup STORe type TARE lt ch_list gt TARE RESet VALue RESistance ref ohms VOLTage ref volts ZERO CAL SETup SCP or CAL scp 4 SCP 4 o o H 5 lt SCP CAL TARE AD gt SCP 2 8 4 lt 2 CAL ZERO SCP 4 SCP
261. cessary for programming and is documented in each command in this chapter Table 5 1 C SCPI Data Types Data Types Description int16 Signed 16 bit integer number int32 Signed 32 bit integer number uint16 Unsigned 16 bit integer number uint32 Unsigned 32 bit integer number float32 32 bit floating point number float64 64 bit floating point number string String of characters null terminated SCPI Command Reference The following section describes the SCPI commands for the HP E1313 E1413 Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and also within each subsystem A command guide is printed in the top margin of each page The guide indicates the current subsystem on that page 158 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 ABORt ABORt The ABORt subsystem is a part of the HP E1313 E1413 s trigger system ABORt resets the trigger system from its wait for trigger state to its trigger idle state Subsystem Syntax Comments ABORt The instrument stops scanning immediately scan list not completed ABORT does not affect any other settings of the trigger system When the INITiate command is sent the trigger system will respond just as it did before the ABORt command was sent If INITiate CONTinuous is ON then after ABORt sets the instrument to the trigger idle state it immediately returns to the wait for trigger state If TRIGger SOURce is IMMediate then
262. channel number Example 0 5 6 through 32 and 45 1 0 5 6 32 45 The Relative form has special meaning when used in the ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt scan_list gt lt ch_list gt command See page 222 for specific information Note that for both forms a channel list is always contained within and The Command Reference always shows the and punctuation as lt ch_list gt Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 155 Arbitrary Block This parameter or data type is used to transfer a block of data in Program and the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a Response Data preamble which indicates either 1 The number of data bytes which follow definite length or 2 The following data block will be terminated upon receipt of a New Line message and for HP IB operation with the EOI signal true indefinite length The syntax for this parameter is Definite Length lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s Where the value of lt non zero digit gt is 1 9 and represents the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Example of sending or receiving 1024 data bytes 41024 lt byte gt lt byte1 gt lt byte2 gt lt byte3 gt lt byte4 gt lt byte1021 gt lt byte1022 gt lt byte1023 gt lt byte1024 gt OR Indefinite 0 lt data byte s gt lt NLAEND gt Length Examples of sending o
263. connectors 57 option A3E 56 57 option A3E accessories 57 tools 57 Current amplitude 213 low pass filter state 236 on board current source 294 open transducer detect OTD 188 195 output enabling disabling 215 scan list 109 220 221 source SCP 71 source SCP query range setting 214 source SCP query state 215 source SCP setting channels 213 Current Value Table CV T 90 109 accessing 90 229 230 clearing 202 203 commands 372 commands register based 372 loading with CV TINIT 372 querying 229 resetting 90 230 Custom reference temperature EU conversions 137 192 237 thermocouple EU conversions 136 238 239 Custom EU Conversion Tables 136 downloading linear 190 downloading piecewise 191 linear 136 linking 80 linking channels with 236 239 loading 79 136 piecewise 136 reference temperature 137 192 237 thermocouple 136 238 239 using ASSIGN 370 371 Cutoff Frequency 204 205 CVT See Current Value Table CVT CVTINIT 372 D Data ASCii 199 200 clearing FIFO 235 conversion controlling 108 destination controlling 108 format querying 201 format specifying 88 199 200 PACKed 64 199 200 REAL 32 199 200 REAL 64 199 200 retrieving 90 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 411 retrieving FIFO 101 107 230 232 234 retrieving FIFO methods 104 writing to SCP registers 189 DC Voltage 245 measurement accuracy 294 Debugging Commands AVERAGE 373 DSPEEK 374 D
264. contain a list of scan lists The scan lists specify the sequence that channels will be scanned Each scan list can contain up to 1 024 channel references so channels can be referenced multiple times The command to define channel sequence for each channel list is ROUTe SEQuence DEFine scan list Q ch list The scan list parameter can be one of LIST1 LIST2 LISTS LISTA ALL or LISTL When scan list specifies LISTL ch list must specify scan lists rather than channels This builds a list of scan lists to execute The lt list parameter must specify at least 2 channels 3 channels when an HP E1511 or HP E1512 SCP is installed except when the scan list will be specified by LISTL In this case the scan list must contain at least 6 channels The channels can be specified in any order and the same channel can be specified more than once A scan list can contain as many as 1 024 channel specifiers When ROUTe SEQuence DEFine is executed the scan list specified is cleared and then defined according to cA list This means that the entire channel specification for a scan list must be sent in ch list with a single ROUTe SEQuence DEFine command After a RST command or at power on channel list 1 LIST1 is predefined as ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LIST1 100 163 All other scan lists are undefined To define scan list 1 as channels 0 through 31 40 and 48 through 63 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 131 140 148 163 Ch
265. ction on all channels on SCPs 1 and 3 DIAG OTD ON 100 116 015 on SCP 1 and 16 is on SCP 3 To disable Open Transducer Detection on all channels on SCPs 1 and 3 DIAG OTD OFF 100 116 Thermocouple Reference Compensation The HP E1313 E1413 performs reference junction compensation automatically on all channels defined as thermocouple measurements by the SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature TC command There are two ways to do reference junction compensation in the HP E1313 E1413 1 You can define the Reference Junction temperature to be a fixed value using the SENSe REFerence TEMPerature command Use this method if the copper to thermocouple wire junction is at a connection panel with active temperature control These panels are sometimes called Uniform Temperature Reference UTR panels or sometimes Isothermal Reference Panels For example if the UTR is specified to operate at 85 Degrees centigrade the panel will contain heating elements which keep the panel at exactly 85 degrees If you use an 85 degree panel use the SENSe REFerence TEMPerature 85 0 command Then all future thermocouple measurements will be corrected for this value 2 You can measure the Reference Junction temperature during a scan using 5K ohm Thermistors RTDs resistance thermal devices or with another Custom absolute temperature measuring device The Custom device is predefined in the HP E1413 as a Type K thermocouple which has a thermally cont
266. curate measurements in electrically noisy environments use properly connected shielded wiring between the A D and the device under test Figure 2 8 shows recommended connections for powered transducers thermocouples and resistance transducers See Appendix F for more information on wiring techniques Hints 1 Use individually shielded twisted pair wiring for each channel 2 Connect the shield of each wiring pair to the corresponding Guard G terminal on the terminal module see Figure 2 9 for schematic of Guard to Ground circuitry on the terminal module 3 The terminal module is shipped with the Ground Guard GND GRD shorting jumper installed for each channel These may be left installed or removed see Figure 2 10 to remove the jumper dependent on the following conditions a Grounded Transducer with shield connected to ground at the transducer Low frequency ground loops DC and or 50 60 Hz can result if the shield is also grounded at the terminal module end To prevent this remove the GND GRD jumper for that channel Figure 2 8 A C b Floating Transducer with shield connected to the transducer at the source In this case the best performance will most likely be achieved by leaving the GND GRD jumper in place Figure 2 8 B D 4 In general the GND GRD jumper can be left in place unless it is necessary to remove to break low frequency below 1 kHz ground loops 5 Use good quality foil or braided shield signal cable
267. d Response Registers Query Response Register Base 0816 Read only When the module is sent a query command the reply is sent to the Query Response Register See Register Based Command Reference starting on page 356 Address 15 0 Base 0816 Query Response Some query commands may return multiple query responses Appendix D Register Based Programming 341 Command and Parameter Registers Base 0816 0E16 Note Write only Commands and their parameters are written to the Command and Parameter Registers See Register Based Command Reference starting on page 356 Command Register Address 15 0 Base 0816 Command Op code Parameter Register 1 Address 15 0 Base 0A16 Parameter 1 Op code Parameter Register 2 Address 15 0 Base 0 16 Parameter 2 code Parameter Register 3 Address 15 0 Base OE16 Parameter 3 Op code The parameters associated with a command must always be written before the actual command op code No command requires more than three parameter words Upon a write to the Command Register the Cmd Parm Ready bit is de asserted set LOW It is subsequently asserted after the control processor has removed the command word and associated parameters from the Parameter Register buffers and is ready to receive another command Scan and
268. de Address 15 12 11 0 Base 0216 Required Memory Code Model Code Required Memory The HP E1313 E1413 supports A24 address space The size of the A24 space is specified as A24 address space 203 Required Memory Code Given that each module s A24 space is 256 Kbytes the Required Memory field is 516 Model Code The model code for the HP E1413 is 1C416 Base 0446 Read only The Status Register indicates when commands and output data can be sent when query response and input data is available and the error status of the module Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 98 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 Base 0416 A24 Active MODID not used Channel not DONE NOERR not Ready Passed Count used used Ready Ready E1313 24 Active A one 1 in this field indicates that the card s A24 address space can be accessed This bit reflects the state of the Control Register s A24 Enable bit MODID A one 1 in this field indicates that the card is not selected via the P2 MODID line A zero 0 indicates that the device is selected by a high state on the P2 MODID line Channel Count HP E1313 only 002 32 channels 102 64 channels Values 012 and 112 indicate invalid configurations Read the Model Code in the Device Type Register first to differentiate between HP E1313 E1413 All HP E1413s
269. definite Length depending on the data query command executed These data return formats are explained in Arbitrary Block Program and Response Data on page 156 of this chapter For REAL 32 readings 4 bytes in length C SCPI type returned is float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are 8 bytes in length C SCPI type returned is float64 array ASCii is the default format ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 234567E 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Each reading is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOD follow the last reading C SCPI type returned is string array Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 199 FORMat Note TST leaves the instrument in its power on reset state This means that the ASC 7 data format is set even if you had it set to something else before executing TST If you need to read the FIFO for test information set the format after TST and before reading the FIFO Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO 2 commands SENSe DATA CVTable MEMory commands and FETCh RST Condition ASCII 7 After RST Power on each channel location in the CVT contains the IEEE 754 value Not a number NaN Channel readings which are a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF and a negative overvoltage return IEEE The NaN INF and INF values for each format are shown in the following table
270. dings from the FIFO are read from these registers The FIFO MSW Register returns the most significant word of the reading and the FIFO LSW Register returns the least significant word MSW Registers and LSW Registers combine to become a 32 bit Motorola format floating point value FIFO MSW Register Address 15 0 Base 2016 Most Significant Word FIFO LSW Register Address 15 0 Base 2216 Least Significant Word Before reading these registers the FIFO Data Ready bit in the FIFO Status Register must be asserted If these registers are read while the FIFO Data Ready bit is de asserted a bus error will occur Appendix D Register Based Programming 351 FIFO Status Register Base 2416 Read only The FIFO Status Register indicates when the FIFO is not empty and when a block of 32 768 readings is in the FIFO Address 15 11 10 9 8 7 6 2 1 0 Base 2446 allOs Count Width Data Width Block Size Block Ready FIFO Ready 16 bits 102 32 bits 112 32 768 011112 Count Width These bits indicate the width of the FIFO Reading Count Register The count width is 16 bits Bit10 Bit9 Meaning 0 0 No Count Register 0 1 8 bits 1 1 32 bits Data Width These bits indicate the data width of the FIFO registers The data width is 32 bits Bit 8 Bit 7 Meaning 0 0 Reserved 0 1
271. dled by an HP repair facility Make sure you record the values found in the FIFO for HP Service Refer to the Command Reference under TST for a list of module functions tested 1 HP E1413 E1313 C SCPI driver for MS DOS implements two 3053 3056 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 versions of TST The default version is an abbreviated self test that executes only the Digital Tests By loading an additional object file you can execute the full self test See the documentation that comes with the HP E1413 C SCPI driver for MS DOS During the first 5 minutes after power is applied TST may fail Allow the module to warm up before executing TST Corrupt on board Flash memory Custom EU not loaded May have erased custom EU conversion table with RST May have linked channel with standard EU after loading custom EU this erases the custom EU for this channel Reload custom EU table using DIAG CUST LIN or DIAG CUST PIEC Hardware does not D32 S H or new trigger capabilities Module s serial number is earlier than 3313A00530 DSP firmware does not LISTL LIMIT or AVERAGE capability Firmware stored in Flash Memory must be updated to version A 03 00 or later Lower limit exceeds upper limit on one or more channels CALC LIM LOW DATA set higher than channel s CAL LIM UPP DATA Cannot change scan list while running with AVERAGE on LISTL not allowed
272. e command all channel calibration The module can also compensate for system wiring offsets The HP E1313 E1413 can accept any mix of up to eight Signal Conditioning Plug ons SCPs All of these features can be accessed with the SCPI and Compiled SCPI instrument languages The following sections describe step by step how to program the module Chapter 3 Using the E1313 E1413 65 Default Settings After Power on RST or TST Before discussing the ten programming steps and their recommended sequence it is important to understand that for a given programming situation you may not have to send commands to set conditions that are default states The default instrument states are SCP Set up A D Filter Engineering Units EU linked to channels Scan list assignment and selection Trigger system Data Format FIFO mode All SCP settings defaulted see SCP manuals OFF DC Volts autorange linked to channels 0 through 63 Scan list 1 is selected and has channels 0 through 63 assigned Trigger system is in Trigger Idle State not INITiated Arm source set to IMMediate Trigger source set to HOLD Trigger count set to 1 Sample Timer set to 10 ms ASCII BLOCK Default Operation executing only three commands after RST the HP E1313 E1413 will execute a single scan of all 64 channels and return 64 voltage values from the FIFO Example Command Sequence RST INIT IMM TRIG IMM SENS DATA F
273. e lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt links the EU conversion type for resistance and range with the channels specified by ch list Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units excite current discrete string 30E 6 488E 6 MIN MAX Amps range numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments below ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The range parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates Error 222 Data out of range Specifying O selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange range may be specified in millivollts mv e If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal v
274. e returned is uint16 e Related Commands STATus OPERation PTRansition RST Condition No change STAT OPER PTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the PTF Register STATus PRESet sets the Operation Status Enable and Questionable Data Enable Registers to 0 After executing this command none of the events in the Operation Event or Questionable Event Registers will be reported as a summary bit in either the Status Byte Group or Standard Event Status Group STATus PRESet does not clear either of the Event Registers Related Commands STB SPOLL STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle RST Condition No change STAT PRESET Clear both of the Enable Registers 258 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 STATus Questionable The Questionable Data Group indicates when errors are causing lost or questionable data See Table 5 4 for the bit assignments Data Group Table 5 4 Questionable Data Group Bit Dec Value Hex Value Bit Name Description 8 256 010016 Calibration Lost At RST or Power on Control Processor has found a checksum error in the Calibration Constants Read error s with SYSTem ERRor and re calibrate area s that lost constants 9 512 020016 Trigger Too Fast Scan not complete when another trigger event received 10 1024 040016 FIFO Overflowed Attempt to store
275. e returns the current setting for the TTLTRG line source OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe Comments Returned Value Discrete one of LIMit The C SCPI type returned is string Gger FTRigger SCPlugon or e Related Commands OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce Usage OUTP TTLT SOUR Enter statement will return on of FTR LIM SCP or TRIG OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt ttlirg_cntrl gt specifies which VXIbus TTLTRG line is enabled to source a trigger signal when the module is triggered TTLTrg lt n gt can specify line 0 through 7 For example OUTPut TTLTRG4 or OUTPut TTLT4 for VXIbus TTLTRG line 4 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt n gt numeric 1 through 7 none lt ttltrg_cntrl gt discrete string ON OFF none Comments Only one VXIbus TTLTRG line can be enabled simultaneously e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands INITiate commands TRlGger commands e RST Condition OUTPut TIL Trg O through 7 gt OFF Usage OUTPutTTLTrg2 STATe ON OUTP TTLT7Z STAT Enable TTLTRG2 line to source a trigger Enable TTLTRG7 line to source a trigger OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe returns the current state for TTL TRG line lt n gt Comments Returned Value Returns 1 or 0 The C SCPI type returned is int16 e Related
276. e terminal module connector Returns error codes or 0 for OK Internal Operation IDN Identification Returns the response HEWLETT PACKARD E1413C lt serial gt driver rev gt RST Reset Resets all scan lists to zero length and stops scan triggering Status registers and output queue are unchanged TST Self Test Performs self test Returns 0 to indicate test passed Status Reporting CLS Clear Status Clears all status event registers and so their status summary bits except the MAV bit ESE lt mask gt Event Status Enable Set Standard Event Status Enable register bits mask ESE Event Status Enable query Return current setting of Standard Event Status Enable Register ESR Event Status Register query Return Standard Event Status Register contents SRE lt mask gt Service Request Enable Set Service Request Enable register bit mask SRE Service Request Enable query Return current setting of the Service Request Enable register STB Read Status Byte query Return current Status Byte value Assigns one or a sequence of commands to a macro Enable Disable defined macro commands Returns 1 for macros enabled 0 for disabled Returns command sequence for named macro Returns comma separated list of defined macro names Purges all macro commands Removes named macro command Standard Event register s Operation Complete bit will be 1 when all pending device operations have been finished Places an ASCII 1 in the output queu
277. e uud bm dcm Di Seded a wg het gi ote gp Page 276 YEMEK 2 ds edet eee ved sep Page 276 FESES necne m RAE fees siue de soc sca te us MS duct Sak d sd d ehe Page 277 oe Arrest RIEN x corel tens th m den cos eee ee sse ned dert Page 277 ESR Shae SEE ied repe ame a toe tu e BEER QC RS RYE bed dw Page 277 names ds as ce p ee rA vatis uv SC aue dp S Page 277 IDN be a Bay i dise tui EIFE eii Page 277 SEMO x Eo ot Bad o uem qu PE a We ei ae dies Bub ae s o eee nd Page 278 E aranea RESET Goth Gate de SERERE Rp etim URDU SR RES TES Page 278 OPC CI Boe aa See BAe a Bee ee BA ee Page 278 PMC 52 64 Mr m re Wray eg rfe Cep TA mene BAS Ae Ee AG teen Bt eed Page 279 SHAME EUR ES SEE eo Mum Vnd edie PEE wd ahead Bone mE d Page 279 ERST 23245 h aa g a e aie De qu Hh fett eret tus Page 279 ANNE ak dive Gea ab Gk ae Aad Page 280 eee rate as dts Segue pes rbd ee a Sa A uet a ay ee EO ae Page 280 eed ik oe ig Set Seis deus ea deep due une Qm um lie m Be ea Page 280 SERCE dee dete nate tote RII em Ile
278. e Address Module Base Address 1FC00016 logical address16 4016 or 2 080 76810 logical address10 6410 Register Address Base Address Register Offset Appendix D Register Based Programming 337 Required VXI Registers ID Register The required VXI registers include ID Device Type VXI Status and VXI Control Registers Base 0016 Read only returns 4FFF 16 The module s ID Register indicates the classification addressing mode and the manufacturer of the device Address 15 14 13 12 11 0 Base 0016 Device Class Address Mode Manufacturer ID Device Classification Bits 15 and 14 classify a device as one of the following Memory device Extended device Message based device 0 0 1 1 1 Register based device 0 1 0 1 The HP E1313 E1413 is an extended device Addressing Mode Bits 13 and 12 indicate the addressing mode used by the device A16 A24 address mode A16 A32 address mode RESERVED 0 0 1 1 1 A16 address mode 0 1 0 1 The HP E1313 E1413 uses the A16 A24 address mode Manufacturer ID Bits 11 through 0 identify the manufacturer of the device Hewlett Packard s ID number is 4095 which corresponds to bits 11 0 being set to 1 338 Register Based Programming Appendix D Device Type Register VXI Status Register Base 0216 Read only returns 51C 416 The Device Type Register contains the required memory and model co
279. e CALibration STORe ADC command to store these constants in non volatile memory That way the module can restore calibration constants for this configuration in case of a power failure After power returns and after the module warms up these constants will be relatively accurate When to Re Execute When you change the channel gain and or filter cut off frequency on CAL programmable SCPs using INPut GAIN or INPut FILTer commands When you reconfigure SCPs to different locations This is true even if you replace an SCP with an identical model SCP because the calibration constants are specific to each SCP channel s individual performance When the ambient temperature within the mainframe changes significantly Temperature changes affect accuracy much more than long term component drift Note To save time when performing channel calibration on multiple HP E1313 E1413s in the same mainframe use the CAL SETup and CAL SETup commands see these commands in Chapter 5 for details 82 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Step 4 Defining and Selecting the Scan Lists Defining the Scan Lists In this programming step you will create the actual list s of channels to be scanned With the HP E1313 E1413 you can define up to 4 different scan lists each with its own channel to channel sample pacing see Step 5 Setting the Sample Timer You can also define a List of Lists automatic scan list sequencing by defining LISTL to
280. e FIFO and places the readings into VME A24 memory The VME memory may be shared A24 memory 12 Mbyte or it may be the command module s own memory 2 Mbyte that has been configured as NRAM Each reading stored consumes four bytes When the command modules memory is to be used the procedure becomes configure the command module to have Nram then use an instrument panel to configure the HP E1413 and finally use Direct I O to start the measurements and to transfer the results into the computer This process is demonstrated by the program 1413MANA VEE Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 395 HP VEE 0 Data Math AdvMath Display Help File Edit Flow Device First setup two instruments The first is a direct I O to the command module From the I O menu U Patino E1406 E1413B hpe1413 16024 E1413 hpib hpe1413 30903 HP VEE 0 Data Math AdvMath Display Help File Edit Flow Device Instrument Select or Configure Instrument Type lt Instrument Panel lt Component Driver Direct 0 Instrument Configure Add Instrument Delete Instrument Edit Instrument Get Instr Save Config Cancel Help Untitled Device Configuration Name Interface gt Address eg 714 30900 Device Type Timeout sec a Byte Ordering MSB Live Mode ON Direct Config Instrument Driver Config
281. e any data Trigger Timer Register Base 2C16 Read Write A write to this register sets the time interval between timer triggers The resolution is 1 0E 4 seconds The minimum interval is 1 0E 4 seconds The trigger interval in seconds 1 0E 4 reg_value 1 0E 4 Address Base 4 2C16 15 0 trigger interval 0 65535 Appendix D Register Based Programming 353 Trigger Mode Register Base 2E16 Read Write The Trigger Mode Register is used configure the trigger system Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 3 0 Base 2 16 Trigger undefined Output Trigger Trig Timer Select Trigger Trig Out Trig Mode Trig Arm Enable write 0 Source Mode Timer Source Trigger Enable Set to one 1 to enable triggers Always set to zero before changing other bits in this register then set back to one Output Trigger Source Selects the source driving the TTL TRGn line when the Trig Mode is Output Bit 12 Bit 11 Output Trigger Source 0 0 Trigger In Signal 0 1 First Trigger see FTRigger on page 217 1 0 Limit Test Exceeded 1 1 SCP Trigger Trig Timer Mode A one 1 causes the trigger timer to run continuously after the first arm event synchronous mode When this bit is zero 0 the trigger timer will run only while the HP E1413 is initiated asynchronous mode For more information
282. e arming event 118 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Example Command Sequence Card 1 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt LIST n tc tc can be 105 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM PER fp lt tp gt can be Ims 6 5536 s TRIG TIM MODE SYNC Keep timer running during INIT CONT ON TRIG COUN 2 ARM SOUR source source can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTr 0 TTLTrg7 OUTP TTLT lt n gt SOUR FTR Ist trig will source TTLTrg OUTP TTLT lt n gt STAT ON Enable to drive selected TTLTrg line n be 1 through 7 ON Card 2 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt SAMP TIM LIST n gt lt te gt tc can be 10 5 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR TTLTrg lt n gt Selects TTLTrg trigger source TRIG COUN lt count gt count can be 1 32768 or INF INIT IMM Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping Before Trigger Count is Reached OFF To master card TRIG SOUR HOLD Stops at end of scan list still initiated TRIG IMM One more scan now idle or ABOR Stops immediately must use ABOR if TRIG COUNt is INF Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 119 Using Automatic Scan List Sequencing List of Lists It is not unusual in data acquisition that you will want to scan groups of chann
283. e corresponding bits from the Event Register to set the Questionable Summary bit Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable_mask gt numeric uint16 0 32767 none Comments enable mask may be sent as decimal hex octal Q or binary B VXI Interrupts When bits 9 10 or 11 are enabled and C SCPI overlap mode is on or if you are using non compiled SCPI VXI card interrupts will be enabled When the event corresponding to bit 9 10 or 11 occurs the card will generate a VXI interrupt e Related Commands STB SPOLL STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable EVENt Cleared By STATus PRESet and power on RST Condition No change Usage STAT QUES ENABLE 128 Set bit 7 in the Questionable Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle returns the value of bits set in the Questionable Enable Register Comments Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type returned is uint16 e Related Commands STB SPOLL STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable EVENt e RST Condition No change Usage STAT QUES ENABLE Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the Questionable Enable register 260 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 STATus STATus QUEStionable EVENt Comments
284. e cycles unlimited read cycles While executing CALibration STORe once every day would not exceed the lifetime of the Flash Memory for approximately 27 years an application that stored constants many times each day would unnecessarily shorten the Flash Memory s lifetime Executing CALibration TARE sets the Calibrating bit bit 0 in Operation Status Group Executing CALibration TARE resets the bit This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands CALibration TARE CALibration STORe TARE DIAGnostic CALibration TARE O TDetect MODE RST Condition Channel offsets are not affected by RST 182 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALibration Command Seq uence CAL TARE lt ch_list gt Correct channel offsets CAL TARE Return the success flag from the CAL TARE operation CAL STOR TARE Optional depending on necessity of long term Storage CALibration TARE CALibration TARE returns a value to indicate the success of the last CALibration TARE operation CALibration TARE returns the value only after the CALibration TARE operation is complete Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYSTem ERRor See Error Messages in Appendix B Also run TST 2 No results available Perform CALibration TARE before CALibration TARE The C SCPI type for this returned value
285. e of Default Name Type Values Units lt amplitude gt numeric float32 MIN 30E 6 MAX 488E 6 ADC ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments Select 488E 6 or MAX for measuring resistances of less than 8000 Ohms Select 30E 6 or MIN for resistances of 8000 Ohms and above amplitude may be specified in WA ua Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 213 OUTPut Usage For resistance temperature measurements SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature the Current Source SCP must be set as follows Required Current Amplitude Temperature Sensor Types and Subtypes MAX 488A RTD 85 92 and THER 2250 MIN 301A THER 5000 10000 When CAL is executed the current sources are calibrated on the range selected at that time This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands CAL OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude RST Condition MIN OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude 488ua 116 123 Set Current Source SCP at channels 16 through 23 to 488 OUTP CURR AMPL 30E 6 105 Set Current Source SCP at channel 5 to 30 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt channel gt returns the range setting of the Current Source SCP channel specified by lt channel gt Parameters Comments Usage OUTP CURR AMPL 163 Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt channel gt channel list strin
286. e the need to increase settling delays How Each gain factor of 4 provided by the SCP amplifier allows the Range Amplifier to be set one range higher and still provide the same measurement resolution Amplifier SCPs for the HP E1413 are available with gains of 2 8 16 and 64 Lets return to our earlier example of a difficult measurement where one channel is measuring 15 5 volts on the 16 volt range and the next a thermocouple on the 0625 range If our thermocouple channel is amplified through an SCP with a gain of only 16 the Range Amplifier can be setto the 1 volt range On this range the A D resolution drops to around 31 uvolt per LSB so the stray capacitances discharging after the 15 5 volt measurement are now only one sixteenth as significant and thus reduce any required settling delay Of course for most thermocouple measurements Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 145 Note Adding Settling Delay for Specific Channels we can use a gain of 64 and set the Range Amplifier to the 4 volt range At this setting the A D resolution for one LSB drops to about 122 volts and further reduces or removes any need for additional settling delay This improvement is accomplished without any reduction of the overall measurement resolution Filter amplifier SCPs can provide improvements in low level signal measurements that go beyond just settling delay reduction Amplifying the input signal at the SCP allows using less gain at the Range A
287. e when all pending operations have finished Triggers module when TRIGger SOURce is HOLD Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 289 Command Quick Reference Notes 290 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Signal Conditioning Plug on Manuals Place your SCP manuals in this section Chapter 6 Signal Conditioning Plug on Manuals 291 Notes 292 Signal Conditioning Plug on Manuals Chapter 6 Appendix A Specifications Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 These specifications reflect the performance of the HP E1413 with the HP E1413 Option 11 Straight Through Signal Conditioning Plug on The performance of the HP E1413 with other SCPs is found in the Specifications section of that SCP s manual Power Requirements 5V 12V 12V 24V 24V 5 2 Module Current IDm IDm IDmzDynamic Module Current 0 20 0 0 06 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 5 0 1 0 5 0 1 0 4 0 1 Power Available for SCPs HP E1313A 55A 24V 3 5A 5V See the VXI Catalog or SCP User s Manual for SCP current HP E1413C 1A 24V 3 5A 5V Cooling Requirements Average Watts Slot APressure mmH2O Air Flow liters s 34 0 08 0 08 Measurement ranges DC Volts Opt 11 or 12 62 5mV to 16V Full Scale Temperature Thermocouples 200 to 1700 C Thermistors
288. ecial Considerations CL we eS be 140 Detecting Open Transducers s ac ere 6450446 mod Reo RO 141 Thermocouple Reference Compensation 142 Mop On ANS doe ERROR Ew 144 Reducing Setting Wills doe 144 ea de dele de dede ood 144 Checking EROR ROO ORL GSA E ROE S Rok E d 145 Pistang he Problem Rd Wwe me sme 145 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 149 APOR Suo c cade WR ESS Wu BREAD PERSE SESE SERED ESOS 159 ARDE ae oh hee ee d e ee he Oe Oe _ 160 ARM IMMediate 4 46 4 4 0b be bd 161 ARM SOURS 161 ARM SOURD owe eb oS EP OOS RE RW SE OEE Edd 162 OBI ag m oh Wa oe dea di e e dedo A TOR Be 163 CALCulate AVERage COUNt RR ER 164 CALCUulate AVEBage CODING iio TRA Oe x RR RE ee ees 164 CALCulsters DENTS uuu cago e ode eee Re 165 CALCubteAVERage STATS 2 ica oe t oo om oh Rx RO EO 165 CALCulate CLIMits FAIL CUMulative 166 CALColate CLIMI FAILCURREM a 5498565 166 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CUMulative 167 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CURRent 167 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CUMulative 168 CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits POINts CURRent
289. ecimal hex octal Q or binary B mem size should be a multiple of four 4 to accommodate 32 bit readings Related Commands MEMory commands FORMat commands and FETCh RST Condition MEMory VME SIZE 0 Usage MEM VME SIZE 32768 MEMory VME SIZE Allocate 32 Kbytes of VM E memory to reading storage 8192 readings MEMory VME SIZE returns the amount in bytes of VME memory allocated to reading storage Comments This command is only available in systems using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module e Returned Value Numeric value Related Commands MEMory commands and FETCh Usage MEM VME SIZE Returns the number of bytes allocated to reading storage Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 211 MEMory MEMory VME STATe Parameters Comments Usage MEMory VME STATe enable enables or disables use of the VME memory card as additional reading storage Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean 1 0 OFF This command is only available in systems using HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module e When the VME memory card is enabled the INITiate IMMediate command does not terminate until data acquisition stops or VME memory is full Related Commands MEMory commands and FETCh RST Condition MEMory VME STATe OFF MEM VME STAT ON Enable VME card as readin
290. ectively This section shows how to make reference temperature measurements on the HP E1586 thermistors using the HP E1313 E1413 module The methods to measure the thermistor reference temperature depends on the location of the Terminal Panel For Terminal Panels mounted away from heat sources it is only necessary to measure the center thermistor Use the information in Measuring Using the Center Thermistor For Terminal Panels mounted in such a way that temperature gradients are generated along its length measure all three thermistors Use the information in Measuring Using the Left Center and Right Thermistors Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 93 Connecting One Terminal Inthis configuration a single Terminal Panel is used with an HP E1413 to Panel for Reference provide up to 32 channels for temperature measurements Make the following Temperature connections on the thermistor terminal block of the Terminal Panel Connect HI I to HI TI Connect LO I to LO TI This provides the excitation current to all three on board thermistors on the Terminal Panel Figure 3 6 shows the connection for a single Terminal Panel Connects All Thermistors 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 59 ooooo0o0 2 92298
291. ed Returns all channel s limit test status for last completed scan list Returns count of channels exceeding limit tests since module INITiated Returns count of channels exceeding limit tests for last completed scan Enables disables all limit testing Returns state of limit testing Returns limit test status for channel since module was INITiated Returns limit test status for channel for last completed scan list Enables disables lower limit testing Returns state of lower limit testing Sets lower limit for specified channels Returns lower limit setting for specified channel Enables disables upper limit testing Returns state of upper limit testing Sets upper limit for specified channels Returns upper limit setting for specified channel Prepare to measure on board references with an external multimeter Configure to measure reference resistor Configure to measure reference voltage range at zero or full scale Performs Channel Calibration procedure Returns state of CALibration SETup operation returns error codes or 0 for OK Store cal constants to Flash RAM for either A D calibration or those generated by the CALibration TARE command 284 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Command Quick Reference SCPI Command Quick Reference Command Description TARE Q ch list RESet 7 WALue RESistance ref ohms WOLTage ref volts ZE
292. ed by selecting Instrument Highlight the HP E1313 E1413 in your system Edit instrument A24 A32 Space Config Then set the following fields Byte Access D16 NONE Word Access D16 D16 Access always selected Long Word Access 032 D32 Access Name Offset Format Mode CVT 0 Real 32 READ HPF YEE Edit Fe Device po Math Display Help 3 DIABLE A SHEE 413 42015 Tes Eig Byte rers iD NONE J istaman Paral inate word Acces 016 5 Companen Drier aeng ta Longin Access 0 Crs X peru x Rs meras s j e Lum Mame Foa Balata Canig _ cmn Brace Hah The HP E1313 E1413 current value table is located in A24 address space Each channel is a 32 bit real number with Channel 0 at offset 0 channel 1 is at offset 4 and so on If your hardware supports it access to both the FIFO and the CVT should use D32 Access as it is twice as fast as D16 access If using a VXLINK HP E1383A or HP E1483A as the interface or if using an HP E1413A then only D16 access is supported To use only D16 Access set
293. ed into a crimp and insert connector The crimp tool kit is required to crimp the contacts onto a conductor and remove the contact from the connector Order HP 91515A Wire Gauge Range 20 24 AWG Quantity 250 each Te Plating Gold Plated Contact Maximum Current 2A at 70 C The hand crimp tool part number HP 91518A is used for crimping contacts onto a conductor The pin extractor tool part number HP 91519A is required for removing contacts from the crimp and insert connector These products are not included with Option A3E or with the terminal option accessories listed earlier The crimp and insert connector is normally supplied with Option A3E Contact Hewlett Packard Company if additional connectors are needed Order HP 91484B Chapter 2 Field Wiring 57 Option A3F Channels 00 15 Channels 16 31 gt Channels 32 47 Channels 48 63 Option A3F shown in Figure 2 22 allows an HP E1413 E1313 to be connected to an HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel The A3F option for the HP E1413 provides 4 SCSI plugs on a Terminal Module and the option for the HP E1313 provides 2 SCSI plugs on a Terminal Module For HP E1313s with 64 channels use an additional Option A3F Terminal Module E1413 E1313 Option Option N ef Channels 00 15 5 OR Channels 32 47 gt fe 7
294. eeded 146 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 B Ch 00 as Ch 01 TT Eis ie 3 5V Ch 03 85 executing ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LIST1 7 1 101 103 104 102 100 Scan Sequence becomes Ch 01 at 10 mV measurement discarded Ch 01 at 10 mV Ch 03 at 2 V Ch 04 at 85 Ch 02 at 3 5 Ch 00 at 12 Figure 4 10 Recommended Scanning Sequence V V V Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 147 Notes 148 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Using This Chapter Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI command set and the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands for the HP E1313 E1413 e Overall Command Index Page 149 Command Fundamentals Page 153 e SCPI Command Reference Page 158 e Common Command Reference Page 275 e Command Quick Page 284 Overall Command Index SCPI Commands us uec mE ED deb sette utes Raton dh ts voto me Page 159 ARM IMMedi le og d rq tuf cue Page 161 lt source gt uoce eS ase re A EA RU ry og Qe S Page 161 ARNESOURCe Rua
295. egister 1 16 350 Subclass Register Base iusso RR we OES EA ee ee UR S 35 FIFO MSW and LSW Registers 2016 2216 351 FIFO Status Register 2416 352 FIFO Reading Count Register 2 6 353 Software Trigger ARM Register 266 353 Trigger Timer Register Base 2 16 353 Trigger Mode Register Base 2616 354 System uuu sdb ob xm wx HORE QR EORR Ro OX RR ____ 358 Calibration COMMAS ceo be cde 363 erac brin TTE amp 367 Cy Comune 45 48 3c ne pue Ee ded sw E T gser System Commands iu ss o Roe or oem RR Row 273 Debusside Commands iu EG dU GE ERY RR ERE RR 243 Register Based Programming Fundamentals 375 Programming Seguente LT 382 Reset Module to Default State 2 4 ooo o ow RHE NE 382 Programming Module After Reset Sequence 383 Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP 1 1413 385 Generi cu usen ke SHEE OR E EGS 385 How to Use HP VEE with the HPEI3I3EI413 385 Using HP VEE with Direct VXI Backplane Access 391 Using HP VEE for 100 Sample Speed 393 Using HP VEE with a Comm
296. el Numbers Note Each channel line represents both a Hi and Lo input A D System Le Figure 2 1 Channel Numbers at SCP Positions Input Multiplexer SCP SCP SCP SCP SCP 4 SCP 5 SCP SCP Ch 00 Ch 07 Ch 08 Ch 15 Ch 16 Ch 23 Ch 24 Ch 31 Ch 32 Ch 39 Ch 40 Ch 47 Ch 48 Ch 55 Ch 56 Ch 63 Terminal Module be installed in each of your HP Scanning A D Converter modules The following discussions will help you understand these factors The HP E1313 E1413 has a fixed relationship between Signal Conditioning Plug on positions and the channels they connect to Each of the eight SCP positions connect to eight channels Figure 2 1 shows the channel number to SCP relationship 34 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Sense SCPs and Some SCPs provide input signal conditioning sense SCPs such as filters Output SCPs andamplifiers while others provide stimulus to your measurement circuit output SCPs such as current sources and strain bridge completion In general channels at output SCP positions are not
297. elative channel specification form can be used to control the conversion and storage destination of data measured during a scan The SCPI relative channel specification syntax is cc nn nn nn nn where cc card number and nn channel number For the HP E1313 E1413 card number becomes the channel data modifier The value can range from 1 through 7 The value controls whether Engineering Unit EU conversion is performed and the internal destination of the resulting value Table 4 1 explains the effect of the channel data modifier Table 4 1 Channel Data Modifiers Channel Data Modifier Description 1 Perform EU conversion and store result in both FIFO buffer and Current Value Table CVT 2 Leave measurement as voltage and store result in both FIFO and CVT 3 Perform EU conversion and store result in CVT only 4 Leave measurement as voltage and store in CVT only 5 Perform EU conversion and store result in FIFO only 6 Leave measurement as voltage and store in FIFO only 7 Leave measurement as voltage and do not store result in either FIFO or CVT Use as dummy channel set Limit checking is not performed for channels that are not converted to engineering units Both the standard and relative channel specification modes can be mixed within a scan list definition For example ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 115 6 00 15 This command specifies that the readings taken on ch
298. els for wire exit S Replace Clear cover A Hook in the top cover tabs onto the fixture 2 jJ B Press down and tighten screws gib Figure 2 16 continued Wiring the HP E1413 Terminal Module Chapter 2 Field Wiring 51 Attaching the HP E1413 Terminal Module Figure 2 17 shows how to attach the HP E1413 terminal module 1 Extend the extraction levers on the Terminal Module Install Mylar Thermal Barrier on Terminal Module connectors Use a small screwdriver woestractonievers ii ISYA A D Module connectors to the HP E1413 6 Align the Terminal Module module connectors Extraction Lever 7 3 Apply gentle pressure to attach the Terminal Module to the HP E1413 A D Module ue M Extraction Levers D Push in the extraction levers to lock the Terminal Module onto the HP E1413 A D Module Figure 2 17 Attaching the HP E1413 Terminal Module 52 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Removing the HP E1413 Terminal Module Figure 2 18 shows how to remove the HP E1413 terminal module Release the two extraction levers and push both levers out simultaneously Extraction Lever Use a small screwdriver to pry and release the two extraction levers S 2 Free and remove the Terminal
299. els at different rates Some of your system s channels may measure fast changing signals that need to monitored at high rates while other channels measure slowly changing signals that can be scanned less often The HP E1313 E1413 provides an easy way to scan groups of channels at up to four different rates The module not only has four scan lists LIST1 through LIST4 in which you define lists of channels it also has LISTL which you define as a list of scan lists therefore the term List of Lists When LISTL is selected as the current scan list a trigger will cause the module to execute each scan list defined in LISTL in the order it was defined The overall procedure is 1 Define each scan list to be executed using the command ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LISTn ch list 2 Define LISTL with the sequence of scan lists to execute using the command ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LISTL Q ch list 3 Set LISTL as the current scan list using the command ROUTe SCAN LISTL 4 Setup the trigger system for continuous mode or counted mode see previous section 5 Trigger the module to start scanning A Simple Example What controls the relative rates that the channel groups are scanned is the frequency that individual channels appear in each scan list and the frequency that these scan lists appear in LISTL As a very simple example let s say you want to scan channels 0 through 3 four times as often as channels 4 through 7 Since there are two
300. ements for the specified Scan List or ALL four Scan Lists When SAMPle TIMer LISTL is specified interval sets the time between channels for all scan lists defined in LISTL overriding any timer settings for individual Scan Lists Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units scan list discrete string LIST1 LIST2 LIST3 LISTA LISTL ALL none interval numeric float 32 1 0E 5 5 to 32 768E 3 MIN MAX seconds string Comments The minimum interval is 10 u seconds The resolution for interval is 5 Us interval may be specified in milliseconds ms or microseconds us Note If the A D filter is on SENSe FILTer L PASs STATe ON then the minimum interval is 145 usec e Ifthe Sample Timer interval multiplied by the number of channels in the specified Scan List is longer than the Trigger Timer interval at run time Error 3012 Trigger too fast will be generated e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e Related Commands SAMPle TIMer RST Condition Sample Timer for all Channel Lists set to 1 0E 5 seconds Usage SAMP TIM LIST3 1E 3 Pace measurements at 1 millisecond intervals for channels in Scan List 3 226 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SAMPle SAMPle TIMer SAMPle TIMer scan list returns the sample timer interval for the specified Channel List or List of Lists LI
301. emoved by introducing a short anywhere between its junction and its connection to an isothermal panel either the HP E1313 E1413 s terminal module or a remote isothermal reference block Thermal voltage is generated along the entire length of a thermocouple pair where there is any temperature gradient along that length CALibration TARE thermocouple wire this way would introduce an unwanted offset in the voltage temperature relationship for that thermocouple If you inadvertently CALibration TARE a thermocouple wire pair see Resetting CALibration TARE on page 139 You should use CALibration TARE to compensate wiring offsets copper wire not thermocouple wire between the HP E1313 E1413 and a remote thermocouple reference block Disconnect the thermocouples and introduce copper shorting wires between each channel s HI and LO then execute CALibration TARE for these channels To remove offsets like those in an unstrained strain gage bridge execute the CALibration TARE command on those channels The module will then measure the offsets and as in the wiring case above remove these offsets from future measurements In the strain gage case this balances the bridge so all measurements have the initial unstrained offset removed to allow the most accurate high speed measurements possible After CALibration TARE lt ch_list gt measures and stores the offset voltages it then performs the equivalent of a CAL operation This op
302. ence This guide is only a sequence of register offsets and values to write to them Itis assumed that you have already studied the details of accessing registers and executing register based commands in this chapter You must follow register sequence exactly as shown Notes 1 See VXIbus Specification sections C 2 1 1 2 and C 4 1 3 for address map configuration Example shown programs HP E1413 s A24 map to begin at address 20000016 2 After every Command written to Command Register 08 the controller must wait for DONE bit 7 and READY bit 3 to be asserted in VXI Status register 04 before writing the next command 3 After every Query written to Register 08 the controller must wait for DONE bit 7 and Query Response Ready bit 1 to be asserted in VXI Status Register 04 before reading Query Response from Query Response Register 08 4 When sending a command which includes parameters the Parameter Registers 16 0 16 OE16 must be written before the Command Register 08 5 Examples here may be changed to match measurement requirements 6 ARM command does not set DONE bit 7 in VXI Status Register 04 until measurement is complete Wait for INITIATED bit 13 in Scan Status Register 1016 before issuing any triggers Reset Module to Default State Set up A24 Memory Reg Offset hex Value hex 06 2000 note 1 04 FFFC Reset DSP Chip Reg Offset hex Value hex 04 8002 04 8003 04 8002 Loop reading V XI St
303. ent Trig Counter 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 eT eH PLC Figure 5 8 Synchronous Mode Sequence e Related Commands INITiate CONTinuous TRIGger COUNt TRIGger TIMer MODE e RST Condition TRIGger TIMer MODE ASYNCHRONOUS Usage TRIG TIM MODE SYNC Change trigger timer mode to synchronous TRIGger TIMer MODE TRIGger TIMer MODE returns the currently set mode for the trigger timer Comments Returned Value Discrete either SYNCH or ASYN The C SCPI type returned is string Related Commands TRIGger TIMer MODE e RST Condition TRIGger TIMer MODE ASYNCHRONOUS Usage TRIG TIM MODE Query returns either SYNC or ASYN 272 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 TRIGger TRIGger TIMer PERiod TRIGger TIMer PERiod rig interval sets the interval between scan triggers Used with the TRIGger SOURce trigger mode Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units trig interval numeric float32 1 0E 4 to 6 5536 MIN MAX seconds string Comments In order for TRIGger TIMer to start it must be Armed For information on timer arming see the ARM subsystem in this command reference e The default interval is 1 0E 3 seconds trig interval may be specified in milliseconds ms or microseconds us The resolution for trig interval is 100 us Notes 1 To change the TRIGger T
304. er Out field is set to the TTLTRG trigger line that is to be triggered And the Trigger Source field is set to one of the trigger sources other than the one set in the Trigger Out field Register Based Command Reference This section describes the low level register commands of the HP E1413 module Commands are sent to the module through the Command Register 0816 and Parameter Registers 0A16 0C 16 OE16 Commands to the card are either a command word only or a command word and one to three parameter words When a command includes parameters the command word is sent only after the parameter word s have been sent For query commands data is returned through the Query Response Register 0816 There is only one Query Response Register there is no response buffering Therefore any response left in the Query Response Register will be lost overwritten by the next query command Always read query responses before executing the next query command For example the value 9 9E 37 is 7E94F56A 16 7E9416 is sent to the lower numbered parameter register while F56A16 goes to the higher numbered parameter register Note on Number Where commands have the parameter names lt highword gt and lowword Format the values taken together represent a 32 bit floating point value in the Motorola format That is the high 16 bit word goes to the lower numbered parameter register the ow 16 bit word goes to the higher numbered parameter register For examp
305. erased Usage Program puts table constants into array table block DIAG CUST LIN table_block 116 123 Send table to HP E1413 for channels 16 23 SENS FUNC CUST LIN 1 1 116 123 Link custom EU with channels 16 23 INITiate then TRIGger module 190 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise DIAGnostic CUSTom PlECewise lt able_range gt lt table_block gt lt ch_list gt downloads a custom piecewise Engineering Unit Conversion table in table block to the HP E1313 E1413 Contact your Hewlett Packard System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for your application Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units table range numeric float32 015625 03125 0625 125 25 5 volts 1121418116 32 64 table block definite length block See Comments below none data ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments lt block is a block of 1 024 bytes that define 512 16 bit values SCPI requires that table block include the definite length block data header C SCPI adds the header for you table range specifies the range of voltage that the table covers from table range to table range ch list specifies which channels may use this custom EU table Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom RST Condition
306. eration uses the Tare constants to set a DAC which will remove each channel offset as seen by the module s A D converter The absolute voltage level that CALibration TARE can remove is dependent on the A D range CALibration TARE will choose the lowest range that can handle the existing offset voltage The range that CALibration TARE chooses will become the lowest usable range range floor for that channel For any channel that has been CALibration TAREd autorange will not go 138 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Note Resetting CALibration ITARE below that range floor and selecting a manual range below the range floor will return an overload value see table under FORMat DATA in Chapter 5 As an example assume that the system wiring to channel 0 generates a 0 1 Volt offset with 0 Volts a short applied at the UUT Before CALibration TARE the module would return a reading of 0 1 Volt for channel 0 After CALibration TARE 100 the module will return a reading of 0 Volts with a short applied at the UUT and the system wiring offset will be removed from all measurements of the signal to channel 0 Think of the signal applied to the instrument s channel input as the gross signal value CALibration TARE removes the fare portion leaving only the net signal value Because of settling times especially on filtered channels CALibration TARE can take a number of minutes to execute The tare calibration constan
307. erature by default is sent to the CVT and FIFO If you do not want the reference temperature reported you can set the Channel Data Modifier for that channel to 7 see Controlling Data Conversion and Destination on page 108 The SCPI Command sequence should be SENS FUNC TEMP TC E 108 115 SENS FUNC TEMP TC J 116 123 SENS REF THER 5000 100 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 108 115 116 123 INIT IMM TRIG IMM SENSe DATA FIFO Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 143 More On Autoranging There are rare circumstances where your input signal can be difficult for the HP E1313 E1413 to autorange correctly The module completes the range selection based on your input signal about 6 usec before the actual measurement is made on that channel If during that period your signal becomes greater than the selected range can handle the module will return an overflow reading CINFinit y You can cure this problem by selecting a high enough manual range for that particular channel while leaving others in autorange see the SENSe FUNCtion commands in Chapter 5 You can also set the lowest allowable range that autorange can select for each channel by executing DIAGnostic FLOor CONFigure lt range gt lt ch_list gt Reducing Settling Waits Background Some sequences of input signals as determined by their order of appearance in a scan list can be a challenge to measure accurately This section is intended to hel
308. ermine the actual voltage or resistance values of the HP E1413 s internal calibration sources The known values are then sent to the HP E1413 where they are stored and used to perform internal A D calibration These procedures each require a sequence of several calibration commands Channel Calibration This function corrects for offset and gain errors for each module channel The internal current sources are also measured This calibration function corrects for thermal offsets and component drift for each channel out to the input side of the Signal Conditioning Plug on SCP All calibration sources are on board and this function is invoked using the single command CARDCAL A D Converter Zero This function quickly compensates for any short term A D converter offset drift This would be called the auto zero function in a conventional voltmeter In the HP E1413 where channel scanning speed is of primary importance this function is performed only when the ADZERO and CARDCAL commands are executed ADZERO is much faster than CARDCAL Channel Tare This function TARECAL corrects for voltage offsets in external system wiring Here the user places a short across transducer wiring and the voltage that the module measures is now considered the new zero value for that channel The new offset value can be stored in non volatile calibration memory STORETAR but is in effect whether stored or not System offset constants which are considered l
309. eturn either FLO or WV for channel 3 208 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 MEMory MEMory The MEMory subsystem allows using VME memory as an additional reading storage buffer Subsystem Syntax MEMory ADDRess lt 24 address ADDRess SIZE mem size SIZE 5 enable STATe Note This subsystem is only available in systems using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module Use Sequence RST MEM VME ADDR H300000 MEM VME SIZE H100000 IM byte or 262144 readings MEM VME STAT ON Set up HP E1413 for scanning TRIG SOUR IMM Let unit trigger on INIT INIT IMM Program execution remains here until memory is full or the HP E1413 has stopped taking readings FORMat DATA REAL 64 Affects only the return of data FETC Return data from VME memory Note When using the MEMory subsystem the module must be triggered before executing the INITiate IMMediate command as shown above unless you are using an external trigger EXTernal trigger When using an EXTernal trigger the trigger can occur at any time Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 209 MEMory MEMory VME ADDRess MEMory VME ADDRess A24 address sets the A24 address of the VME memory card to be used as additional reading storage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units A24 address numeric Valid A24 address none Comments This com
310. eturned Value Numeric value of gage factor The C SCPI type returned is f1t32 Related Commands SENSe STRain GFACtor Usage STRAIN GFAC 0107 Query gage factor for channel 7 Enter statement here Returns the gage factor set by STR GFAC Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 249 SENSe SENSe STRain Parameters Comments Usage SENSe STRain Parameters Comments Usage POISson SENSe STRain POlSson lt poisson_ratio gt lt ch_list gt sets the Poisson ratio to be used for EU conversion of values measured on sense channels specified by lt ch_list gt Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt poisson_ratio gt numeric float32 1 45 none lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none ch list must specify channels used to sense strain bridge output not channel positions on a Bridge Completion SCP Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion STRain commands SENSe STRain POlSson e RST Condition Poisson ratio is 3 STRAIN POISSON 5 124 131 POISson Set Poisson ratio for sense channels 24 through 31 SENSe STRain POISson lt channel gt returns the Poisson ratio currently set for the sense channel specified by lt channel gt Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt channel gt channel list string 100 163 none Returned Value Numeric value of the
311. eturns the unstrained voltage value currently set for the sense channel specified by channel This command does not make a measurement Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Returned Value Numeric value of unstrained voltage The C SCPI type returned is f1t32 channel must specify a single channel only Related Commands SENSe STRain UNSTrained STRAIN UNST 107 Query unstrained voltage for channel 7 Enter statement here Returns the unstrained voltage set by STR UNST Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 251 STATus STATus Subsystem Syntax The STATus subsystem communicates with the SCPI defined Operation and Questionable Data Status Register sets Each is comprised of a Condition Register a set of Positive and Negative Transition Filter Registers an Event Register and an Enable Register Condition Registers allow you to view the current real time states of their status signal inputs signal states are not latched The Positive and Negative Transition Filter Registers allow you to control the polarity of change from the Condition Registers that will set Event Register bits Event Registers contain latched representations of signal transition events from their Condition Register The HP E1413 has no programmable Transition Filter Registers so any low to high transition in a Condition Register will c
312. f the VXIbus TTLTRG lines P Trigger Count MEDI i i i Channel Number trigger trigger trigger tc is the sample time between channels The large arrows are the Trigger events The smaller arrows are sample triggers generated by the HP E1313 E1413 when stepping through the channel list Example Command Sequence ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST n n can be 1 4 SAMP TIM LIST n gt lt te gt tc can be 10 5 32 768ms TRIG SOUR source source can be BUS EXT HOLD or TTLTrg0 TTLTrg7 TRIG COUN count count can be 1 32768 or INF INIT IMM Starting Trigger event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping Before Trigger Count is Reached Remove Trigger Source Stops at end of scan list still initiated or TRIG SOUR HOLD Stops at end of scan list still initiated TRIG IMM One more scan now idle or ABOR Stops immediately must use ABOR if TRIG COUNt is INF 114 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Synchronizing Multiple Cards Continuous Free Run Mode In this section we show you how to synchronize two or more HP E1313 E1413s The examples show two cards but the principles may be extended to several This example shows you how to start two or more cards scanning at the same time It shows the cards running in the Continuous Mode TRIGger SOURce IMMediate and INITiate CONTinuous ON dt
313. f there are no readings in the FIFO you do not need to check for them Note The example program fast cs on your C SCPI driver tape shows how to retrieve data using the above commands Begin Data Retrieval Y SIAT OPER COND Nasa bit 4 Measuring Measurements Ww YES Enough Readings DATAFIFO COUNECHALF M In 2 DATA FIFO ALL Execute Last Transfer Command DATA FIFO HALF Exit Data Retrieval Figure 4 3 Fastest Reading Transfer 106 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Example Command Sequence RST SENS FUNC VOLT DC AUTO 100 163 This is a RST default ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 163 This is a RST default ROUT SCAN LIST1 This is a RST default SAMP TIM LIST1 00001 ARM SOUR IMM TRIG COUN 16384 TRIG TIM 001 TRIG SOUR TIM FORM DATA REAL 32 INIT IMM The following loop reads half of the FIFO as long as the module is scanning loop while measuring bit is true See STAT OPER COND bit 4 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF lt half_flag gt half_flag is a 16 bit integer if half_flag SENSe DATA FIFO HALF lt read_data gt read_data is a 32 bit floating point array end if end loop The following reads remaining data if any after scanning stops SENSe DATA FIFO ALL lt read_data gt Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 107 Controlling Data Conversion and Destination For ROUTe SEQuence DEFine the SCPI r
314. ference temperature register 77 78 192 237 246 247 register based command 341 342 356 register based parameter 342 356 register based response 341 required VXI 338 341 scale register 361 scan register 342 scan status register 342 SCP 360 software trigger ARM 353 status register query ESR 277 subclass register 351 table of registers 335 trigger mode register 354 355 trigger system registers 353 355 trigger timer register 353 virtual instrument registers 349 351 VXI control register 340 Registers VXI status register 339 340 address space 336 whole SCP registers 360 361 addressing 336 Rejection common mode 294 addressing base address 336 337 Remove Macro Command RMC 279 card control register 342 345 346 Removing HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 419 HP E1413 terminal module 53 offsets 138 Required SCP Registers 360 Required V XI Registers 338 device type register 339 ID register 338 360 offset register 341 VXI control register 340 VXI status register 339 340 RESCAL 365 Reset calibrating bit 182 CALibration TARE 139 command RST 279 current value table CVT 90 230 FIFO of readings 235 module to default state 382 the module 376 trigger system 159 Residual Sensor Offsets 138 RESIST 365 Resistance Measurements linking 73 RTDs 243 244 thermistor 243 244 Resistor connecting calibration bus 177 four wire measurement 177 184 Resolution
315. for that channel should be loaded into the EU Conversion RAM at the address corresponding to that channel number Contact your HP System Engineer for information on creating and downloading custom EU conversion tables All Piecewise EU Conversions have 16 bit dynamic range Linear EU conversions have full dynamic range of the HP E1413 Piecewise EU Conversions use where is the low order 9 bits and M and B coefficients are fetched based on the high order 7 bits of the A D converter reading Linear EU Conversions use y Mx B where x is the entire 16 bit A D reading M and B are constants Appendix D Register Based Programming 371 NEWn 010016 010316 Initializes scan list to null Any previous scan items assigned to this list are lost NEWL 010416 Initializes List of Lists to null Any previous Scan Lists assigned to this list are lost SCPCHAR scp number attributes 083016 Sends an SCP attributes word to the Control Processor describing the characteristics of the SCP at installed at scp number The format of the attributes word is as follows CVT Commands 15 14 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SCP Not Gain is 1 SCP can SCP can SCP has SCP has SCP has Present Assigned 2 output sense programmable programmable programmable signals voltage current cutoff frequency gain SCPGAINS 082016 Causes the Control Processor to access SCP registers t
316. fset Register 341 Base 0816 Query Response Register Command Register 341 342 Base 0A16 Parameter Register 1 342 Response Registers Base 0 16 Parameter Register 2 342 Base OE16 Parameter Register 3 342 Scan amp Card Base 1016 Scan Status and Control Register 343 344 1216 Card Control Register 345 Interrupt Registers Base 1416 Interrupt Configuration Register 347 Base 1616 Interrupt Status Register 347 1Aig Common Capabilities Register 349 i Base 1C16 Description Register 350 Base 1E16 Subclass Register 351 Base 2016 FIFO MSW 351 Base 2216 FIFO LSW 351 FIFO Registers Base 2416 FIFO Status Register 352 2 16 FIFO Reading Count Register 353 Base 2616 Software Trigger Register 353 Trigger Registers Base 2C16 Trigger Timer Register 353 Base 2E16 Trigger Mode Register 354 Appendix D Register Based Programming 335 Register Addressing Register addresses for register based devices are located in the upper 25 of the VXI A16 address space Every VXI device up to 256 is allocated a 64 4016 byte block of addresses Figure D 1 shows the register address location within the A16 address space The Base Address When you are reading or writing to a register a hexadecimal or decimal address is specified This address consists of a base address plus a register offset The base address is computed as 49 152 LADDR 64 or C00016 LAD
317. g 100 163 none lt channel gt must specify a single channel only If lt channel gt specifies an SCP which is not a Current Source Error 3007 Invalid signal conditioning module is generated Returned Value Numeric value of amplitude set The C SCPI type returned is float32 Related Commands OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude Check SCP current set for channel 63 returns 3 0E 5 or 4 88E 4 214 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 OUTPut OUTPut CURRent STATe OUTPut CURRent STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables or disables current output on channels specified in lt ch_list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt enable gt numeric uint16 1 0 OFF ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments OUTPut CURRent STATe does not affect channel s amplitude setting channel that has been disabled when re enabled sources the same current set by the previous OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude command OUTPut CURRent STATe is most commonly used to turn off excitation current to four wire resistance and resistance temperature device circuits during execution of CALibration TARE for those channels e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e Related Commands OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude CALibration TARE e RST Condition OUTPut CURRent STATe OFF
318. g for Thermocouple Measurements 36 Terminal Modes ok 37 The SCPs and Terminal Module 624468 E 9 37 Module Layout ccs ei woe Baas MERE 27 Reference Temperature Sensing with the HP E1313 40 Reference Temperature Sensing with the E1413 41 Preferred Measurement Connections lusso 42846 RE bow ee RRS 43 Connecting the On Board Thermistor os RG ee SS 46 Adding Components to the HP E1413 Terminal 48 Wiring Attaching the HP E1313 Terminal 49 Wiring HP 21413 Terminal Module 50 Attaching the HP E1413 Terminal Module ae Removing the HP E1413 Terminal 53 Terminal Module Wiring 54 Module 2225252 ACE EROR TOES LEG OAS Peg OS RSD 56 eee ee Rhee Oe de d 56 ODDO AXE cap hed dde ee ee REE EEE OSE ESS 58 Option Pin Out and Signal Lines 59 Connecting and Mounting the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel 61 Faceplate Connector Pin Sigual Lists o sa 446004454 ee be 63 HP E1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module Contents 1 Chapter 3 Using the HP 1313 1413
319. g storage MEM VME STAT 0 Disable VME card as reading storage MEMory VME STATe Comments MEMory VME STATe returned value of 0 indicates that VME reading storage is disabled Returned value of 1 indicates VME memory is enabled This command is only available in systems using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module e Returned Value Numeric value either 1 or O Related Commands MEMory commands and FETCh Usage MEM VME STAT Returns 1 for enabled 0 for disabled 212 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 OUTPut OUTPut The OUTPut subsystem is involved in programming source SCPs as well as controlling the state of VXIbus TTLTRG lines 0 through 7 Subsystem Syntax OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt SHUNt enable Q ch list channel TTL TI SOURcCe trig source SOURce TTL lt gt STATe lt ttltrg_cntrl gt STATe VOL Tage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt sets the Current Source SCP channels specified by ch list to either 488 LA or 30 LA This current is typically used for four wire resistance and resistance temperature measurements Parameters Parameter Parameter Rang
320. gister Query Returns the weighted sum of all set bits in the Standard Event Status Register After reading the register ESR clears the register The events recorded in the Standard Event Status Register are independent of whether or not those events are enabled with the ESE command to set the Standard Event Summary bit in the Status Byte Register The Standard Event bits are described in the ESE command The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Get Macro Query Returns arbitrary block response data which contains the command or command sequence defined for lt name gt For more information on arbitrary block response data see page 156 Identity Query Returns the device identity The response consists of the following four fields fields are separated by commas Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number returns 0 if not available Driver Revision returns 0 if not available Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 277 Common Command Reference IDN returns the following response strings depending on model and options HEWLETT PACKARD E1413C serial number revision number HEWLETT PACKARD E1313A 32CH sserial number revision number HEWLETT PACKARD E1313A 64CH sserial number revision number The C SCPI type for this returned value is string Note The revision will vary with the revision of the driver software installed in your system This is the only indication of which versi
321. gister is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition Register must change from a zero to a one in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event Register When a bit in the PTF register is zero a positive transition of the Condition Register bit will not change the Event Register bit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt transition_mask gt numeric uint16 0 32767 none e transition mask may be sent as decimal hex octal Q or binary If both the Status Questionable Positive Transition Filter STAT QUES PTR and Status Questionable Negative Transition Filter STAT QUES NTR Registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative will set the corresponding bit in the Event Register If neither the Status Questionable Positive Transition Filter STAT QUES PTR or Status Questionable Negative Transition Filter STAT QUES NTR Registers have a corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition Register will have no effect on the Event Register e Related Commands STATus QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 262 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 STATus e Set to all ones by STATus PRESet and power on RST Condition No change Usage STAT QUES PTR 1024 When FIFO Overflowed bit goes true set bit 10 in Status Operation Event Register STATus QUEStionable PTRansition
322. gs are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence RST Condition Reference temperature is 0 C Usage Sense the reference temperature on channel 20 using an RTD SENS REF RTD 92 120 SENSe REFerence TEMPerature SENSe REFerence TEMPerature lt degrees_c gt stores a fixed reference junction temperature in the Reference Temperature Register Use when the thermocouple reference junction is kept at a controlled temperature Note This reference temperature is used to compensate all subsequent thermocouple measurements until the register is overwritten by another SENSe REFerence TEMPerature value or by scanning a channel linked with the SENSe REFerence command If used SENSe REFerence TEMPerature must be executed before scanning any thermocouple channels Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt degrees_c gt numeric float32 126 to 126 none Comments This command is used to specify to the HP E1413 the temperature of a controlled temperature thermocouple reference junction e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 247 SENSe Usage SENSe STRain
323. hannel list Example Command Sequence ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt SAMP TIM LIST lt n gt lt t gt tc be 10 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR IMM ARM SOUR source source can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTrgo TTLTrg7 ON Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping INIT CONT OFF Stops at end of scan list Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 111 Timer Paced Scans In this mode the Trigger Timer triggers each execution of a scan list The trigger timer tp can be set from 1 ms up to 6 5 seconds Of course tp must allow time for all channels to be scanned before the next timer trigger tp gt channel count 3 te 30 5 The sample timer controls tc in the range from 10 us to 32 ms The TRIGger COUNt command controls the number of times any trigger will be accepted from 1 to 32767 or INFinite When the trigger count is exhausted the module stops scanning until another INITiate ARM TRIGger sequence is executed Trigger count defaults to 1 tp a Trigger Count 0 te 1 N 1357 1357 MEE tc is the sample time between channels Channel Number tp is the pacing time between channel lists The large arrow is the pacing Trigger Timer The smaller arrows are sample triggers generated by the HP E1313 E1413 when stepping through the channel list The fi
324. hannel numbers The commands for linking EU conversion to channels are SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt for resistance measurements SENSe FUNCtion STRain lt bridge_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt for strain bridge measurements SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt for temperature measurements with thermocouples thermistors or RTDs SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage lt range gt lt ch_list gt for voltage measurements SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt for custom EU conversions 1 At power on and after RST the default EU conversion is autorange voltage for all 64 channels 2 While the A D filter is on SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe ON lt range gt may not specify autorange The filtered settling time would be too great for autorange to function Use SCP filtering filtering at each channel to allow use of autorange at high speed 72 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Linking Voltage Measurements Note Linking Resistance Measurements To link channels to the voltage conversion send the SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC range Q ch list command The ch list parameter specifies which channels to link to the voltage EU conversion The optional range parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range Valid values are 0 0625 25 1 4 16 o
325. hapter 5 CALCulate CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CUMulative Comments Usage CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CUMulative returns the individual channel limit test status for all channels measured since the module was INITiated CUMulative This command returns 64 bits which report the status of each individual module channel A binary one in a bit position of this 64 bit value indicates that the channel associated with that bit position has exceeded its limit test Returned Value Returns 4 comma separated numeric values each representing 16 bits a total of 64 bits one for each channel This 64 bit value is returned with the least significant channel bits first the most significant channel bits last the C SCPI data type returned is an int16 array e Related Commands CALCulate CLIMits FAIL commands CALCulate LIMit commands CALC CLIM FLIM CHAN CUM A subsequent enter statement for a 4 element array will return channel limit test status CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CURRent Comments CALCulate CLIMits FLIMits CHANnels CURRent returns the individual channel limit test status for all channels measured in the last completed scan CURRent This command returns 64 bits which report the status of each individual module channel A binary one in a bit position of this 64 bit value indicates that the channel associated with that bit position has exceeded its limit test
326. har read id 80 Clear screen and announce program printf O33H 033u n n Installation Verification Program n n printf n n Please Wait Start the re so based operating system for the module INST_STARTU Enable communications to the module check if successful INST OPEN e1413 vxi LADD if 1 1413 printf INST OPEN failed ladd s Failure code is d n LADD cscpi open error exit 1 Read and print the module s identification INST QUERY e1418 idn read id printf n nInstrument ID s n n read_id rst clr Function resets the module id scps Function checks for installed SCPs start ad Function sets up the module to make measurements get readng Function gets and prints readings exit 0 kk I A IR RRR RRR I IR I kk void rst clr Reset the A D module to its power on state int16 opc wait Reset the module and wait until it resets INST QUERY e1413 RST OPC amp opc wait Check for module generated errors exit if errors read 30 Getting Started Chapter 1 if check error rst clr exit 1 KICK Ck kk koc kk kk ck ck kk ko kk kk cock ck k kck ck k ck k ck ck ck kckck ck ck kk kkk iia id scps Check ID of all installed SCPs int16 scp addr char id 100 Get SCP identifications of a
327. he destination bits control the disposition of the measurement data and the conversion flag determines whether the measurement is converted as specified in the ASSIGN statement for that channel or reported in raw volts Unless the A D is overloaded wrong A D range for the SCP gain and input or the input to the SCP is overloaded generally greater than 16 VDC the measurement value returned always reflects the signal value at the input to the channel s SCP The module s Control Processor accounts for the A D range and SCP gain settings The following table summarizes the data flag choices Data Flags Meaning Bits 2 0 00 2 No data destination reference temperature can be updated 01 2 Data destination is the Current Value Table CVT 10 2 Data destination is First In First Out Buffer FIFO 11 2 Data destination is both the and the FIFO 12 Measurement is reported in Engineering Units EU 02 Measurement is reported in voltage with reference junction compensation where appropriate x do not care Example values of data flags 000716 Convert to Engineering Units and store in FIFO and CVT 000516 Convert and store in FIFO only 000216 2 No conversion leave as voltage and store in CVT only APPENDL lt list gt 011416 Adds a scan list to the List of Scan Lists lt list gt is the scan list to add and can take on the value 0 through 3 368 Register
328. he scan list presently being executed When Running is de asserted but Armed is asserted 1 this field shows the scan list which will be executed upon receipt of a trigger These bits are undefined when executing a List of Lists scan 344 Register Based Programming Appendix D Card Control Register Base 1216 Read Write The Card Control Register controls various functions on the card Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 0 Base 1216 not used FIFO Mode not used FIFO Clear VPPEN A24 Window Open Transducer Detect Example Retrieving the Firmware ID String CAUTION FIFO Mode Writing this bit to a 0 sets the Block mode writing a 1 sets the Overwrite mode Block mode stops readings when the FIFO fills Overwrite mode over writes oldest readings with new readings leaving the latest 64K readings available FIFO Clear Setting this bit to a 1 reset the FIFO The FIFO will remain in reset until this bit is set to zero 0 VPPEN Setting this bit to a 1 turns on the programming voltage to the on board flash memory Setting this bit to zero 0 turns off this voltage VPPEN must be set high to store calibration constants or download card control firmware to the module In addition the movable jumper JM2201 must be set to the Enable position A24 Window These three bits allow A24 access to various 256 Kbyte windows of the control processor s memory The
329. he semicolon to be at the same hierarchical level and part of the same command branch as the keyword preceding the semicolon The colon immediately following the semicolon tells the SCPI parser to reset the expected hierarchical level to Root Linking a complete SCPI Command with other keywords from the same branch and level Separate the first complete SCPI command from next partial command with the semicolon only For example take the following portion of the SENSe subsystem command tree the FUNCtion branch SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt range gt lt ch_list gt TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt Rather than send a complete SCPI command to set each function you could send FUNC RES 10000 100 107 TEMP RTD 92 108 115 VOLT 116 123 This sets the first 8 channels to measure resistance the next 8 channels to measure temperature and the next 8 channels to measure voltage Note The command keywords following the semicolon must be from the same command branch and level as the complete command preceding the semicolon or Error 113 Undefined header will be generated Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 157 C SCPI Data Types The following table shows the allowable type and sizes of the C SCPI parameter data sent to the module and query data returned by the module The parameter and returned value type is ne
330. hecks SCP Gains Calibrate SCP Channels Clear Scan List 1 Define Scan List 1 Select Scan List 1 Arm the Module Send Software Trigger 0A 0C 08 Continue for all 64 channels Reg Offset hex 08 Reg Offset hex 08 Reg Offset hex 08 0004 channel number 0008 EU code for J thermocouple note 5 0010 ASSIGN cmd notes 2 4 Value hex 0820 SCPGAINS cmd note 2 Value hex 1000 CARDCAL cmd note 2 Value hex 0100 NEWn cmd for Scan List 1 note 2 Perform for each channel you want in scan list 1 Reg Offset hex 0A 0C OE 08 Reg Offset hex 10 Reg Offset hex 0A 08 Reg Offset hex 26 Value hex 0000 channel number FFFF range code FFFF autorange 7 data flags 7 EU converted to FIFO and CVT 0110 APPEND cmd notes 2 4 Value hex 0000 See Scan Control Bits on page 343 Value hex 0000 0400 ARM cmd notes 2 4 6 Value hex 0001 384 Register Based Programming Appendix D Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 General The absolute fastest system performance is obtained with an embedded computer connected directly to the VXI backplane running a real time operating system and using all custom compiled C code If this is not required for your application or you do not need the absolute fastest performance then use this appendix to program the HP E1313 E1413 using HP VEE This appendix shows how to get good performance from HP VEE
331. his is a safety device for the case where the Device Under Test DUT is not actually floating the shield is connected to the DUT and also connected to the HP E1313 E1413 guard terminal G The 10 resistor limits the ground loop current which has been known to burn out shields This also provides 20 isolation between shields and between SCP banks which helps isolate the noise source Common Mode You must be very careful not to exceed the maximum common mode voltage Voltage Limits referenced to the card chassis ground of 216 volts 260 volts with the HP E1513A Attenuator SCP There is an exception to this when high frequency 1 kHz 20 kHz common mode noise is present see HP E1313 E1413 Noise Rejection later in this appendix Also if the DUT is not grounded then the shield should be connected to the E1313 E1413 chassis ground When to Make itis not always possible to state positively the best shield connection for all Shield Connections cases Shield performance depends on the noise coupling mechanism which is very difficult to determine The above recommendations are usually the best wiring method but if feasible experiment with shield connections to determine which provides the best performance for your installation and environment Note For a thorough rigorous discussion of measurement noise shielding and filtering see Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems by Henry W Ott of Bell Laboratories published
332. ilter cutoff 71 204 setting gains 70 setting up 70 71 strain bridge channel 208 strain bridge completion 216 219 whole SCP registers 360 361 writing data to registers 189 Signal Connection to Channels 43 44 Signal Lines option A3F 59 Software Trigger ARM Register 353 SOURCE 366 Sources arm 86 87 on board current 294 thermistor excitation 93 timer arm 87 trigger 86 SPANHI 366 SPANLO 366 Specifications 293 322 Specifying Data Format 88 SPOLL 128 SRE 280 SRE 280 SRQ HP IB service request 280 interrupts 261 SRQ Interrupts 256 Standard Event Group 252 diagram 126 event register 128 examples 126 status bit descriptions 125 Status bit descriptions 125 254 bit precedence 340 commands for FIFO 102 231 enable register command 277 enable register query 277 register enable query SRE 280 register query ESR 277 register FIFO 352 register query ESR 277 register VXI 339 340 Status Byte enabling events to 123 polling 128 reading the 127 register query STB 280 summary bit 128 Status Byte Group 252 diagram 126 422 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index enable register 128 STA Tus Subsystem 252 263 STAT QUES 127 STAT OPER CONDition 254 STAT OPER ENABle 130 255 STAT OPER ENABle 255 STAT OPER EVENt 256 STAT OPER NTRansition 256 STAT OPER NTRansition 257 STAT OPER PTRansition 257 STAT OPER PTRansition 258 STAT PRESet 258 STAT QUES COND
333. ilters order HP E1586A Option 001 62 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Faceplate Connector Pin Signal Lists Figure 2 26 shows the faceplate connector pin signal list for the HP E1313 and Figure 2 27 shows the list for the HP E1413 Input Terminals Input Terminals HI30 c1 HI31 B1 A HI62 c1 HI63 LO63 L030 1c2 29 A2 L062 c2 HI61 1061 2 27 HI28 A3 59 HI60 1060 L027 c4 HI26 A4 L059 c4 HI58 LO58 A4 GRD3 c5 25 B5 A5 GRD7 cs HI57 Bs LO57 5 23 24 B6 A6 HI55 56 LO56 6 1023 1022 B7 AT LO55 HI54 87 LO54 a7 HI20 21 B8 A8 HI52 cs HI53 LO53 as 4 LO20 c9 A9 LO52 HI51 LO51 A9 17 818 B10 A10 H149 HI50 s10 LO50 ato LO17 16 LO49 48 LO48 a1 GRD2 c12 GRD2 12 20 00 ZGNDO B13 TRG_OUT c14 ZGNDO B14 20 00 c15 TST_A B15 20 00 ZGNDO B16 ZGND0 c17 B17 ZGNDO c18 HCAL s18 ZGNDO c19 HOHM B19 ZGNDO c2 ZGNDO B20 GRD1 c21 GRD1 B21 A12 GRD6 c12 GRD6 s 2 GRD6 12 A13 ZGND1 c13 ZGND1 ZGND1 A13 A14 NC c4 ZGND
334. ing Check VXI Status Register Bit 0 Cmd Parm Ready Check VXI Status Register Bit 7 Write Parameter n to Parameter Register n More Parameters Write op code to Command Register Check VXI Status Register Bit 7 Done Check VXI Status Register Bit 6 NOERR Execute ERRFLAGS See Figure D 6 Figure D 5 Executing Commands 378 Register Based Programming Appendix D Comments The registers used are Status Register base 0416 Parameter Register s base 0A 16 0C16 OE16 Command Register base 08 16 Scan Status and Control Register base 1016 The parameters must be written to their registers before the command is written Execution begins as soon as the command is written If the command returns data query for it before executing the ERRFLAGS command Queryi ng the Module Some of the register based commands return information kept by the on board microprocessor When a command returns data denoted in the register based command reference by the command name ending with character that data will be accessed from the Query Response Register base 08 16 as shown in Figure D 6 Appendix D Register Based Programming 379 Status Register NS Bit 0 Cmd Porm Ready Write Parameter lt n gt to Parameter Register n Write op code to Command Register
335. ing HTI LTI LCL On Board Current Source e HTS 7 um a JM1 Any Sense Channel on Terminal Module 1 Hnn 9 Lnn Terminal Module 2 Chs 32 63 Field Wiring HTI S LTI REM LCL ET HTS T Q On Board Current Source Return JM1 Any Sense Channel on Terminal Module 2 Hnn Lnn 2 E1313 Module Figure 2 5 HP E1313 Reference Temperature Circuit 40 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Reference Temperature Sensing with the HP E1413 The terminal module provides an on board thermistor for sensing isothermal reference temperature of the terminal blocks Also provided is a jumper set J1 in Figure 2 4 to route the HP E1413 s on board current source to a thermistor or RTD on a remote isothermal reference block Figures 2 6 and 2 7 show connections for both local and remote sensing E1413 Terminal Module Field Wiring HTI CO 9 ON LTI e Bu REM BOARD D On Board o E n i Current Source gt LTS J1 Any Sense Hnn Channel Figure 2 6 Remote Thermistor or RTD Connections HP E1413 Terminal Module Field Wiring I d OO REM _ BOARD O HTS On Board Current Source LTS J1 Any Sense Hnn Channel 2 Figure 2 7 On Board Thermistor C
336. ing tare calibration Perform checksum on Flash RAM and return a 1 for OK 0 for corrupted or deleted memory contents Writes values to SCP registers Loads linear custom EU table Loads piecewise custom EU table Puts the contents of the Reference Temperature Register into the FIFO Sets lowest range that autorange can select Sends the autorange floor setting for all 64 channels to the FIFO Sets the VXIbus interrupt line the module will use Returns the VXIbus interrupt line the module is using Controls Transducer Detect on SCPs contained in lt ch_list gt Returns current state of OTD on SCP containing lt channel gt Returns value from an SCP register Returns manufacturer model serial flash revision and date e g HEWLETT PACKARD E1413C US34000478 A 04 00 Wed Jul 08 11 06 22 MDT 1994 Return readings stored in VME Memory format set by FORMat DATA cmd Set format for response data from SENSe DATA Seven bit ASCII format not as fast as 32 bit because of conversion Same as REAL 64 except NaN INF and INF format compatible with HP BASIC IEEE 32 bit floating point requires no conversion so is fastest IEEE 64 bit floating point not as fast as 32 bit because of conversion Returns format REAL 32 REAL 64 PACK 64 ASC 7 When ON module returns to Waiting for Trigger state after each scan When OFF module goes to Trigger Idle state after each scan Put modu
337. ing the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Linking Custom EU Conversions Loading Custom EU Tables Loading Tables for Linear Conversions Usage Example Other commands used to set up strain measurements are SENSe STRain POISson SENSe STRain EXCitation SENSe STRain GFACtor SENSe STRain UNSTrained See the Chapter 5 and the HP E1506 E1507 User s Manual for more information on strain measurements There are two major steps to link channels to custom EU conversions 1 Load the custom EU conversion table values into the HP E1413 These values will be in the form of a numeric array Contact your HP Field Engineer for assistance in generating the EU conversion table values 2 Link channels to the custom EU conversion table There is a specific location in the HP E1413 s memory for each channel s EU conversion table When standard EU conversions are specified the HP E1413 loads these locations with EU conversion tables copied from its non volatile FLASH Memory For custom EU conversions you must load these table values using either of two SCPI commands The DIAGnostic CUSTom LlNear table range table block Q ch list command downloads a custom linear Engineering Unit EU conversion table to the HP E1413 for each channel specified table block is a block of 8 bytes that define 4 16 bit values SCPI requires that table block include the definite length block data header C SCPI adds the header for you
338. ion have conversion tables created for your application contact your Tables Hewlett Packard System Engineer Summary The following points describe the capabilities of custom EU conversion A given channel only has a single active EU conversion table assigned to it Changing tables requires loading it with a DIAGnostic CUSTom command The limit on the number of different custom EU tables that can be loaded in an HP E1313 E1413 is the same as the number of channels Custom tables can provide the same level of accuracy as the built in tables Resistance measurements use a linear conversion table and the temperature measurements use the piecewise conversion table Consult with your HP System Engineer for custom EU tables for your application Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 137 Compensating for System Offsets System Wiring Offsets Important Note for Thermocouples Residual Sensor Offsets Operation The HP E1313 E1413 can compensate for offsets in your system s field wiring Apply shorts to channels at the Unit Under Test UUT end of your field wiring and then execute the CALibration ITARE lt ch_list gt command The instrument will measure the voltage at each channel in ch list and save those values in RAM as channel Tare constants You must not use CALibration TARE on field wiring that is made up of thermocouple wire The voltage that a thermocouple wire pair generates cannot be r
339. ion 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYSTem ERRor See Error Messages in Appendix B The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 range etc e Related Commands CAL RST Condition A D offset performed Usage CALZERO Executing this command does not alter the module s programmed state function Returns 0 or 1 186 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 DIAGnostic Subsystem Syntax The DIAGnostic subsystem allows you to perform special operations that are not standard in the SCPI language This includes checking the current revision of the Control Processor s firmware and that it has been properly loaded into Flash DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect lt mode gt MODE CHECksum SCPWRITE reg addr reg data CUSTom LINear table range table block Q ch list PlECewise table range table block Q ch list REFerence TEMPerature FLOor lt range gt lt ch_list gt DUMP INTerrupt LINe intr line LINe OTDetect STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt QUERy SCPREAD reg addr VERSion Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 187 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OT Detect MODE DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE mode sets whether Open Transducer Detect current will be turned off the default
340. ion can be verified by service trained personnel If necessary return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Of fice for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained DO NOT service or adjust alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product Return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained 10 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Loveland Manufacturing Center Manufacturer s Address 815 14th Street S W Loveland Colorado 80537 declares that the product Product Name 32 Channel or 64 Channel Scanning A D Converter Model Number HP E1313A Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 Incl Amend 1 1992 EN61010 1 1993 CSA C222 1010 1 1992 UL 1244 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A 801 2 1991 EN50082 1 1992 4kV CD 801 3 1984 EN50082 1 1992 3V m TEC 801 4 1988 EN50082 1 1992 1 Power Line Supplementary Information The prod
341. iption 8 256 Lost Calibration At RST or Power on Control Processor has found a checksum error in the Calibration Constants Read error s with SYST ERR command and re calibrate areas that lost constants 9 512 Trigger Too Fast Scan not complete when another trigger event received 10 1024 FIFO Overflowed Attempt to store more than 65 024 readings FIFO 11 2048 Overvoltage Ifthe input protection jumper has not been cut the input Detected relays have been opened and RST is required to reset the Input module Overvoltage will also generate an error 12 4096 VME Memory The number of readings taken exceeds VME memory Overflow space 13 8192 Setup Changed Channel Calibration in doubt because SCP setup may changed since last CAL or CAL SETup command RST always sets this bit Table 4 3 Operation Status Group Bit Bit Value Event Name Description 0 1 Calibrating Set by CAL TARE and CAL SETup Cleared by CAL TARE and CAL SETup Set while CAL executing then cleared 4 16 Measuring Set when instrument INITiated Cleared when instrument returns to Trigger Idle State 8 256 Scan Complete Set when each pass through a Scan List is completed not indicate that all readings have been taken when INIT CONT is ON 9 512 SCP Trigger Reserved for future HP E1413 SCPs 10 1024 FIFO Half Full FIFO contains at least 32 768 readings 11 2048 Limit Test Exceeded or more limit tests exceeded Tab
342. ired registers There are Conditioning two major categories of SCP registers Whole SCP Registers bit 0 Plug on Registers in which the register has effect on the entire SCP and Channel Registers CHN bit 1 which effect only a single SCP channel Whole SCP Registers CHN bit 0 ID Register Read regaddr 00 0000002 ppp SCP plug on number 0 7 15 8 7 0 ID SUB ID Sub ID is an 8 bit field which identifies the particular version of the SCP Substantially similar SCPs may be available in several versions distinguished by filter cutoff frequency or some other parameter which does not affect the software driver The 8 bit ID field determines the class of SCP which directs the SCPI driver how to control it Simple SCPs may return the same number in both fields 360 Register Based Programming Appendix D Scale Register Read Write regaddr O0ppp000001 2 ppp SCP plug on number 0 7 15 4 3 2 0 do not care Sign Scale Only the low four bits of this register are significant They consist of a sign bit and a 3 bit integer Thus 7 lt SCALE lt 7 This is the weight of the least significant bit in the Channel Gain Registers See Channel Gain below for details SCALE may be fixed or it may be programmable See individual SCP Reference Manuals for details The SCALE factor is used in conjunction with each channel s Gain Register value to asses
343. is is a resistance temperature measurement and uses the on board 122 WA current source Note The reference junction temperature value generated by scanning the reference channel is stored in the Reference Temperature Register This reference temperature is used to compensate all subsequent thermocouple measurements until the register is overwritten by another reference measurement or by specifying a constant reference temperature with the SENSe REFerence TEMPerature command If used the reference junction channel must be scanned before any thermocouple channels Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units sensor type discrete string THERmistor RTD CUSTom none sub type numeric float32 for THER use 5000 Ohm numeric float32 for RTD use 85 92 none for CUSTom use 1 none range numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments below ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments See Linking Channels to EU Conversion in Chapter 3 for more information The range parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 generate
344. ist SCP Terminal Blocks The HP E1413 can execute a user defined sequence of up to four Scan Lists each of which can defining a sequence of up to 1024 channels to scan The Digital Signal Processor chip that performs all of the HP E1413 s internal hardware control functions as well as performing the EU Conversion process Fastest scanning mode In effect when TRIGger SOURce is set to IMM and INITiate CONTinuous is set to ON Same as Control Processor Engineering Units Engineering Unit Conversion Converting binary A D readings into readings of voltage resistance temperature strain or pressure Non volatile semiconductor memory used by the HP E1413 to store its control firmware and calibration constants Automatic Scan List Sequencing The command ROUT SCAN LISTL causes the HP E1413 to execute a sequence of Scan Lists defined in the special Scan List LISTL A user defined list of up to 1024 channel specifiers that will be scanned when to module is triggered Signal Conditioning Plug on The HP E1413 s internal plug on signal conditioners The screw terminal blocks you connect your system field wiring to The terminal blocks are inside the Terminal Module Appendix C Glossary 331 Terminal The plastic encased module which contains the terminal Module blocks you connect your field wiring to The Terminal Module then is plugged into the HP E1413 s front panel 332 Glossary Appendix C Appendix D Regis
345. istance temperature measurements the sub type parameter specifies For RTDs 85 or 92 for 100 Ohm RTDs with 0 00385 or 0 00392 Ohms Ohm Degree C temperature coefficients respectively For Thermistors 2250 5000 or 10000 the nominal value of these devices at 25 degrees C Note Resistance temperature measurements RTDs and thermistors require the use of Current Source Signal Conditioning Plug ons The following table shows the Current Source setting that must be used for the following RTDs and thermistors Required Current Temperature Sensor Types and Amplitude Subtypes 488A RTD 85 92 and THER 2250 MIN 304A 5000 10000 Note sub type values of 2250 5000 and 10000 refer to thermistors that match the Omega 44000 series temperature response curve These 44000 series thermistors have been selected to match the curve within 0 1 or 0 2 C Chapter 3 Using the E1313 E1413 75 To set channels 0 through 15 to measure temperature using 2 250 Ohm thermistors in this case paired to current source SCP channels 16 through 31 OUTP CURR AMPL 488e 6 116 131 Set excite current to 488 on current SCP channels 16 through 31 SENS FUNC TEMP THER 2250 100 115 Link channels 0 through 15 to temperature EU conversion for 2 2500 thermistor To set channels 32 through 47 to measure temperature using 10 000 Ohm thermistors in this case paired to current source SCP channels 48
346. ister A zero 0 indicates that the Send Count Register locations have some device specific function s Rec Count A one 1 indicates that the device has a Receive Count Register A zero 0 indicates that the Send Count Register locations have some device specific function s IRQ 1 A one 1 indicates that the device has the IRQ Config 1 Register A zero 0 indicates that the IRQ Config 1 Register location has some device specific function s IRQ 2 A one 1 indicates that the device has the IRQ Config 2 Register A zero 0 indicates that the IRQ Config 0 Register location has some device specific function s Send Frame A one 1 indicates that the device has the Send Frame Register A zero 0 indicates that the Send Frame Register location has some device specific function s Receive Frame A one 1 indicates that the device has the Receive Frame Register A zero 0 indicates that the Receive Frame Register location has some device specific function s Slave Addr A one 1 indicates that the device has the Slave Address Register A zero 0 indicates that the Slave Address Register location has some device specific function s Appendix D Register Based Programming 349 Description Register Base 1C16 Read only returns FA6016 The Description Register returns more information on identification and functionality of the HP E1413 Note that the Send Data Send Count and Send Status Registers correspond to the
347. ister 128 diagram 126 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 417 enable register 260 event register 128 261 examples 123 status bit descriptions 125 259 summary bit 260 VXI interrupts 260 Quick Reference commands 284 290 Quieting Noisy Measurements 36 R Rack Mount Terminal Panel 58 62 93 99 accessories 62 connecting 61 connecting the HP E1586A 61 93 99 custom length cable 62 HF common mode filter 62 mounting 62 mounting the HP E1586A 61 option A3F 58 62 93 99 option A3F accessories 62 standard cable 62 thermistor connections 93 99 using the 93 99 Ranges measurement 293 Reader Comment Sheet 13 Reading averaging 131 132 164 165 condition registers 128 count register FIFO 353 event registers 128 FIFO buffer 230 232 234 235 FIFO controlled count 104 105 FIFO fastest transfer 106 107 FIFO transfer commands 102 230 limit testing 133 135 rate maximum 293 status byte 127 status groups directly 128 READTEMP 365 REAL 32 199 200 REAL 64 199 200 Recommended Measurement Connections 43 44 Reducing noise 401 406 settling waits 144 146 Reference Junction Temperature defining 142 247 sensing 46 Reference Resistor calibrate value 184 connecting to calibration bus 177 Reference Temperature custom EU conversions 137 237 defining junction 142 247 isothermal 237 measurements 93 99 register 77 78 192 237 246 247 scanning two channels 42 sensing 40 41 sensi
348. it_show Get readings stored in the CVT INST_QUERY e1413 DATA CVT 100 163 read data Print the readings printf n nCVT Data n n prt_readng read_data Check for module generated errors exit if errors read if check error get readng exit 1 Chapter 1 Getting Started 31 KICK Kk kk kk I kk kckck kk ckckckck kck ck A kckck ck ck kk kk xf n prt readng float32 read data Display readings int16 i printf ch reading ch reading ch reading ch reading itf uuo ee ue c see SHE for i 0 1 lt 64 1 4 printf 2d 13 6 2d 13 6e 2 13 6 2d 9613 6eW i read data i 1 1 read data i 1 1 2 read data i 2 1 3 read 3 CK KK kk KR koc kk kk ck ck kk RRR ckckckck kk ckck ckckckckckckckck kk kk int32 check error char message Check for module generated errors int16 error char err out 256 Check for any errors INST QUERY e1413 SYST ERR amp error err out If error is found print out the error s if error while error rintf Error d s in function s n error err out message QUERY e1413 SYST ERR amp error err out return 1 return 0 Verifying a Successful Configuration An example C SCPI Compiled SCPI program sou
349. ition 259 STAT QUES ENABle 130 260 STAT QUES ENABle 260 STAT QUES EVENt 261 STAT QUES NTRansition 261 STAT QUES NTRansition 262 STAT QUES PTRansition 262 STAT QUES PTRansition 263 Status System description 252 263 diagram 126 status groups 252 updating 129 130 using 122 123 125 128 252 263 STB 127 128 280 STORECAL 26 366 STORETAR 26 366 Strain Bridge Completion SCP 216 219 excitation voltage 248 gage factor 249 poisson ratio 250 SCP channel 208 unstrained voltage 251 Strain Measurements linking 78 241 242 Strobed Interrupts 347 348 Subclass Register 351 Subsystems example of 153 Subsystems SCPI Commands 159 ARM 160 162 CALCulate 163 174 CALibration 175 186 DIAGnostic 187 196 FETCh 197 198 FORMat 199 201 INITiate 202 203 INPut 204 208 MEMory 209 212 OUTPut 213 219 ROUTe 220 225 SAMPle 226 227 SENSe Subsystem 228 251 STATus 252 263 SYSTem 264 265 TRIGger 266 274 Summary Bit 128 Switches flash memory protect E1313 27 logical address 16 17 Synchronizing multiple cards 115 trigger timer mode 270 271 Syntax variable command 154 System wiring offsets compensating 138 System Commands AVGRDGS 358 ERRFLAGS 358 FILTER 359 FILTER 359 LOW_LIMIT 359 NO_LIMIT 359 NULL 359 register based 358 362 REVCODE 359 SCBREAD 360 SCBWRITE 360 362 UP_LIMIT 359 SYSTem Subsystem 264 265 SYSTem CTYPe 264 SYSTem ERRor
350. l Module
351. l processor RAM mapped to Program Space A24 accesses can be used to view this region however 374 Register Based Programming Appendix D Register Based Programming Fundamentals Register based programming begins with a few fundamental register based operations They are Resetting the module General register access Executing register based commands Querying the module These operations are explained here in detail In Programming Sequence on page 382 they will each be shown as a single operation Appendix D Register Based Programming 375 Resetti ng the Module Resetting the module places it in the Ready for Program State The module is reset according to Figure D 3 Write a 1 to Control Register Bit 1 SYSINH 10 and a 0 to Bit 0 RESET Write a 1 to Control Register Bits 1 ond 0 SYSINH RESET Write a 1 to Control Register Bit 1 10 SYSINH and a 0 to Bit RESET JL Check Status Register Bits 2 and 3 passed and Write 0 to Control Register Bit 1 SYSINH See the Control Processor 1 S State Diagram on page 381 Ready for Command Figure D 3 Resetting the HP E1313 E1413 Comments The registers used are Control Register base 0416 write Status Register base 0416 read Writing a one 1 to bit 1 prevents the m
352. lains the possible choices Parameter Value Source of Arm BUS ARM IMMediate EXTernal Trig signal on terminal module HOLD ARM IMMediate IMMediate The arm signal is always true continuous arming SCP SCP Trigger Bus future HP or SCP Breadboard TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines lt n gt 0 through 7 See the note about the ARM subsystem on page 160 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 161 ARM Usage ARM SOURce Usage The Arm and Trigger Sources can be changed while the module is scanning but not in the continuous mode This provides a way to stop triggering when you want to change the TRIGger TIMer PERiod trig interval do this execute ARM SOURce IMMediate Must be IMMediate when SOURce not TIMer TRIGger SOURce BUS To stop scanning Or TRIGger SOURce HOLD TRIGger TIMer new interval Change the timer interval TRIGger SOURce Return to timed scans When TRIGger SOURCe is TRIGger TIMer MODE is set to SYNC and INITiate CONTinuous is ON an ARM event is required only to trigger the first scan After that the timer continues to run and the module goes to the wait for trigger state ready for the next timer trigger An INITiate CONTinuous OFF command will return the module to the trigger idle state after the current scan is completed See TRIGger SOURce and TRIGger TIMer MODE for more details While AR
353. le the value 9 9 3710 is 7E94F56A 16 7E9416 is sent to the lower numbered parameter register while F56A 16 goes to the higher numbered parameter register Note that the ASCII command names shown here are a descriptive convenience only The actual command is a sixteen bit word shown to the right of the command name Where the command name ends with a lower case bits 1 0 of the command word control which of four possible scan lists are referenced by the command The Register Based Commands are divided into the categories listed on the following page 356 Register Based Programming Appendix D System Commands ul bspw VERA RR ee VR ac Page 358 JBRRELEAGS eie es Page 358 4 RENS Page 359 SoBIE TER Y s Re end tH Page 359 rera eve Ee ee Page 359 JE OW Oba gree Page 359 Dese Vues e kon Page 359 ate aT Decet t x iru Soe Page 359 REVCODE sees eum bea pe AER Page 359 SCBREA D ie cen Pater vane Xx EMEN Page 360 SCB WRITE Page 360 Calibration Commands Page 364 eeu ie se EVO Page 364 CARDCAL 2 eee ORAN RS Page 364 CARDGAL T eser Cen De tes Page 365 SES
354. le 4 4 Standard Event Group Bit Bit Value Event Name Description 0 1 Operation Complete command executed and instrument has completed all pending operations 128 2 4 Query Error Aitempting to read empty output queue or output data lost 3 8 Device Dependent device dependent error occurred See Appendix B Error 4 16 Execution Error Parameter out of range or instrument cannot execute a proper command because it would conflict with another instrument setting 5 32 Command Error Unrecognized command or improper parameter count or Power On type Power has been applied to the instrument Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 125 If you wanted the FIFO half full and scan complete conditions to be reported you would execute STAT OPER ENAB 1280 1280 decimal sum of values for bits 10 and 6 Standard Event Group Examples If you only wanted the query error execution error and command error conditions to be reported by the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status byte you would execute ESE 52 52 decimal sum of values for bits 2 4 and 5 Operation Group Example Suppose that you wanted the module to report via the Status system when it had completed executing CAL The Calibrating bit bit 0 in the Operation Condition Register goes to 1 when CAL is executing and returns to 0 when CAL is complete In order to record only the negati
355. le for channels 24 31 to HP E1413 SENS FUNC CUST 1 1 124 131 Link custom EU with channels 24 31 and set the IV A D range INITiate then TRIGger module Linking Custom SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom range G ch list command links EU Tables channels with the custom EU conversion table loaded with the DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear DIAGnostic CUSTom PlECewise commands Two other custom linking commands are available for custom thermocouple measurements SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple type range G ch list and SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt A full explanation of these custom temperature EU linking commands can be found starting on page 136 The range parameter selects one of the HP E1413 s voltage ranges 06251 251 114116 To select a range simply specify the range Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange If an A D reading is greater than the table range specified with DIAGnostic CUSTom PlIECewise an overrange condition will occur The type command is for SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple command and it specifies the type of thermocouple wire f no custom table has been loaded for the channels specified with SENSe FUNCtion CUS Tom an error will be generated when INITiate command is given 80 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter
356. le in Wait for Trigger state ready to make one scan Control filter Signal Conditioning Plug ons Sets the cutoff frequency for active filter SCPs Returns the cutoff frequency for the channel specified Turn filtering OFF pass through or ON filter Return state of SCP filters Set gain for amplifier per channel SCP Returns the channel s gain setting Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 285 Command Quick Reference SCPI Command Quick Reference Command Description lt wvolt_type gt lt ch_list gt lt channel gt MEMory ADDRess mem address ADDRess SIZE mem size SIZE STATe 1101 ON OFF STATe OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt STATe ON OFF lt ch_list gt 5 lt channel gt SHUNt ON OFF lt ch_list gt SHUNt lt channel gt TTLTrg SOURce FTRigger LIMit SCPlugon TRIGger SOURce TTLTrg lt n gt STATe ON OFF STATe VOLTage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt ROUTe 5 LIST1 LIST2 LIST3 11574 LISTL SEQuence DEFine LISTIILIST2ILIST3ILISTAILISTLIALL G cA list POINts LISTI LIST2 LIST3 LISTAILISTL SAMPle TIMer LISTIILIST21LIST3ILISTA LISTL ALL interval TIMer LISTI LIST2 LIST3 LIST4 LISTL SENSe DATA CVTable lt ch_list g
357. list Page 215 OUTPut CURRent STATe lt Page 215 OUTPut SHUNt STATe enable Q ch Page 216 OUTPut SHUNt STATe lt Page 216 150 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURee trig source Page 217 OUTPut FELT re SOURCE 22 4 e quang m gie eeu s Page 218 OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt ttltrg_cntrl gt Page 218 OUTPut ETETrgens2ESTATe Be een 5 ReeoR maet rene e 9 RE vm Page 218 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude amplitude Q ch list ee Page 219 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt 1 gt Page 219 5 Jist vus ere em meon ede b WX AK SUR e see dede Page 220 ROUTe SEQuence DEFine scan list Q ch Page 222 ROUTe SEQuence DEFine scan list amp mode Page 224 ROUTe SEQuence POINts scan 5 gt Page 225 SAMPle TIMer scan list interval eee ees Page 226 SAMPle TIMer scan list Page 227 SENSe DATA CV Table lt list
358. ll SCPs printf nSCP Identifications for scp_addr 100 scp_addr lt 156 scp_addr 8 INST_QUERY e1413 SYST CTYP d s scp scp id printf ID for SCP d is s n scp_addr 100 8 scp id void start Initialize and trigger A D then take readings Default EU type is volts and scan list is LIST1 and is defined as all 64 channels int16 opc wait Enable the Trigger System INST SEND e1413 INIT Check for module generated errors exit if errors read if setup module exit 1 Trigger the module to start the measurement process INST SEND e1413 TRIG Check for module generated errors exit if errors read if pic trigger module exit 1 CK KA kk kk kk kk ckck ck kckck ckck ckckckck ck ck kk kk x 99 get readng Get the module s readings float32 read data 64 char wait show 2 Wait to view previous screen printf n nPress Return to continue while gets wait show Set format of returned data INST SEND e1413 FORMAT REAL 32 Get readings using FIFO INST QUERY e1413 DATA FIFO PART 64 read data Print the readings printf n nFIFO data n n prt_readng read_data Wait here to view previous screen printf n nPress Return to continue while gets wa
359. lue Numeric value as set by the INPut GAIN command The C SCPI type returned is float32 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 207 INPut Usage INPut LOW Parameters Comments Usage INPut LOW Parameters Comments Usage e Related Commands INPut GAIN e RST Condition Gain set to 1 INP GAIN 105 Check gain on channel 5 INP GAIN 100 Check gain on channel 0 INPut LOW wvolt type Q ch list controls the connection of input LO at a Strain Bridge SCP channel specified by cA list LO can be connected to the Wagner Voltage ground or left floating Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units wvolt type discrete string FLOat WVOLtage none ch list channel list string 100 163 none e Related Commands INPut L OW RST Condition INPut LOW FLOat all HP E1511 Transient Strain SCP channels INPut LOW WVOL 100 103 116 119 Connect LO of channels 0 through 3 and 16 through 19 to Wagner Ground INPut LOW lt channel gt returns the LO input configuration for the channel specified by channel Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none channel must specify a single channel only Returned Value Returns or WV The C SCPI type returned is string e Related Commands INPut LOW INP LOW 103 Enter statement will r
360. mand is only available in systems using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module The default if MEMory VME ADDRess not executed is 24000016 lt A24_address gt may be specified in decimal hex H octal Q or binary B Related Commands MEMory commands FORMat commands and FETCh RST Condition VME memory address starts at 20000016 When using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module the first HP E1413 occupies 20000016 23FFFF16 Usage MEM VME ADDR H400000 Set the address for the VME memory card to be used as reading storage MEMory VME ADDRess MEMory VME ADDRess returns the address specified for the VME memory card used for reading storage Comments Returned Value numeric e This command is only available in systems using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module Related Commands MEMory commands FORMat commands and FETCh Usage MEM VME ADDR Returns the address of the VME memory card 210 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 MEMory VME SIZE MEMory MEMory VME SIZE mem size specifies the number of bytes of VME memory to allocate for additional reading storage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mem size numeric To limit available VME memory none Comments This command is only available in systems using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module e mem size be specified in d
361. mand sequence puts together all of the steps discussed so far in this chapter RST Reset the module Setting up Signal Conditioning step 1 only for programmable SCPs INP FILT LPAS FREQ 2 116 119 INP GAIN 64 116 119 INP GAIN 8 120 123 Link channels to EU conversions step 2 SENS FUNC VOLT AUTO 100 107 SENS REF TEMP THER 5000 AUTO 108 SENS FUNC TEMP TC T AUTO 9109 123 Execute channel calibration step 3 CAL Define and select scan list step 4 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 108 123 100 107 ROUT SCAN LIST1 This is a RST default Set sample timer step 5 SAMP TIM LIST1 00001 Configure the trigger system step 6 ARM SOUR IMM This is a RST default TRIG COUN 10 TRIG TIM 0007 TRIG SOUR TIM Specify data format step 7 FORM DATA REAL 32 Select FIFO mode step 8 SENS DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK Initiate trigger system step 9 INIT CONT OFF This is a RST default INIT IMM Retrieve data step 10 SENS DATA FIFO PART read data 92 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Using the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel Thermistor Connections and Operations Channels 0 3 or 32 35 Terminal Block 0 32 1 33 2 34 This section shows how to use the HP E1313 E1413 with the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel The HP E1586 Rack Mount Terminal Panel s three thermistors are located next to the channel 3 terminal block between channels 11 and 16 and next to channel 24 see Figure 3 5 The following section
362. me as a common command When a SCPI named macro is executed the macro rather than the SCPI command is executed To regain the function of the SCPI command execute EMC 0 cmd data is sent as arbitrary block program data For more information see page 156 Enable Macro Command When enable is non zero macros are enabled When enable is zero macros are disabled Enable Macro Query Returns either 1 macros are enabled or O macros are disabled 276 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 ESE mask Common Command Reference Standard Event Status Enable Register Command Enables one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in bit 5 the Standard Event Status Summary bit of the Status Byte Register You enable an event by specifying its decimal weight for mask To enable more than one event bit specify the sum of the decimal weights The C SCPI type for mask is int16 Bit 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Weighted Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Event Power on User Command Execution Device Dependent Query Request Operation Request Error Error Error Error Control Complete ESE ESR GMC lt name gt IDN Standard Event Status Enable Query Returns the weighted sum of all enabled unmasked bits in the Standard Event Status Register The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Standard Event Status Re
363. mmable Read Only Memory When type ADC the module sets its Analog to Digital Converter calibration using the most recently measured CALibration VALue for voltage and resistance and stores these to Flash Memory When type TARE the module stores the most recently measured CALibration TARE channel offsets into Flash Memory The HP E1313 E1413 s Flash Memory has a finite lifetime of approximately ten thousand write cycles unlimited read cycles While executing CALibration STORe once every day would not exceed the lifetime of the Flash Memory for approximately 27 years an application that stored constants many times each day would unnecessarily shorten the Flash Memory s lifetime Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type discrete string ADC TARE none The Flash Memory Protect jumper JM2201 must be set to the PROG position before executing this command see Chapter 1 Channel offsets are compensated by the CALibration TARE command even when not stored in the Flash Memory There is no need to use the CALibration STORe TARE command for channels which are recalibrated frequently e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands CALibration VALue RESistance CALibration VALue VOLTage RST Condition Stored calibration constants are unchanged CAL STOR ADC Store cal constants in non volatile memory after A
364. mode or left on during the CALibration TARE operation Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean uint 16 011 volts Comments When mode is set to 0 the RST Default channels are tare calibrated with their OTD current off When mode 1s 1 channels that have their OTD current on DIAGnostic OTDetect ON lt ch_list gt are tare calibrated with their OTD current left on By default RST the CALibration TARE command will calibrate all channels with the OTD circuitry disabled This is done for two reasons 1 Most users do not leave OTD enabled while taking readings 2 The CALibration TARE operation takes much longer with OTD enabled However for users who intend to make readings with OTD enabled setting DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE 1 will force the CALibration TARE command to perform the calibration with OTD enabled on channels specified by the user with DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe Related Commands CALibration TARE CALibration TARE DIAGnostic CALibration T ARE OTDetect MODE DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe RST Condition DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE 0 Usage Configure OTD on during CAL TARE DIAG CAL TARE MODE 1 Set mode for OTD to stay on CAL TARE Start channel tare cal DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE returns the currently set mode f
365. mperature using 5K thermistor SENS REF THERM 5000 120 Define Scan List 1 to measure reference channel first then TC channels ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 120 100 119 Link channels 21 39 to the 10K ohm thermistor temperature conversion range is defaulted to autorange SENS FUNC TEMP THER 10kohm 121 139 244 E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt links the specified channels to return DC voltage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt range gt numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments below ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The range parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates Error 222 Data out of range Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on
366. mplifier higher range for the same measurement resolution Since the Range Amplifier has to track signal level changes from the multiplexer at up to 100 KHz its bandwidth must be much higher than the bandwidth of individual filter amplifier SCP channels Using higher SCP gain along with lower Range Amplifier gain can significantly increase normal mode noise rejection This method adds settling time only to individual problem measurements rather then to all measurements as the SAMPle TIMer command does With the HP E1313 E1413 channels will be scanned in any order you specify including multiple times and you can specify which readings to return and which to discard see the ROUTe SEQuence DEFine command in Chapter 5 Using this capability you can set your scan sequence to measure input channels from lowest level to highest level This will minimize channel settling problems If you plan to continuously execute a scan list wrapping around from the last channel to the first channel can present this high level signal to low level signal settling problem To allow for additional channel settling time here you can measure the low level channel two or more times but only return data from the final measurement of that channel Figure 4 10 will illustrate this idea Of course you do not need to specify the optimum sequence for the scan list channels You can simply place repeat channels in your existing scan list anywhere extra settling delay is n
367. n Command Reference under CALibration CONFigure VOLTage Memory size must be multiple of 4 From MEM VME SIZE Each HP E1413 reading requires 4 bytes Self test failed Test info in FIFO Use SENSe DATA FIFO ALL to read the test results For example SENSe DATA FIFO ALL returns the values 72 and 108 This indicates that test number 72 failed on channel 8 NOTE TST always returns results to the FIFO in ASCII format Definition ID number of failed test See the following text for information on self test error numbers Channel number s associated with field test channel 0 63 Main card A D associated with failed test A D range 0 0625 V associated with failed test A D range 0 25 V associated with failed test A D range 1 0 V associated with failed test A D range 4 0 V associated with failed test A D range 16 0 V associated with failed test Corrective Action HP Service is required Remove all SCPs and see if TST passes If so sequentially replace each SCP while running TST to identify failing SCP s HP Service is required Try to re seat the SCP associated with the TST failure or move the SCP to a different SCP socket and see if the TST errors follow the SCP If the test error follows the SCP replace the SCP HP Service is required Appendix B Error Messages 327 Notes These are the only tests where the user should troubleshoot a problem Other tests which fail must be han
368. n DAC output Only reports first channel of SCP Checks range of strain DAC Only reports first channel of SCP Checks noise of strain DAC Only reports first channel of SCP Checks bridge completion leg resistance each channel Checks combined leg resistance each channel Checks current source SCP s OFF current Checks current source SCP s current dac mid scale Checks current source SCP s current dac range on HI and LO ranges Checks strain SCP s Wagner Voltage control Checks autobalance DAC range with input shorted Sample and Hold channel holds value even when input value changed Sample and Hold channel held value test for droop rate Wait to continue Command Prevents an instrument from executing another command until the operation begun by the previous command is finished sequential operation Do not use WAI to determine when CALibration SETup or CALibration TARE commands have completed Instead use their query forms CALibration SETup or CALibration TARE CALibration SETup and CALibration TARE return a value only after the CALibration SETup or CALibration TARE operations are complete Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 283 Command Quick Reference Command Quick Reference The following tables summarize SCPI and IEEE 488 2 Common Commands for the HP E1313 E1413 64 Channel High Speed A D SCPI Command Quick Reference Command Description ABORt ARM IMMediate SOU
369. n of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC or an input out of range condition will exist If an A D reading is greater than the table range specified with DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise an overrange condition will occur 236 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Usage SENSe f no custom table has been loaded for the channels specified with SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom Error 3056 Custom EU not loaded will be generated when an INITiate IMMediate command is given e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e Related Commands DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise RST Condition All custom EU tables are erased Program must put table constants into array table block DIAG CUST LIN 1 table_block 116 123 Send table to HP E1413 for channels 16 23 SENS FUNC CUST 1 116 123 Link custom EU with channels 16 23 INITiate then TRIGger module SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence Parameters Comments SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt links channels with the custom Engineering Unit Conversion table loaded with the DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise command Measurements from a channel linked with SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence will result in a temperature that is sent to the FIFO and or CVT as well as the module s Reference Temperature Register This command is used to measure the temperature of an isothermal
370. n_list gt When lt scan_list gt is LIST1 LIST4 and lt mode gt is MOD ROUTe SEQuence DEFine returns the Channel Data Modifiers assigned to the current Scan List channels The meaning of the Channel Data Modifier values are shown in the following table Channel Data Description Modifier 1 Perform EU conversion and store result in both FIFO buffer and Current Value Table 2 Leave measurement as voltage and store result in both FIFO and CVT 3 Perform EU conversion and store result in CVT only 4 Leave measurement as voltage and store in CVT only 5 Perform EU conversion and store result in FIFO only 6 Leave measurement as voltage and store in FIFO only 7 Leave measurement as voltage and do not store result in either FIFO or CVT Use as dummy channel set Limit Checking CALCulate LIMit cannot be performed on channels that are not converted to Engineering Units Returned Value Returned values are as a comma separated list Related Commands ROUTe SEQuence DEFine ROUTe SCAN RST Condition Scan List 1 100 163 Channel Data Modifiers are all 1 Scan Lists 2 through 4 have no channels assigned to them LISTL as no Scan Lists assigned to it Usage ROUT SEQ DEF LIST2 CHAN Query for channel sequence in LIST2 Enter comma separated list of channels ROUT SEQ DEF LISTL Query for scan list sequence in LISTL Enter comma separated list of Scan Lists 224
371. nals The ratio of common mode impedance to differential mode impedance for the transformer we use is 3500 1 Thus there is NO differential mode bandwidth penalty incurred by using the tri filar transformers Appendix F Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods 405 Notes 406 Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods Appendix F CAL 35 81 82 275 276 difference from CAL SETup 179 how to use 81 what CAL does 81 when OTD is enabled 276 when to re execute CAL 82 15 276 DMC 276 EMC 276 EMC 276 ESB 277 ESE 277 ESR 277 GMC 277 IDN 277 2778 LMC 278 OPC 130 278 OPC 278 279 PMC 279 RMC 279 RST 15 279 default settings 66 SRE 280 SRE 280 STB 127 128 280 TRG 280 TST 281 283 default settings 66 WAT 283 4 20 mA adding sense circuits for 48 A A16 Address Space 336 A24 Address 210 control processor memory 345 Abbreviated SCPI Commands 153 ABORt Subsystem 159 Absolute Scan Rate 121 Accessing current value table CVT 90 229 230 FIFO 91 230 235 general register 377 Accuracy DC Volts 294 Index HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual sample timer 294 temperature 295 trigger timer 294 Adding channel settling delay 146 reading storage buffer 209 shunt resistance 216 terminal module components 48 Address A16 336 A24 210 base address 336 337 logical 16 17 query VME memory card 210 register 336 ADGAIN 364 ADVRAT
372. ne cc 00 63 for LISTL use LIST1 2 3 4 Comments Channels can be specified in any order When CALCulate AVERage STATe is OFF channels can be specified multiple times in an individual Scan List When CALCulate AVERage STATe is ON each channel must appear only once in an individual Scan List A channel list may contain as many as 1 024 entries This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated When ROUTe SCAN selects LIST1 through LISTA the specified scan list can contain as few as two channels three channels when an HP E1510 E1511 is installed When ROUTe SCAN selects LISTL each Scan List specified in the List of Lists must contain at least 6 entries or else Error 3001 Illegal while continuous will occur When scan list is ALL the channel specification is copied to all four Scan Lists For LISTL the cA list parameter can specify up to 1 024 Scan List numbers 1 through 4 in any order and any list number can be specified multiple times For LIST1 LISTA or ALL the SCPI Relative Channel specification form can be used to control the conversion and storage destination of data measured during a scan The SCPI Relative Channel specification syntax is cc nn nn nn nn where cc card number and nn channel number For the ROUTe SEQuence DEFine command the card number becomes the Channel Data Modifier The value can range from 1 through 7 The
373. ng offset will be removed from all measurements of the signal to channel 0 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 181 CALibration Note Set Amplifier Filter SCP gain before CALibration TARE For best accuracy choose the gain that will be used during measurements If you decide to change the range or gain setup later be sure to perform another CAL If Open Transducer Detect OTD is enabled when CALibration TARE is executed the module will disable OTD wait 1 minute to allow channels to settle perform the calibration and then re enable OTD If your program turns off OTD before executing CALibration TARE it should also wait 1 minute for settling The maximum voltage that CALibration TARE can compensate for is dependent the range chosen and SCP gain setting Table 5 2 lists these values Table 5 2 Maximum CALibration TARE Offsets A D range Offset V Offset V Offset V Offset V V F Scale Gain x1 Gain x8 Gain x16 Gain x64 16 3 2213 40104 20009 04970 4 82101 10101 05007 01220 1 23061 02721 01317 00297 25 07581 00786 00349 00055 0625 03792 00312 00112 n a Channel offsets are compensated by the CALibration TARE command even when not stored in the Flash Memory There is no need to use the CALibration STORe TARE command for channels which are recalibrated frequently The HP E1313 E1413 s Flash Memory has a finite lifetime of approximately ten thousand writ
374. ng junction 46 sensing with HP E1313 40 sensing with HP E1413 41 thermocouple 77 REFTEMP 365 Register Based Commands 356 374 ADGAIN 364 ADVRATEL 368 ADVRATEn 367 ADZERO 364 APPENDL 368 APPENDn 368 ARM 373 ASSIGN 369 371 AVERAGE 373 AVGRDGS 358 CARDCAL 364 CARDCAL 365 CVTINIT 372 DSPEEK 374 DSPOKE 374 ERRFLAGS 358 FILTER 359 FILTER 359 LOW LIMIT 359 NEWL 372 372 NO LIMIT 359 NULL 359 PSPEEK 374 READTEMP 365 REFTEMP 365 RESCAL 365 RESIST 365 REVCODE 359 SCBREAD 360 SCBWRITE 360 362 SCPCHAR 372 SCPGAINS 372 SCPTRIGEN 373 SOURCE 366 SPANHI 366 SPANLO 366 STORECAL 26 366 STORETAR 26 366 TAREAPPEND 366 418 E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index TARECAL 367 TARECAL 367 TARENULL 367 TRIGCOUNT 373 UNHOOK 367 LIMIT 359 Register Based Programming 333 384 base address 336 337 card control registers 342 345 346 command reference 356 374 command registers 341 342 356 common capabilities registers 349 control processor states 381 control registers 342 description registers 350 device type register 339 executing commands 378 379 FIFO LSW registers 351 FIFO MSW registers 351 FIFO reading count registers 353 FIFO registers 351 353 FIFO status registers 352 fundamentals 375 gain register 361 362 general register access 377 ID register 338 360 interrupt configuration registers 347 interrupt status registe
375. nnel measurements until another reference temperature value is specified or measured To specify the temperature of a controlled temperature reference panel SENS REF TEMP 50 Reference temp 50 C Now begin scan to measure thermocouples Linki ng Strain Strain measurements usually employ a Strain Completion and Excitation SCP Measurements E1506 and HP E1507 To link channels to strain EU conversions send the SENSe FUNCtion STRain bridge type lt range gt lt ch_list gt command bridge type is not a parameter but is part of the command syntax The following table relates the command syntax to bridge type See the HP E1506 E1507 SCP User s Manual for bridge schematics and field wiring information Command Bridge Type FBENding Full Bending Bridge FBPoisson Full Bending Poisson Bridge FPOisson Full Poisson Bridge HBENding Half Bending Bridge Half Poisson Bridge QUARter Quarter Bridge default The ch list parameter specifies which sense SCP channel s to link to the temperature EU conversion ch list does not specify channels on the Strain Bridge Completion SCP The optional range parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified or set to zero the module uses autorange To link channels 23 through 30 to the quarter bridge strain EU conversion SENS FUNC STR QUAR 9123 130 Uses autorange Us
376. nostic CALibrationTARE OTDetect MODE lt gt Page 188 DIAGnostic CALibrationiTARE OTDetect MODE Page 188 DIAGn os c CHECksum merra dU p EE SUC EYS d Page 189 DIAGnostic COMMand SCPWRITE reg addr reg data Page 189 DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear table range table gt lt list Page 190 DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise table range table block s G ch list Page 191 DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature Page 192 DIAGnostic FLOor CONFigure range G ch list Page 192 DIAGnostic FLO DUMP 2 Ale He ee rur wo BAAS A Page 193 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe intr line ee Page 193 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe Is Page 194 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe enable G ch list Page 194 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe lt gt Page 195 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD reg gt Page 195 DIAGCnostic VERSIONS i6 PY RS fe RID Page 196 BET CH bt EM eee Sr a adeb ueque E OTt Page 197 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt size gt ee Page 199 DATA iusso ep ats Ra Ree EUM Roh dob RUB
377. nput voltage 294 reading rate 293 tare cal offset 294 tare capability 140 182 Measurements averaging 131 132 164 165 background mode 130 connections preferred 43 44 DC volts accuracy 294 linking resistance 73 linking strain 78 241 242 linking temperature 75 linking voltage 73 low noise 36 pacing 226 227 ranges 293 reference temperature 77 78 93 99 resolution 293 RTD 75 243 244 source voltage 177 185 speeds in HP VEE 395 TC 42 temperature 75 thermistor 75 243 244 thermocouple 36 46 76 using left center and right thermistors 97 99 using the center thermistor 95 96 Memory control processor to A24 345 24 address 210 VME bytes allocated 211 VME enabling disabling 212 VME query address 210 VME query bytes allocated 211 VME query readings stored 197 VME query state 212 MEMory Subsystem 209 212 MEM VME ADDRess 210 MEM VME ADDRess 210 MEM VME SIZE 211 MEM VME SIZE 211 MEM VME STATe 212 MEM VME STATe 212 Mode HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 415 asynchronous timer 270 271 querying FIFO 233 selecting FIFO 89 233 synchronous timer 270 271 trigger mode register 354 355 Modifying Terminal Module Circuit 48 Module channel calibration 179 configuring the 15 description 65 querying the 379 380 resetting 376 specifications 203 322 terminal 37 39 42 using with HP VEE 385 400 Mounting HP E1586
378. nt sequence e Related Commands ABORt INITiate commands ROUTe SEQuence DEFine e RST Condition ROUTe SCAN LIST1 Usage ROUT SCAN LIST3 The next scan list executed will be LIST3 220 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 ROUTe NOTES Trigger Idle 1 ROUTe SCAN can only be State INIT CONT OFF i executed while in Trigger Idle State or ON 2 ROUTe SCAN LIST1 LIST4 can be executed any time Initiated State INIT CONT ON TRIG SOUR not IMM Control Process Reads Scan List Number 1 4 Here Trigger counter still less than TRIGger COUNt Waiting For Trigger INIT CONT ON and Tigger E ngger TRIG SOUR IMM Continuous Mode Execute Scan and increment trigger counter Figure 5 3 Event Sequence for ROUTe SCAN Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 221 ROUTe ROUTe SEQuence DEFine ROUTe SEQuence DEFine scan list2 Q ch list defines channel content and sequence for Scan List LIST lt n gt or defines the Scan List sequence for the List of Lists LISTL LISTL allows Automatic Scan List Sequencing Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units scan list discrete string LIST1 LIST2 LIST3 LIST4 LISTL ALL none ch list channel list string for LIST1 21 314 or ALL use 100 163 no
379. ntries in LISTL LISTL will reference the maximum rate group of channels 30 times and the min rate group only once The group that is to be scanned 150 times per second will be referenced 15 times in LISTL every other scan The group that is to be scanned 50 times each second will be referenced 5 times every sixth scan ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 163 Minimum rate group RST default ROUT SEQ DEF LIST2 100 147 150 Hz group ROUT SEQ DEF LIST3 100 131 50 Hz group ROUT SEQ DEF LIST4 100 115 Maximum rate group ROUT SEQ DEF LISTL 4 3 4 3 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 1 So far we have only set relative rates that channels are measured To set an absolute channel scanning rate we must control the interval between execution of scan lists To do this we use the trigger timer so we select the trigger timer as the trigger source TRIG SOUR TIM Trigger source is timer We then set the trigger interval using the TRIGger TIMer PERiod lt trig_interval gt command In our example we said that we want the highest rate channels to be scanned 300 times each second The trigger interval would then need to be 3 3333 msec TRIG TIM 3 3333ms Scan list executed at 300 Hz To minimize time skew between the first and last channel in each scan list we will set the sample timer period as small as possible 10ps SAMP TIM LISTL 10us Channel to channel pacing 10sec Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E14
380. nts Returned Value Numeric 0 through 7 The C SCPI type returned is int16 e Related Commands DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe Usage DIAG INT LIN DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe Enter statement will return 0 through 7 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe enable Q ch list enables and disables the HP E1313 E1413 s Open Transducer Detection capability OTD When Open Transducer Detection is enabled a very high impedance path connects all SCP channels to a voltage source greater than 16 volts If an enabled channel has an open transducer the input signal becomes the source voltage and the channel returns an input over range value The value returned is 9 91 37 ASCID Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable discrete string OFF none ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments Open Transducer Detection is enabled disabled on a whole Signal Conditioning Plug on basis Selecting any channel on an SCP selects all channels on that SCP 8 channels per SCP Related Commands DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE RST Condition DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe OFF Note If OTD is enabled when CAL or CALibration TARE is executed the module will disable OTD wait 1 minute to allow channels to settle perform the calibration and then re enable OTD Usage DIAG OTD STAT ON 100 107 115 123 Select OTD
381. o determine the channel gain settings for each ASSIGNed channel The channel gain settings are used to relate A D output to input voltage for EU conversions and voltage readings Execute SCPGAINS command after establishing channel to EU conversion linkage with the ASSIGN command CVTINIT 042016 This command causes the entire Current Value Table to be loaded with IEEE 754 Not A Number 7FFF FFFF hex 372 M Register Based Programming Appendix D Trigger System Commands ARM custom 040016 This command causes the DSP to load its run time code into fast RAM and pre settle the first channel of the scan list designated in the Next List field of the Scan Control Register The processor then enters the Armed state and indicates that it is ready to accept a scan trigger by asserting the Armed bit in the Scan Status Register The custom parameter should normally contain zero If custom is set to a value of one the Control Processor will load 2k of user code from location 0C0016 in its Data Space RAM in place of the normal run time routine SCPTRIGEN lt enable gt 086016 When enable is one 1 SCP triggers are enabled When zero 0 SCP triggers are disabled TRIGCOUNT count 233016 Sets the number of trigger events that will be accepted The value of count can be 0 to 65535 The default value is 1 Setting count to 0 allows unlimited trigger events to be accepted Debugging Commands AVERAG
382. o every measurement in the scan list Take care that the sample time multiplied by the number of channels in the scan list does not exceed the time between triggers 3 Now run your system and look primarily for low level channel measurements like thermocouples who s DC value changes somewhat If you find channels that respond to this increase in sample period you may also notice that these channels may return slightly quieter measurements as well The extra sample period reduces or removes the affected channels coupling to the value of the channel measured just before it 4 If you see some improvement increase the sample period again and perform another test When you increase the sample period and no improvement is seen you have found the maximum settling delay that any single channel requires 5 If the quality of the measurements does not respond to this increase in sample period then your system was making good measurements without the added settling time Fixing the Problem 1f your system scans fast enough with the increased sample period your problem is solved Your system is only running as fast as the slowest channel allows but if it is fast enough that is acceptable If on the other hand getting quality readings has slowed your scan rate too much there are two other methods that will either separately or in combination have your system making good measurements as fast as possible Amplifier SCPs Amplifier SCPs can remov
383. oard thermistor RT1 Sense RT1 by connecting any sense channels to terminals HTS and LTS REMote Place both J1 jumpers here to route current source to terminals HTI and LTI Connect these terminals to remote thermistor or RTD Sense with any sense channel I II III EL js 9 doS 955 v dos EIH TT rj 58 55 ig Lo zy D 33 2 28 Lo o5 55 5 ST 46 4e ol to o4 35 o5 Le es aa 95 Lo oi cr 58 H od Lo oS L 5 19 ga 38 os Lo oS E EE io o o mm o oT To oT 38 55 MES as ae ag il
384. odule from asserting the SYSFAIL line when the module is reset 376 Register Based Programming Appendix D General Reg ister Any of the A16 registers can be read from while the module is in any state Access see the Control Processor State Diagram on page 381 You should avoid accessing the module s A24 areas other than the CVT while the module is scanning In order to avoid unpredictable results the Scan Control Card Control and Trigger Mode Registers should not be written to unless the module is in the Waiting for Command State To assure this use the following procedure to write to these registers Check Scan Status Register Bit 15 Running Check Scan Status Register Bit 14 Armed Check Status Register Bit 7 Done Figure D 4 General Register Access Appendix D Register Based Programming 377 Executi Ng While some features of the HP E1413 are controlled by writing bit patterns Reg ister Based 0 the various registers described in the previous section other more Commands complex operations are performed by the on board microprocessor Directing the microprocessor to perform these operations involves writing parameter values if necessary to one or more of the Parameter Registers and then writing the register based command op code to the Command Register Execute register based commands according to Figure D 5 START Check Scan Status Register Bit 15 Runn
385. of data as diagrammed in Figure 4 2 The first command allows you to have complete control of the number of readings returned The FIFO commands used are SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt Determine the number of readings in the FIFO Retrieve n_readings from the FIFO SENSe DATA FIFO PART lt n_readings gt With these commands you can determine exactly how many readings are in the FIFO and transfer just that many The program flow is just as described in the General Form of the FIFO Data Retrieval Section earlier Figure 4 2 shows program flow with this command set filled in The example program counted cs on your C SCPI driver tape shows how to retrieve data using controlled reading count Begin Data Retrieval Enough M In FIFO 2 Execute Final Transfer a DATA FIFO PART lt n_readings gt Command SIAT OPER COND Z Measurements N Complete nom NS yes i A Any Readings DATA FIFO COUNt gt M In FIFO 4 Readings gt Execute Final Transfer Command Eee tt Figure 4 2 Controlling Reading Count 104 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Example Command Sequence RST SENS FUNC VOLT DC AUTO 100 163 This is a RST default ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 163 This is a RST default ROUT SCAN LIST1 This is a RST default SAMP TIM LIST1 00001 ARM SOUR IMM TRIG COUN 16384
386. oltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC or an input out of range condition will exist Resistance measurements require the use of Current Source Signal Conditioning Plug ons The excite current parameter excitation current does not control the current applied to the channel to be measured The excite current parameter only passes the setting of the SCP supplying current to channel to be measured The current must have already been set using the OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude command The choices for excite current are 30E 6 or MIN and 488E 6 or MAX excite current may be specified in milliamps ma and microamps ua The CAL command calibrates resistance channels based on Current Source SCP and Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e See Linking Channels to EU Conversion in Chapter 3 for more information e Related Commands OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude CAL 240 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe e RST Condition SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage AUTO 100 163 Usage FUNC RES 30ua 100 105 107 Set channels 0 5 and 7 to convert voltage to resistance assuming current source set to 30 MA use
387. on of the driver is installed LMC Learn Macros Query Returns a quoted string name for each currently defined macro If more than one macro is defined the strings are separated by commas If no macro is defined LMC returns a null string OPC Operation Complete Causes an instrument to set bit 0 Operation Complete Message in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending operations have been completed By enabling this bit to be reflected in the Status Byte Register ESE 1 command you can ensure synchronization between the instrument and an external computer or between multiple instruments Note Do not use OPC to determine when the CALibration SETup or CALibration TARE commands have completed Instead use their query forms CALibration SETup or CALibration TARE OPC Operation Complete Query Causes an instrument to place a 1 into the instrument s output queue when all pending instrument operations are finished By requiring your computer to read this response before continuing program execution you can ensure synchronization between one or more instruments and the computer The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 278 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 PMC NOTE RMC lt name gt RST RST does not affect Common Command Reference Do not use OPC to determine when the CALibration SETup or CALibration TARE commands have completed Instead use their query forms
388. ong term should be stored Offset constants which are measured relatively often would not require non volatile storage Appendix D Register Based Programming 363 ADGAIN range 102016 Generates the Gain Correction Constant for the indicated A D range range is an integer from 1 to 4 where 4 indicates the highest range The hi and lo values of the on board calibration source for the given range must previously have been measured with a transfer quality external voltmeter and the measured values must have been given to the card using the SPANHI and SPANLO commands The following is the recommended command sequence for each range SOURCE range 0 measure source voltage with external voltmeter on autorange SPANLO range Volts msw Volts Isw gt execute range hold function on external voltmeter SOURCE range lt l gt measure source voltage with external voltmeter SPANHI range Volts msw Volts lsw gt ADGAIN range tA The Gain Correction Constant is loaded into the A D subsystem s register file and is kept in CPU data RAM but is not stored in Flash Memory until receipt of a STORECAL command ADZERO 101016 Generates the A D Coarse Offset and the A D Fine Offset correction constants for each A D range based on the card s internal short ADZERO is intended to be executed more frequently than CARDCAL It executes much m
389. onnections Chapter 2 Field Wiring 41 Terminal Module Considerations for TC Measurements Scanning Two Reference Temperature Channels The isothermal characteristics of the HP E1313 E1413 terminal module are crucial for good TC readings and can be affected by any of the following factors 1 The clear plastic cover must be on the terminal module 2 The thin white mylar thermal barrier must be inserted over the terminal module connector HP E1413 only This prevents airflow from the HP E1413 module into the terminal module 3 The terminal module must also be in a fairly stable temperature environment and it is best to minimize the temperature gradient between the HP E1413 module and the terminal module 4 The VXI mainframe cooling fan filters must be clean and there should be as much clear space in front of the fan intakes as possible 5 Recirculating warm air inside a closed rack cabinet can cause a problem if the terminal module is suspended into ambient air that is significantly warmer or cooler If the mainframe recess is mounted in a rack with both front and rear doors closing both doors helps keep the entire HP E1413 at a uniform temperature If there is no front door try opening the back door 6 HP recommends that the cooling fan switch on the back of the HP E1401 Mainframe is in the High position The normal variable speed cooling fan control can make the internal HP E1413 module temperature cycle up and d
390. or 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated e Related Commands CALibration STORe ADC CALibration VALue VOLTage Command Sequence CAL CONF VOLT 0625 ZERO Connect zero voltage reference to Calibration Bus Must wait for CAL CONF VOLT to complete Now measure voltage with external DMM CAL VAL VOLT measured value Inform HP E1413 of measured value CAL CONF VOLT 0625 FSCale Connect full scale voltage reference to Calibration Bus Must for CAL CONF VOLT to complete Now measure voltage with external DMM CAL VAL VOLT measured value Inform HP E1413 of measured value Repeat these activities for each of 4 other ranges 25 1 4 16 CAL STOR ADC Store calibration constants in non volatile memory use only at end of complete cal sequence 178 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 CALibration CALibration SETup CALibration SETup causes the Channel Calibration function to be performed for every module channel The Channel Calibration function calibrates the A D Offset and the Gain Offset for all 64 channels This calibration is accomplished using internal calibration references For more information see CAL on page 275 Comments CALibration SETup performs the same operation as the CAL command except that since it is not a query command it does not tie up the C SCPI driver waiting for response data from the instrument If you have multiple HP E1313 E1413s in your system you
391. or controlling Open Transducer Detect current while performing CALibration TARE operation Comments Returns 0 when OTD current will be turned off during CALibration TARE Returns 1 when OTD current will be left on during CALibration TARE operation The C SCPI type returned is int16 e Related Commands DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE DIAGnostic OTDetect S TATe CALibration TARE RST Condition DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE 0 188 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CHECksum DIAGnostic CHECksum performs a checksum operation on Flash Memory A returned value of 1 indicates that Flash memory contents are correct A returned value of indicates that the Flash Memory is corrupted or has been erased Comments Returned Value Returns 1 or 0 The C SCPI type returned is int16 Checksum Flash Memory return 1 for OK Usage DIAG CHEC 0 for corrupted DIAGnostic COMMand SCPWRITE DIAGnostic COMMand SCPWRITE lt reg_addr gt lt reg_data gt writes data to custom Signal Conditioning Plug on registers Use to control custom SCPs created using the HP E1504 Breadboard SCP Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt reg_addr gt numeric int32 0 65 535 none lt reg_data gt numeric int32 0 65 535 none Comments See the Register Programming Section of your SCP Manual for parameter values
392. ore quickly because it only updates constants associated with the A D Converter offset voltage This command corrects any short term drift due to temperature changes in the A D Converter This command sets the calibration relays to their normal measurement position at its conclusion CARDCAL 100016 CARDCAL calibrates the HP E1413 for gain and offset voltage of the Signal Conditioning Plug ons SCPs Every channel containing in input type SCP is calibrated for every usable A D measurement range If programmable SCPs are present the CARDCAL command calibrates for the present SCP gain and filter settings CARDCAL calibrates the on card current source using the resistor value stored by the RESCAL command CARDCAL then reloads the A D subsystem s register file with the new calibration constants The derived channel constants are valid only for the current SCP module settings If these settings are changed the CARDCAL command should be executed again before making further measurements When execution is complete CARDCAL sets the calibration relays to their normal measurement position 364 Register Based Programming Appendix D Note Apply power to the HP E1413 and allow 1 hour for its temperature to stabilize before issuing the CARDCAL command CARDCAL 103016 Returns the results of the latest CARDCAL command via the Query Response Register base 0816 The meaning of the bits in the response is the same as those in the Error Flag Word
393. ouple Page 304 Thermocouple Type Page 305 306 Thermocouple Type 5 Page 307 308 Thermocouple Type Page 309 310 Reference Thermistor 5 Page 311 312 e Reference RTD 1000 Page 313 e RID ute cedes Mt Page 314 315 Thermistor 22500 Page 316 317 Thermistor 5 Page 318 319 Thermistor 10 Page 320 321 Appendix A Specifications 295 2 3q Type E 200 to 800 filter off 291119 9X LdO 0 14 dH 84 291119 CT 140 ZOSTA dH 191119 11140 IOSIA dH 00008 00009 00 00t 00000 000 00 007 ETET EEEE po TF 00 0 0071 0072 00 00 005 009 0077 0078 006 2 Seg Appendix A 296 Specifications 2 Type E 200 to 800 filter off HP 1508 09 SAO Jol 61 LdO 60618 dH SAO 291119 81 140 80818 dH 00 008 00009 00 00b 00002 000 00 00c 000 050 001 051 00 0 00 00 005 055 009 059 007 05
394. ow the floor SENSe FUNCtion commands When the channel is returned to autorange the autorange floor setting is still in effect e Related Commands DIAGnostic FLOor DUMP SENSe FUNCtion commands RST Condition DIAGnostic FLOor 0 100 163 Usage DIAG FLO 1 100 124 Channel 0 and 24 can autorange no lower than 1 V range DIAGnostic FLOor DUMP DIAGnostic FLOor DUMP sends the autorange floor settings for all 64 channels to the FIFO Comments The format of the values returned from the FIFO with a SENSe DATA command depends on the format chosen by the FORMat DATA command Related Commands DIAGnostic FLOor CONFigure FORMat DATA SENSe FUNCtion commands e RST Condition DIAGnostic FLOor DUMP places 0 values in FIFO for all 64 channels DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe intr line sets the VXIbus interrupt line the module will use Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units intr line numeric int16 0 through 7 none Comments Related Commands DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe Power on and RST Condition DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe 1 Usage DIAG INT LIN 5 Module will interrupt on VXIbus interrupt line 5 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 193 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe returns the V XIbus interrupt line that the module is set to use Comme
395. own which affects the amplifiers with these level signals The following simple command sequence shows linking channels to EU conversions to measure the reference temperature of both of the HP E1313 s terminal modules and to measure thermocouples on the remaining channels Link reference temperature to channels 0 and 32 terminal module I and 2 SENS REF THER 5000 AUTO 100 132 SENS FUNC TEMP Link E type thermocouple measurements to channels I 31 and 33 63 SENS FUNC TEMP TC E AUTO 101 131 133 163 Define scan list I to measure the reference temperature of terminal module 1 Then measure thermocouples on channels I 31 measure the ref temp of terminal module 2 then measure thermocouples on channels 33 63 ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 100 163 Now select LISTI as the current scan list ROUT SCAN LIST1 When the module is triggered it will scan channels 0 through 63 Since the first channel on each terminal module measures the reference temperature of that module the thermocouple measurements that follow will be referenced against the temperature of their respective terminal modules 42 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Preferred Measurement Connections IMPORTANT For any Scanning A D Converter module to scan channels at high speeds it must use a very short sample period 10 second for the HP E1413 If significant normal mode noise is presented to its inputs that noise will be part of the measurement To make quiet ac
396. p you determine if your system presents any of these problems and how best to eliminate them or reduce their effect While the HP E1313 E1413 can autorange measure and convert a reading to engineering units as fast as once every 10 us measuring a high level signal followed by a very low level signal may require some extra settling time As seen from the point of view of the HP E1313 E1413 s Analog to Digital converter and its Range Amplifier this situation is the most difficult to measure For example lets look at two consecutive channels the first measures a power supply at 15 5 volts the next measures a thermocouple temperature First the input to the Range Amplifier is at 15 5 volts near its maximum with any minute capacitances charged accordingly then it immediately is switched to a thermocouple channel and down ranged to its 0625 volt range On this range the resolution is now 1 91 uvolt per Least Significant Bit LSB Because of this sensitivity the time to discharge these minute capacitances may have to be considered 144 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Checking fOr The method we will use to quickly determine if any of your system s Problems channels needs more settling time is to simply apply some settling time to every channel Use this procedure First run your system to make a record of its current measurement performance 2 Then use the SAMPlIe TIMer command to add a significant settling delay t
397. pe returned is int16 Related Commands CALOulate LIMit S TATe CALCulate LIMit LOWer commands CALCulate LIMit UPPer commands Usage CALC LIM FAIL CURR 104 LOWer DATA Return current limit status for channel 4 CALCulate LIMit LOWer DATA lt lower_limit gt lt ch_list gt sets the lower limit value for channels specified in lt ch_list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt lower_limit gt numeric float32 MIN or any valid float32 none ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments Usage CALC LIM LOW DATA 3 75 102 105 A channel s lower limit value must be numerically lower than its upper limit value or an error will be generated when the module is INITiated The lower limit is exceeded when the returned value is less than the value specified by lower limit Related Commands CALCulate LIMit STATe CALOulate LIMit LOWer S TATe CALCulate LIMit UPPer commands RST Condition Lower limit for all channels set to INFinity Sets the lower limit for channels 2 and 5 to 3 75 VDC Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 169 CALCulate CALCulate LIMit LOWer DATA CALCulate LIMit LOWer DATA lt channel gt returns the lower limit value currently set for the channel specified by lt channel gt Parameters Comments Usage Parameter Parameter Range of Default
398. pied into Flash Memory TAREAPPEND channel 311016 Adds channel to the Tare Channel List The Tare Channel List is cleared with the TARENULL command The Tare Channel List is used by the TARECAL command Issue this command repeatedly once for each channel requiring TARECAL 366 Register Based Programming Appendix D Scan List Commands TARECAL 108016 Derives the offset constants necessary to make the channels included in the Tare Channel List read zero Use TAREAPPEND to define the Tare Channel List These values are stored in RAM and loaded into the A D subsystem s register file They are not copied into Flash Memory until receipt of the STORETAR command A CARDCAL command should always be executed before TARECAL in order to decouple internal offsets from external tare offsets TARECAL can also be used for limited range nulling of strain gages One would not normally store the tare constants in this case TARECAL 109016 Returns results of the most recent TARECAL command in the Query Response Register The meaning of bits in the response are the same as the Error Flags see the table on page 358 TARENULL 310016 Clears the Tare Channel List used by the TARECAL command Add channels to the list with TAREAPPEND UNHOOK 400016 Disconnects the Calibration Bus from the connector panel and sets the cal relays to their measure positions The bus is reconnected by a SOURCE or RESIST command Note that the ADZERO and C
399. r Immediate 1 1 X X none selected To support the various trigger modes the correct values must be set in each of the fields of the Trigger Mode Register Below are example settings for the trigger modes supported Sync To support the V XI trigger mode sync the Trigger Mode field is set to Sync and the Trigger Source field set to one of the TTL TRG lines It does not matter what the Trig Out field is set to See the VXI document for more information on this trigger protocol Semi Sync To support the VXI trigger mode Semi sync the Trigger Mode field is set to Semi sync the Trigger Source field set to one of the TTLTRG lines and the Trig Out field set to the same TTLTRG line which was set in the Trigger Source field See the VXI document for more information on this trigger protocol Async To support the VXI trigger mode Async the Trigger Mode field is set to Async the Trigger Source is set to the lower line of a TTL TRG line pair and the Trig Out field is set to the higher line of the TTL TRG line pair See the VXI document for more information on this trigger protocol Appendix D Register Based Programming 355 Output This is not one of the defined VXI trigger protocols This mode is used when it is necessary to trigger other modules in the system when another module has been triggered To set up for this mode the Trigger Mode field is set to Output The Trigg
400. r lt interval gt must allow enough time to scan all channels ROUTe SEQuence DEFine in the active scan list ROUTe SCAN or a 3012 Trigger Too Fast error will be generated during the measurement scan See the Command Reference for TRIGger TIMer PERiod or for timing details To set the Trigger Source to a software trigger TRIGger IMMediate or TRG TRIG SOUR HOLD Trigger on TRIG or TRG To set the trigger source to the external trigger input connection TRIG SOUR EXT An external trigger signal To set the trigger source to the internal trigger interval timer TRIG SOUR TIM Now select ARM SOURce Figure 3 4 shows that when the TRIGger SOURce is or IMMediate with INITiate CONTinuous ON the other trigger sources become arm sources and control when the timer will start or scanning will begin The command to select the arm source is ARM SOURce source The source parameter choices are explained in the following table Parameter Value Source of Arm after INITiate command BUS ARM IMMediate EXTernal Trig signal input on terminal module HOLD ARM IMMediate IMMediate The arm signal is always true scan starts when an INITiate command is received SCP SCP Trigger Bus future HP or SCP Breadboard TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines lt n gt 0 through 7 When TRIGger SOURce is not TIMer or IMMediate with INITiate CO
401. r AUTO When not specified or set to zero the module uses autorange To set channels 0 through 15 to measure voltage using autorange SENS FUNC VOLT DC 0 100 115 0 for range means autorange To set channels 16 and 24 to the 16 volt range and 32 through 47 to the 625 volt range SENS FUNC VOLT DC 16 116 124 SENS FUNC VOLT DC 625 132 147 Must send a command per range or to send both commands in a single command message SENS FUNC VOLT DC 16 116 124 VOLT 625 123 147 When using manual range in combination with amplifier SCPs the EU conversion will try to return readings which reflect the value of the input signal However it is up to you to choose range values that will provide good measurement performance avoiding over ranges and selecting ranges that provide good resolution based on the input signal In general measurements can be made at full speed using autorange Autorange will choose the optimum A D range for the amplified signal level To link channels to the resistance EU conversion send the SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt command Resistance measurements assume that there is at least one Current Source SCP installed eight current sources per SCP See Figure 3 2 The excite current parameter is used only to tell the EU conversion what the Current Source SCP channel is now set to Excite current is specified in ADC and the choices for the HP E
402. r Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt range gt numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments below lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none Comments There are rare circumstances when it is difficult for the HP E1313 E1413 to autorange correctly The module selects the range depending on the input signal before the actual measurement is made on the selected channel If during that time period the input signal becomes greater than the selected range can handle the module returns an overflow reading INFinity By locking out that range and lower range for this channel the module continues to autorange and avoid the overflow reading condition e The range parameter The HP E1313 E1413 has the five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1313 E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 causes anerror Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625 VDC 192 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 DIAGnostic e Once achannel s autorange floor is set by DIAGnostic FLOor it remains until reset by another DIAGnostic FLOor command or by a RST command A channel with an autorange floor can be manually ranged bel
403. r an input out of range condition will exist Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 243 SENSe The sub type parameter values of 85 and 92 differentiate between 100 Ohm 0 C RTDs with temperature coefficients of 0 00385 and and 0 00392 Ohm Ohm C respectively The sub type values of 2250 5000 and 10000 refer to thermistors that match the Omega 44000 series temperature response curve These 44000 series thermistors are selected to match the curve within 0 1 or 0 2 C For thermistors sub type may be specified in Kohms kohm The sub type EEXTended applies to E type thermocouples at 800 C and above CUSTom is pre defined as Type K with no reference junction compensation reference junction assumed to be at 0 C The CAL command calibrates temperature channels based on Current Source SCP and Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again e This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands CAL OUTPut CURRent for RTDs and Thermistors SENSe REFerence and SENSe REFerence TEMPerature for Thermocouples e RST Condition SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage AUTO 100 163 Usage Link first 20 channels to the K type thermocouple temperature conversion SENS FUNC TEMP TCOUPLE K 100 119 Link channel 20 to measure reference te
404. r limit 172 enable register bits 255 260 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 421 logical address switch 16 17 lowest autorange 192 measurement pacing 226 NTF register bits 256 261 operation summary bits 255 OTD current 188 PTF register bits 257 262 questionable summary bits 260 reference temperature measurement 77 78 sample timer 85 scan trigger intervals 273 SCP current source 71 SCP filter cutoff 71 204 SCP gains 70 372 See also Selecting signal conditioning plug ons 70 71 trigger counter 88 trigger system 86 88 VXlIbus interrupt level 15 347 interrupt line 193 Settling delay for specific channels 146 time 144 146 waits reducing 144 146 Shielded Wiring 401 Shunt adding resistance 216 query resistance 216 Signal Conditioning Plug ons amplifier using 145 and the terminal module 37 breadboard SCP 195 channel SCP registers 361 362 cutoff frequency 71 gain register 361 362 grouping channels to signal conditioning 34 ID register 360 identifying installed SCPs 264 installing 18 25 mixing output and sense SCPs 35 open transducer detect OTD 141 output versus sense 35 power available 293 programmable filter channel 206 query amplifier gain 207 query current source 214 query current state 215 query filter cutoff 205 registers required 360 362 scale register 361 sense versus output 35 setting amplifier gain 207 setting current source 71 213 setting f
405. r receiving 4 data bytes 0 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt NL END gt Optional Parameters shown within square brackets are optional Parameters parameters Note that the brackets are not part of the command and should not be sent to the instrument If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value For example consider the FORMat DATA lt type gt lt length gt command If you send the command without specifying length a default value for length will be selected depending on the type of format you specify For example FORMat DATA ASC will set lt ength gt to the default for ASC of 7 FORMat DATA REAL will set lt ength gt to the default for REAL of 32 FORMat DATA REAL 64 will set lt length gt to 64 Be sure to place a space between the command and the parameter 156 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Linking Commands Linking commands is used when you want to send more than one complete command in a single command statement Linking IEEE 488 2 Common Commands with SCPI Commands Use a semicolon between the commands For example RST OUTPutTTLTrg3 ON TRIG SOUR IMM TRG Linking Multiple complete SCPI Commands Use both a semicolon and a colon between the commands For example OUTPut TTLTrg2 ON TRIG SOUR EXT The semicolon as well as separating commands tells the SCPI parser to expect the command keyword following t
406. rce is shown on the previous pages This program is included with your C SCPI driver tape file name verif cs The program uses the IDN query command to verify the HP Scanning A D Converter module is operational and responding to commands The program also has an error checking function check_error It is important to include an instrument error checking routine in your programs particularly your first trial programs so you get instant feedback while you are learning about the HP E1313 E1413 After you run the C SCPI preprocessor and then compile and load this program type verif to run the example 32 Getting Started Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Field Wiring About This Chapter Note Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 This chapter shows how to plan and connect field wiring to the HP E1313 E1413 s terminal module The chapter explains proper connection of analog signals to the HP E1413 both two wire voltage type and four wire resistance type measurements Connections for other measurement types for example strain using the Bridge Completion SCPs refer to the specific SCP manual in the SCP Manuals section Chapter contents include e Planning Your Wiring Page 33 e Terminal Modules Page 37 Reference Temperature Sensing with the HPE1313 Page 40 Reference Temperature Sensing with the HPE1413 Page 41
407. re 3 EUR bon dbo ewe SOR eS 233 BICTerELPASSIESTATG uim 6 keen Rote d eem a 235 HP E1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module Contents 5 SENS amp FIETei LPASSIESTATe uuo oo ee Rae RR RO ORS 236 SEIN SG PUNCHES TOW RE KE OR RE amp 236 SENSE amp PUNGCOoOn CUSTOoncRBBerence ou OO 3 RR 237 SENSe FUNCtiom CUSTom TCouple e as 4542054 bee xw 238 240 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBENding 2 241 e ee 5959 243 SENSe JFUNCtion i ORO bee ee 245 SENSE REPEC iu d e US Ie ode Oe ee ae ES 246 SENSE REPerence TEMPerat te i e sm oo Rmo REX Og 247 SENSE STRattG EXCHABOD uos oom eee oo oe Re o Re 248 SENSE usado v dore X 8 ee AU RR OES 248 SENSe 225 2 2 52 2 5 5 4 249 SENSe STRainsGPACtor eR eR RR S 249 SENSE IS TRA PONNS Awe ee ke RR 250 SENSE STRamn POISSON an 2c 3 Ro eo ee REE AS SSS RO 250 8 Trained soe 4 048 6 844828 bb n A ee 25 e 25 SIAN A UP RA EOS ELE Se EO A A do d 232 STA Tus OPERAM CR OR 254 STATUS OPERatioGmENABle
408. re cal offset SCP Gain 1 Maximum tare offset depends on A D range and SCP gain A D range 16 4 1 0 25 0 0625 V F Scale Max Offset 3 2213 82101 23061 07581 03792 Measurement accuracy 90 days 23 C 1 C with CAL done after 1 hr warm up and CAL ZERO DC Volts within 5 min For HP E1313 multiply Noise Spec by 1 4 NOTE When autorange in ON for readings lt 3 8V add 0 02 to linearity specifications for readings gt 3 8V add 0 05 to linearity specifications A D range Linearity Offset Error Noise Noise V F Scale of reading 3 sigma 3 sigma 0625 0 01 5 3 uV 18 uV 8 uV 25 0 01 10 3 uV 45 uV 24 uV 1 0 01 31 uV 110 uV 90 uV a 2 122 uV 450 uV 366 uV i 488 uV 1 8 1 5 mV SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe ON min sample time 145 5 Temperature Coefficients Gain 10ppm C Offset 0 40 C 14uV C 40 55 C 8uV 38uV C 94 Specifications Appendix A Temperature Accuracy The following pages have temperature accuracy graphs that include instrument and firmware linearization errors The linearization algorithm used is based on the IPTS 68 78 standard transducer curves Add your transducer accuracy to determine total measurement error The thermocouple graphs on the following pages include only the errors due to measuring the voltage output of the thermocouple as well as the algorithm errors due to converting the thermocouple voltage to temperature To this e
409. re controlled by the on board control processor The driver is required to setup the type of measurement to be run and to unload data from the card after it has been acquired Once the INITiate IMMediate or INITiate CONTinuous ON commands are given the HP E1313 E1413 is initiated and all functions of the trigger system and acquisition are controlled by its on board control processor The driver returns to waiting for user commands No interrupts are required for the HP E1313 E1413 to complete its measurement 130 Understanding the HP 1313 1413 Chapter 4 While the module is measuring the driver can be queried for its status and data can be read from the FIFO and CVT One command can be given which changes the measurement setup that is the scan list can be changed using ROUTe SEQuence DEFine The INITiate CONTinuous OFF command may also be given to force a continuous measurement to complete Any other changes to the measurement setup will not be allowed until the measurement completes or an ABORt command is given Of course any commands or queries can be given to other instruments while the HP E1313 E1413 is actively measuring Averaging Readings Special Considerations The HP E1313 E1413 provides on board averaging of readings When you set averaging ON CALCulate AVERage STATe ON a reading returned from the FIFO and or CVT represents the average of two or more measurements on that channel Enabling averaging enables aver
410. remote isothermal reference block Thermal voltage is generated along the entire length of a thermocouple pair where there is any temperature gradient along that length To CALibration TARE thermocouple wire this way would introduce an unwanted offset in the voltage temperature relationship for that thermocouple If you inadvertently CALibration TARE a thermocouple wire pair see Resetting CALibration TARE on page 139 You should use CALibration TARE to compensate wiring offsets copper wire not thermocouple wire between the HP E1313 E1413 and a remote thermocouple reference block Disconnect the thermocouples and introduce copper shorting wires between each channel s HI and LO then execute CALibration TARE for these channels Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt ch_list gt channel list string 100 163 none Comments CALibration TARE also performs the equivalent of a CAL operation This operation uses the Tare constants to set a DAC which will remove each channel offset as seen by the module s A D converter As an example assume that the system wiring to channel 0 generates a 0 1 Volt offset with 0 Volts a short applied at the Unit Under Test UUT Before CALibration TARE the module would return a reading of 0 1 Volts for channel 0 After CALibration TARE 100 the module will return a reading of Volts with a short applied at the UUT and the system wiri
411. riate channels using the DIAGnostic CUSTom PlECewise command Since thermocouple EU conversion requires a reference junction compensation of the raw thermocouple voltage the custom EU table is 136 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 linked to the channel s using the command SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple type range Q ch list The type parameter specifies the type of thermocouple wire so that the correct built in table will be used for reference junction compensation Reference junction compensation is based on the reference junction temperature at the time the custom channel is measured For more information see Thermocouple Reference Compensation on page 142 Custom Reference HP E1313 E1413 can measure reference junction temperatures using Tem perature EU custom characterized RTDs and thermistors The custom EU table Conversions generated for the individually characterized transducer is loaded to the appropriate channel s using the DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise command Since the EU conversion from this custom EU table is to be considered the reference junction temperature the channel is linked to this EU table using the command SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt This command uses the custom EU conversion to generate the reference junction temperature as explained in the section Thermocouple Reference Compensation on page 142 Creating Convers
412. rigger Counter TRIGger COUNt count Figure 5 5 Logical Trigger Model The ARM system only exists while TRIGger SOURce is or while the Continuous Mode is set TRIGger SOURce IMMediate and INITiate CONTinuous ON When neither of the above conditions are true SCPI compatibility requires that ARM SOURce be set to IMMediate or Error 221 Settings conflict will be generated 266 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 TRIGger Event Sequence Figure 5 6 shows how the module responds to various trigger arm configurations Trigger Idle State INIT IMM wor ON Set C ScanL urrent v Initiated State Waiting For Arm Arm Event Reset and Start Timer ist Here Continuous Mode no RIG SOUR TIMer no 4 no TIMer MODE SYNC no LRIG SOUR TIM INIT CONT ON yes Stop Timer Set Current Scan List Here Trig Counter Waiting For Trigger Trigger no TRIG COUNT2 Continuous Execute Scan and Increment Trig Counter yes MODE NOTES Continuous Mode INIT CONT ON and TRIG SOUR IMM Subsystem Syntax Figure 5 6 Trigger Scan Sequence Diagram TRIGger COUNIt trig count COUNt IMMediate SOURCe source SOURce TIMer mode MODE PERiod
413. rigger cycles occur and the instrument returns to the Trigger Idle state ROUTe SCAN LIST1 through LIST4 specifies which of four scan lists to execute INITiate IMMediate clears the FIFO and Current Value Table If a trigger event is received before the instrument is initiated Error 211 Trigger ignored error is generated If another trigger event is received before the instrument has completed the current trigger cycle measurement scan the Questionable Data Status bit 9 is set and Error 3012 Trigger too fast error is generated Sending INITiate IMMediate while the system is still in the Wait for Trigger state already INITiated will cause Error 213 Init ignored Sending the ABORt command will immediately send the trigger system to the Trigger Idle state and terminate any scan in progress Related Commands ABORt TRIGger RST Condition Trigger system is in the Idle state Usage Both versions same function INITiate IMMediate Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 203 INPut INPut The INPut subsystem controls configuration of programmable input Signal Conditioning Plug Ons SCPs Subsystem Syntax INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuenoy lt cutoff_freq gt lt ch_list gt FREQuency lt channel gt STATe lt enable lt channel gt STATe lt channel gt GAIN lt chan_gain gt lt ch_list gt GAIN lt channel gt LOW lt wvolt_type gt
414. rolled ice point reference junction Reference temperature is measured during a scan by defining a channel to be a temperature reference channel using the SENSe REFerence command then including that channel in the scan list sequence before the thermocouple channels 142 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 3 For example to use the 5K thermistor built into the HP E1413 66510 terminal block do the following a Connect the built in thermistor to a channel s input terminals on the terminal block In this example we will use channel 0 Connect wires from the terminal labeled HTS to the terminal labeled HOO and connect a wire from the terminal labeled LTS to the terminal labeled L00 b Be sure the HP E1413 s current source is connected to excite the on board 5K thermistor This requires the two jumpers at JM1 to be in the on board position not the REMote position see Figure 2 11 on page 46 for the HP E1313 or Figure 2 12 on page 47 for the HP E1413 c Define channel 0 to be a 5K thermistor reference temperature channel This requires the command SENSe REFerence THER 5000 100 d Put Channel 0 into the scan list before any thermocouple channels Do this using the ROUTe SEQuence DEFine command Each time channel 0 is measured a new value for the reference temperature will be stored in the HP E1413 and used for the thermocouple channels that follow in the scan list The measured reference temp
415. rror must be added the error due to measuring the reference junction temperature with an RTD or a 5K thermistor See the graphs for the RTD or the 5K thermistor to determine this additional error Also the errors due to gradients across the isothermal reference must be added If an external isothermal reference panel is used consult the manufacturer s specifications If HP termination blocks are used as the isothermal reference see the notes below NOTE 1 When using the Terminal Module as the isothermal reference add 0 6 C to the thermocouple accuracy specs to account for temperature gradients across the Terminal Module The ambient temperature of the air surrounding the Terminal Module must be within 2 C of the temperature of the inlet cooling air to the VXI mainframe 2 When using the E1586 Rack Mount Terminal Panel as the isothermal reference add 0 2 C to the thermocouple accuracy specs to account for temperature gradients across the E1586 The E1586A should be mounted in the bottom part of the rack below and away from other heat sources for best performance The temperature graphs are found on the following pages Thermocouple Type E 200 to 800 Page 296 297 Thermocouple Type 0 8009 Page 298 299 Thermocouple Type Page 300 301 Thermocouple Type J Page 302 303 Thermoc
416. rrupt gt List E DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe 5 IstS 9 Scan m qe List 1 ROUTe SCAN Son 2 4 List2 ROUTe SEQuence DEFine Eds A E ROUTe SEQuence POINts Eum 5 a Lista STATus Scan A dista Error scan complete Queue Y Current SENSe CVTable SYSTem ERRor Value SENSe CVTable RESet readings Table gt Control Processor gt Formatter FIFO CALC AVER Reading FORMat DATA IN Tiate IMMediate A CALC CLIM 64K ATE INITiate CONTinuous CALC LIM 10 D RESet Channel Function 2 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE an T pefnton amp SCPI CSCPI Driver List SENSe FUNCtion HP E1313 NOTE ONLY WHILE is ON Most B Size Mainframes an TRIG SOUR is IMM do not support VXIbus 6 ARM SOURce TTLTRG lines TRIGger TIMer MODE gt 4 _______ Trigger ap Timer 55 TO TRIGger SOURce lt SCPI FTRigger ugon D vits lt 05 LIMit TRIGger Y ap lt EXTernal Trigger 9 HOLD TTLTrg Source rc Enable lt 50 lt Selector ES a i IMMediate o OUTPut TRIGger SOURce lt TTLTrg lt n gt 8 lines lt SCP Trigger TTLTrg Output Trigger Counter Selector TRIGger IMMediate
417. rs 347 348 offset register 341 parameter registers 342 356 programming sequence 382 384 querying the module 379 380 register addressing 336 required registers 338 resetting the module 376 response registers 341 scale register 361 scan registers 342 scan status registers 342 software trigger ARM register 353 subclass registers 351 table of registers 335 trigger mode register 354 355 trigger system registers 353 355 trigger timer register 353 virtual instrument registers 349 351 VXI control register 340 VXI status register 339 340 channel SCP registers 361 362 common capabilities register 349 condition register 123 condition register reading 128 control register 342 decimal weighted bit values 253 description register 350 device type register 339 enable register clearing 127 enable register command ESE 277 enable register query ESE 277 enable register query bits set 255 260 enable register setting bits 255 260 enable register status byte group 128 event register 256 261 event register clearing 128 276 event register reading 128 FIFO registers 351 353 gain register 361 362 general register access 377 ID register 338 360 interrupt configuration register 347 interrupt status register 347 348 interrupt system register 347 348 map 336 NTF register 256 257 261 262 Offset register 341 PTF register 257 258 262 263 query response 341 356 re
418. rsion fastest REAL Same as above REAL 64 Means real 64 bit readings converted ASCii 7 Means 7 bit ASCII readings converted ASCii Same as above the RST condition To specify that readings are to remain in IEEE 32 bit floating point format for fastest transfer rate FORM DATA REAL 32 To specify that readings are to be converted to 7 bit ASCII and returned as a 15 character per reading comma separated list FORM DATA ASC 7 The RST TST and power on default format or FORM DATA ASC 88 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Step 8 Selecting the FIFO Mode The HP E1313 E1413 s FIFO can operate in two modes Blocking The FIFO stops accepting readings when it becomes full 65 024 readings Readings made after FIFO is full are discarded The first reading to exceed 65 024 sets the STATus QUEStionable CONDition bit 10 FIFO Overflowed and an error message is put in the error queue read with SYSTem ERRor command Overwrite When FIFO fills the oldest readings in the FIFO are overwritten by the newest readings Only the latest 65 024 readings are available The differences in these two modes is only significant if the rate of retrieving data from the FIFO is slower than the reading rate of the A D To set the FIFO mode blocking is the RST power on condition SENS DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK Select blocking mode SENS DATA FIFO MODE OVER Select overwrite mode Step 9 Initiating the Trigger System The commands
419. rsion tables are loaded directly into a channel s Table RAM Segment using the DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear and DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise commands The DIAGnostic CUSTom commands can specify multiple channels To link custom conversions to their tables you would execute the SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt command Unlike standard EU conversions the custom EU conversions are already linked to their channels tables loaded before you execute the SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom command but the command allows you to specify the A D range for these channels The RST command clears all channel Table RAM segments Custom EU conversion tables must be reloaded using the DIAGnostic CUSTom commands The HP E1313 E1413 uses two types of EU conversion tables linear and piecewise The linear table describes the transducer s response slope and offset y mx b The piecewise conversion table gets its name because it is actually an approximation of the transducer s response curve in the form of 512 linear segments whose end points fall on the curve Data points that fall between the end points are linearly interpolated The built in EU conversions for thermistors thermocouples and RTDs use this type of table The HP E1313 E1413 can measure temperature using custom characterized thermocouple wire of types E J K N R S and T The custom EU table generated for the individual batch of thermocouple wire is loaded to the approp
420. rst large arrow is the arming event Example Command Sequence ROUT SEQ DEF LIST lt n gt 101 103 105 107 lt n gt can be 1 4 ROUT SCAN LIST lt n gt n can be 1 4 SAMP TIM 115 lt gt lt gt tc can be 10 5 to 32 768ms TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM PER fp tp can be Ims 6 5536 s TRIG COUN count count can be 1 32768 or INF ARM SOUR source source can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM or TTLTYgO TTLTrg7 INIT IMM Starting ARM event either hardware or software Acquisition starts Stopping Before Trigger Count is Reached TRIG SOUR HOLD Stops at end of scan list still initiated TRIG IMM One more scan now idle Or Stops immediately must use ABORt ABOR if TRIG COUNt is INF 112 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Sequenced Scan Lists et ce V o M 1 45 lil LIST2 This mode uses the Automatic Scan List Sequencing feature also known as List of Lists Here 2 to 4 scan lists are defined with channels up to 1 024 channel numbers each then these scan lists are executed in the sequence specified in the List of Lists LISTL When LISTL is controlling the sequencing of the scan lists 1 through 4 each scan list specified in LISTL must contain at least 6 channels In the example we scan channels 1 through 6 on every scan but only scan channels 7 through 9 every other scan 2 3 4 1234
421. rted readings and 16 voltage readings The CVT will contain a converted reading for channels 0 through 15 After using ROUTe SEQuence DEFine use SENSe FUNCtion commands to set each channel to a specific function and range Related Commands ROUTe SCAN e RST Condition Scan List 1 100 163 Scan Lists 2 through 4 have channels assigned to them Usage ROUT SEQ DEF LIST2 100 131 EU conversion to both FIFO and CVT standard ROUT SEQ DEF ALL 100 131 Same channels and conversion as above but to all four Scan Lists ROUT SEQ DEF LIST1 2 00 31 Voltage readings to both FIFO and CVT relative channel specification using Channel Modifier Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 223 ROUTe ROUTe SEQuence DEFine ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt scan_list gt lt mode gt When scan list is 4571 LISTA returns either the sequence of channels or the sequence of Channel Data Modifiers for Scan List LIST lt n gt When scan list is LISTL returns the sequence of scan list numbers Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units scan list discrete string LIST1 LIST2 LIST3 LIST4 LISTL none mode discrete string CHANnel MODifier none Comments The default for mode is CHAN When lt scan_list gt is LIST1 LIST4 and lt mode gt is CHAN ROUTe SEQuence DEFine returns the sequence of channels assigned to lt sca
422. rupt LINe DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe FORMaf DATA ee FORMat DATA di 174 E TEE 179 eee eee doe deed a 201 4 HPE1313A E1413C High Speed A D Module Contents INPutHILTeq ILPASSEBREQueney amp 9 om o RR M n 205 INPatFILTSq LPASSIESUATS cu uuu RR hb EORR EORR 206 IJNPUuCPIL Ter osa RR RO EEE S 206 INPUCOADN ooo doter de e oec oe d e de Rd OR de 9 207 IN POA iiu aou he 207 uva eo OS EGE DEE ERS SE eX Ed Ned WEE OO RS 208 INF CLO ou d gcc qb ee Ch Cee Bee ep eb ee Re ee 208 MENY bd dede det 209 MEMoty VMEADDRES 008 24 RO x ROCA OR EURO RR 210 MENGE VNMEGADIDRESS cou ae RE RR RRS RS COEUR RO 210 211 MEMO 211 MEMON GRE DRS OR RR ow 212 VMESTEATG7 222 22 55 212 255 REOR ERK ORT 213 OUDTPutCURRBeutAMPLaude saire 444404 RR RES 213 ODTPurEt o poe a aca 46 4 8 214 OUTPUtCURBenSLATe 24 2k RERO ER 995 EROR RR ER 215 46e ERR EECR G3 we 215 DOUTPUESHUNIDSTAIS use e te de ette ee CE Hte e eJ 216 OUTPUCSHUNILSTA Tee 216 TIL SOURCE o o 3699
423. s Error 222 Data out of range Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange range may be specified in millivollts mv e If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal voltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC or an input out of range condition will exist 246 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe e The sensor type parameter specifies the sensor type that will be used to determine the temperature of the isothermal reference panel sensor type CUSTom is pre defined as Type E with 0 C reference junction temperature and is not re defineable The user is responsible for providing an E type thermocouple with 0 reference junction For sensor type THERmistor the sub type parameter may be specified in ohms or kohm The CAL command calibrates resistance channels based on Current Source SCP and Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settin
424. s command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Related Commands CALibration SETup CALibration SETup CALibration STORe ADC Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 275 Common Command Reference CLS Note If Open Transducer Detect OTD is enabled when CAL is executed the module will disable OTD wait 1 minute to allow channels to settle perform the calibration and then re enable OTD If your program turns off OTD before executing CAL it should also wait 1 minute for settling Clear Status Command The CLS command clears all status event registers Standard Event Status Event Register Standard Operation Status Event Register Questionable Data Event Register and the instrument s error queue This clears the corresponding summary bits bits 3 5 and 7 in the Status Byte Register CLS does not affect the enable bits in any of the status register groups The SCPI command STATus PRESet does clear the Operation Status Enable and Questionable Data Enable Registers CLS disables the Operation Complete function command and the Operation Complete Query function OPC command DMC lt gt lt data Define Macro Command Assigns or sequence of commands to named macro The command sequence may be composed of SCPI and or Common Commands lt name gt may be the same as a SCPI command but may not be the sa
425. s mask bits in the Negative Transition Filter NTF Register Returns value of bits set in the NTF Register Sets mask bits in the Positive Transition Filter PTF Register Returns value of bits set in the PTF Register Presets both the Operation and Questionable Enable registers to 0 Questionable Data Status Group Bit assignments 8 Calibration Lost 9 Trigger Too Fast 10 Overflowed 11 Over voltage 12 VME Memory Overflow 13 Setup Changed Returns state of Questionable Status signals Bits set to 1 enable status events to be summarized into Status Byte Returns the decimal weighted sum of bits set in the Enable Register Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 287 Command Quick Reference SCPI Command Quick Reference IMMediate SOURce BUSIEXTI HOLD IMM TIMer TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce TIMer MODE ASYNchronous SYNChronous MODE PERiod trig interval PERiod Command Description 7 Returns weighted sum of bits that represent Questionable Data events NTRansition transition mask Sets mask bits in the Negative Transition Filter NTF Register NTRansition Returns value of bits set in the NTF Register PTRansition transition mask Sets mask bits in the Positive Transition Filter PTF Register PTRansition Returns value of bits set in the PTF Register SYSTem CTYPe lt channel gt Returns the identification of the
426. s the actual gail for each channel If SCALE is a positive value then the gain is 1 or greater if SCALE is negative then the gain is 0 1 Channel Registers CHN bit 1 Gain Register Read Write regaddr 01 pppccc0012 ppp SCP plug on number 0 7 ccc SCP channel number 0 7 15 4 3 0 do not care Gain Only the low 4 bits of this register are significant They consist of an unsigned integer 0 lt CHGAIN lt 15 This number in combination with SCALE describes how voltage measurements on the particular channel should be translated into actual volts This is described in the following paragraph CHGAIN may be fixed or it may be programmable See the individual SCP Reference Manual for details Channel Gain Channel gain is computed as a LEFT SHIFT value obtained by multiplying channel gain bit value by the value in the Plug on Scale Register The resultant value is the channel s base two gain exponent For each channel compute SHIFT SCALE CHGAIN This is the number of binary left shifts represented by the gain or attenuation through the SCP The actual channel gain may then be computed as GAIN 23HIFT Appendix D Register Based Programming 361 Example 1 If an SCP module has SCALE 0010b and CHGAIN programmable then when CHGAIN 0000 the channel has unity gain SHIFT 0 When CHGAIN 0001b the channel has a gain of x4 SHIFT 2 When CHGAIN 0010b the channel has a
427. s whether measurement averaging is enabled ON or disabled OFF Notes 1 When CALCulate AVERage STATe is ON an individual channel number must appear in a scan list only once and use of LISTL in not allowed 2 When CALCulate AVERage STATe is ON channels must use manual ranging Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable discrete string ON OFF none Comments When averaging is on each channel in the scan list s is measured a number of times as set by CALCulate AVERage COUNt The average of those measurements becomes the reading stored for that channel Related Commands CALCulate AVERage COUNt CALCulate AVERage STATe e RST Condition CALCulate AVERage STATe OFF Usage CALC AVER ON Averaging for all scanned channels is ON CALCulate AVERage STATe CALCulate AVERage STATe returns a 1 if averaging is on or a O if averaging is off Comments Returned Value Numeric value either 1 or 0 The C SCPI type returned is int16 Related Commands CALCulate AVERage STATe CALCulate AVERage COUNt Usage CALC AVER A subsequent enter statement will return 0 or 1 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 165 CALCulate CALCulate CLIMits F AIL CUMulative CALCulate CLIMits FAIL CUMulative returns the composite limit test status for all channels measured since the module was INITiated CUMulative Comments If any channel has
428. sation quick reference SCPI commands 284 288 thermocouple reference 142 143 243 244 register based 358 374 Components adding to terminal module 48 RMC 279 Condition Register ROUTe subsystem 220 225 operation status group 128 RST 279 outputs 123 410 E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index query bits 254 259 questionable data group 128 reading 128 Configuration query LO input 208 verifying success 32 Configuring HP Scanning A D Converter 15 transition filters 123 Conformity declaration HP E1313A 11 HP E1413C 12 Connecting external multimeter 177 184 185 HP E1586A rack mount terminal panel 61 on board resistor 177 on board thermistor 46 47 voltage reference 177 Connections guard 402 recommended 43 44 signals to channels 43 44 thermistor 93 99 Connectors crimp and insert 56 57 faceplate pin out 63 64 option A3F pin out 59 60 Continuous Scanning Mode 110 111 115 202 269 Control processor memory to A24 345 register 342 register VXI 340 Control Processor 130 331 states 381 Controlling data conversion 108 data destination 108 Conversion EU 331 EU linear tables 136 EU linking channels to 72 80 136 241 247 EU piecewise tables 136 EU reference temperature 137 237 EU thermocouple 136 238 239 EU using ASSIGN 369 371 strain bridge readings 248 251 Cooling Requirements 293 Counted Scanning Mode 109 110 Crimp and Insert accessories 57 contacts 57 extra
429. se and forcing all the noise voltage to be dropped across the winding The common mode noise at the input amplifier side of the winding is forced to 0 volts by virtue of the low impedance connection to the HP E1413 ground via the selectable short or parallel combination of 1 and 0 1 uF The short cannot be used in situations where there is a very high common mode voltage DC and or AC that could generate very large shield currents The tight coupling through the transformer windings into the signal Hi and Lo leads forces the common mode noise at the input amplifier side of those windings to 0 volts This achieves the 110 dB to 10 MHz desired keeping the high frequency common mode noise out of the amplifier thus preventing the amplifier from rectifying this into an offset error This effectively does the same thing the shielded twisted pair cable does only better It is especially effective if the shield connection to the HP E1413 ground cannot be a very low impedance due to large DC and or low frequency common mode voltages The tri filar transformers do not limit the differential normal mode signal bandwidth Thus removing the requirement for slowly varying signal 404 Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods Appendix F voltages The nature of the tri filar transformer or more accurately common mode inductor is that it provides a fairly high impedance to common mode signals and a quite low impedance to differential mode sig
430. see TRIGger TIMer MODE on page 270 Select Trigger Timer A one 1 selects the Trigger Timer as the trigger source The Trig Arm Source becomes the Trigger Timer Arm Source A zero 0 selects the trigger source as set by the Trig Arm source bits Trigger Out The Trig Out field is used to select one of the TTL TRG trigger for the trigger system to source Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Trigger Output 0 0 0 TTLTRGO 0 0 1 TTLTRG1 0 1 0 TTLTRG2 0 1 1 TTLTRG3 1 0 0 TTLTRG4 1 0 1 TTLTRG5 1 1 0 TTLTRG6 1 1 1 TTLTRG7 354 Register Based Programming Appendix D Using the Trigger Mode Register Trig Mode The Trig Mode field is used to select the trigger protocol Bit 5 Bit 4 Trigger Output 0 0 Synchronous 0 1 Semi synchronous 1 0 Asynchronous 1 1 Output Trig Arm Source The Trig Arm Source field is used to select the trigger or Arm source When Bit 9 Select Trigger Timer is set to 0 the sources in the following table are the trigger sources When Bit 9 is set to 1 timer is trigger source the following become ARM sources for the Trigger Timer Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Trigger Arm Source 0 0 0 0 TTLTRGO 0 0 0 1 TTLTRG1 0 0 1 0 TTLTRG2 0 0 1 1 TTLTRG3 0 1 0 0 TTLTRG4 0 1 0 1 TTLTRG5 0 1 1 0 TTLTRG6 0 1 1 1 TTLTRG7 1 0 0 0 Software 1 0 0 1 External 1 0 1 0 SCP 1 0 1 1 Trigge
431. sh Memory 331 access disabling 26 28 calibration storage 180 checksum operation 189 life expectancy 139 180 182 protect jumper 180 query firmware version 196 Format common commands 153 SCPI commands 153 FORMat Subsystem 199 201 FORM DATA 88 199 200 FORM DATA 201 Full Bending Bridge 78 241 242 Full Bending Poisson Bridge 78 241 242 Full Poisson Bridge 78 241 242 G Gage Factor 249 Gain channel calibration 275 registers 361 362 Gains changing after CAL TARE 140 182 setting SCP 70 207 372 General Register Access 377 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index 413 GET Command 269 Get Macro Query GMC 277 Getting Started 15 32 Glossary 331 332 GMC 277 Guard Connections 402 H Half Bending Bridge 78 241 242 Half Poisson Bridge 78 241 242 HF Common Mode Filter 62 HP E1313 declaration of conformity 11 faceplate connector pin out 63 flash memory protect switch 27 input protect jumper 27 logical address switch 16 option A3E 56 57 option A3E accessories 57 option A3F 58 59 61 62 93 99 option A3F accessories 62 reference temperature sensing 40 SCPs installing 18 21 temperature sensing 46 terminal module layout 38 terminal module map 54 terminal module options 56 59 61 62 terminal module wiring 52 thermistor 46 using with HP VEE 385 400 HP E1413 adding terminal module components 48 attaching terminal module 52 declaration of conformity 12
432. sistances greater than 8 000 Ohms and set channels 16 20 and 24 through 31 to measure resistances less than 8K in this case paired to current source SCP channels 32 through 57 OUTP CURR AMPL 30e 6 132 147 Set 16 channels to output for 8KQ or greater resistances SENS FUNC RES 30e 6 100 115 Link channels 0 through 15 to resistance EU conversion 8KQ or greater OUTP CURR AMPL 488 6 148 149 150 157 Set 10 channels to output 488A for less than resistances SENS FUNC RES 488e 6 116 120 124 132 Link channels 16 20 and 24 through 32 to resistance EU conversion less than 8KQ 74 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 Linkin To link channels to temperature EU conversion send the pe Tem pe rature SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt Measurements 2 The ch list parameter specifies which channel s to link to the temperature EU conversion The sensor type parameter specifies RTD THERmistor or TC for Thermocouple The optional range parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified or set to zero the module uses autorange RTD and Thermistor Temperature measurements using resistance type sensors involve all the same Measurements considerations as resistance measurements discussed in the previous section See the discussion of Figure 3 2 in Linking Resistance Measurements For res
433. sk gt Page 262 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition es Page 263 SYSTem CTYPe lt Page 264 SYSTEM ERRO e ergo eL mouet Seiler dre A e Page 264 STe VERSION RARI s eu meu eR arr dg een gre Page 265 TRIGger COUNT is Ges He SOR ee E E ker e Rogo Page 268 TRIGE COUNTY xus dus unio Se Oa utar qx ue Rue dO AS Page 268 TRIGeer IMMediate s REGERE Pee URGE Bie eee yee Tae nea Page 269 IRIGgerSOURce SOHfCe ee nl a EUR hee Page 269 TRIGger SOURCE ois ses Luo enim de Ub SR pe S ELE e EPI Rn Page 270 TRIGger TIMer MODE lt gt Page 270 TMa MODE 5 nude eque Me Reo oes bie EIC REP P quss Page 272 TRIGger TIMer PERiod trig gt 2 Page 273 TRIGger LIMEr PERi6d Ge e ru Bye x EVE Rete RC Page 274 CATE ke BS GR eo ht 1 Page 275 ortos de Nhat ds seu qtd ehh le nds Se Sealer nad dioe Aue gre de moder No io OR Re usi On ee Page 276 DMC name scmd datas su Bad Ben end vau EIS ae ene an dee es utt Page 276 EMG enables t
434. st Causes an instrument to execute extensive internal self tests and returns a response showing the results of the self test Notes 1 During the first 5 minutes after power is applied TST may fail Allow the module to warm up before executing TST 2 Module must be screwed securely to mainframe 3 The HP E1413 C SCPI driver for MS DOS implements two versions of TST The default version is an abbreviated self test that executes only the Digital Tests By loading an additional object file you can execute the full self test as described in this section See the documentation that comes with the HP E1413 C SCPI driver for MS DOS Comments This command will cause Error 3000 illegal while initiated if trigger is initiated Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 TST OK None 1 TST Error Query the Error Queue SYSTem ERRor For Error 3052 see explanation below IF Error 3052 Self test failed Test info in FIFO is returned A FIFO value of 1 through 99 is a failed test number A value of 100 through 163 is a channel number for the failed test A value of 200 through 204 is an A D range number for the failed test where 200 0625 201 25V 202 1V 203 4 and 204 16V ranges For example SENS DATA FIFO returns the values 72 and 108 This indicates that test number 72 failed on channel 8 Test numbers 20 30 37 72 74 76 and 80 93 may indicate a pro
435. st and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal voltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC or an input out of range condition will exist e The CAL command calibrates temperature channels based on Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again Related Commands DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple RST Condition All custom EU tables are erased Usage Program must put table constants into array table block DIAG CUST PIEC 1 table_block 108 Send characterized reference transducer table for use by channel 8 SENS FUNC CUST REF 25 108 Link custom reference temperature EU with channel 8 Include this channel in a scan list with thermocouple channels REF channel first INITiate then TRIGger module SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple type range Q ch list links channels with the custom Engineering Unit Conversion table loaded with the DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise command The table is assumed to be fora thermocouple and the type parameter will specify the built in compensation voltage table to be used for reference junction temperature compensation SENSe
436. t SCP trigger A trigger was received from an SCP FIFO half full The FIFO contains at least 32768 readings Limit Test was exceeded Measurement complete The trigger system exited the wait for arm state and is checking for INITiate CONTinuous This clears the Measuring bit in the Operation Register These HP E1313 E1413 interrupts are not always enabled since under some circumstances this could be detrimental to the users system operation For example the scan complete SCP triggers FIFO half full and measurement complete interrupts could come repetitively at rates that would cause the operating system to be swamped processing interrupts In the C SCPI environment there are times when interrupts from the HP E1313 E1413 could cause problems with system function calls as described in the C SCPI User s Guide These conditions are dependent upon the user s overall system design therefore the driver allows the user to decide which if any interrupts will be enabled The way the user controls which interrupts will be enabled is via the OPC STATus OPERation ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle and STATus PRESet commands Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 129 Each of the interrupting conditions listed previously has a corresponding bit in the Questionable or Operation Registers If that bit is enabled via the STATus OPERation ENABle or STATus QUEStionable ENABle command to be a part of the group summar
437. t RESet FIFO DL ALL COUNt HALF HALF MODE BLOCK OVERwrite MODE PART lt readings RESet FILTer LPASs STATe ON OFF STATe Controls the connection of input LO on a Strain Bridge Opt 21 SCP Returns the LO connection for the Strain Bridge at channel Specify address of VME memory card to be used as reading storage Returns address of VME memory card Specify number of bytes of VME memory to be used to store readings Returns number of VME memory bytes allocate to reading storage Enable or disable reading storage in VME memory at INITiate IM Mediate Returns state of VME memory 1 enabled 0 disabled Set the Current Source SCP channel to 488 MAX or MIN Returns the setting of the Current Source SCP channel Enable or disable the Current Source SCP channels Returns the state of the Current Source SCP channel Adds shunt resistance to leg of Bridge Completion SCP channels Returns the state of the shunt resistor on Bridge Completion SCP channel Sets the internal trigger source that can drive the VXIbus TTLTrg lines Returns the source of TTLTrg drive When module triggered source VXIbus trigger on TTLTrg lt n gt Returns whether the TTL trigger line specified by n is enabled Set the Strain Bridge excitation voltage Option 21 Returns the setting of the setting of excitation voltage on SCP Selects the Scan List to be used in the next measurement set
438. t assumes you intend to use the implied command and it responds as if you had sent it Examine the INITiate subsystem shown below INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF IMMediate The second level command IMMediate is an implied command To set the instrument s trigger system to INITiate IMMediate you can send either of the following command statements INIT IMM or INIT Some commands will have what appears to be a variable syntax As an example OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe ON In these commands the lt n gt is replaced by number No space is left between the command and the number because the number is not a parameter The number is part of the command syntax The purpose of this notation is to save a great deal of space in the Command Reference In the case of TTLTrg lt n gt n can be from 0 through 7 An example command statement OUTPut TTLTrg2 STATe ON This section contains explanations and examples of parameter types you will see later in this chapter Parameter Types Explanations and Examples Numeric Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation 123 123E2 123 1 23E2 123 1 23E 2 1 23000E 01 Special cases include MIN MAX and INFinity A parameter that represents units may also include a units suffix These are Volts V mv 10 uv 10 Ohms ohm kohm 10 mohm 10 Seconds s msec 10 usec 10 Hert
439. t front and slide out tabs E1520 REMVLEFT 22 Getting Started Chapter 1 HP E1413 Step 2 Installing SCPs CAUTION Use approved Static Discharge handling procedures when handling the HP E1413 Scanning A D Module and the SCPs 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 E1520 INSLSCP Tighten the SCP Retaining Screws Align the SCP Connectors with the Module Connectors and then Push in Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 HP E1413 Step 3 Installing SCPs Reinstall the cover on the HP E1413 Line up the 3 Tabs with the 3 Slots then lower cover onto the Module 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ANI gt Tighten 2 Screws E1520 INSTLEFT 24 Getting Started Chapter 1 HP E1413 Step 4 Installing SCPs Apply label to the cover of the HP E1413 Peel off correct Label from Card and Stick on the appropriate place on the Cover Oy A SS Terminal Module Connect to A D Module Later SNOILONYLSNI Stick on Label furnished with the SCP HP part number E15xx 84304 Peel off Label from Card and Stick on the Terminal Module to be Connected to the A
440. t only needs to be done once The VME address land VME size must be copied to the memory panel The last thing done is to re boot the command module hich will take 10 sec sut E1406 30900 WRITE TEXT diag nram cre max EOL READ TEXT x REAL Formula 10000 Result AlphaNumeric 1832 212k E1406 30900 WRITE TEXT diag nram cre size EOL WRITE TEXT diag nram addr EOL VME add READ TEXT x STR x WRITE TEXT diag boot EOL 14680064 size Appendix E Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 397 Once the command module has been configured then use an HP E1413 instrument panel to configure the HP E1313 E1413 Execute this panel once to configure the HP E1313 E1413 Here is the panel with the memory subpanel showing Note that the VME Address and VME size has been copied to this panel HP VEE 1415 VEE Edit Flow Device Data Math Display Help Pang petit panel inibimlirzez the E1411 E13113 mccurding to LL af it s subpanels This reeds to be executed mch puwmr im cycled oc tha E1413 E1313 ia eser WHE E ebak rdg Time WHE Sira CHH HE Stata ee _____ 398 Using HP VEE with the HP E1313 E1413 Appendix E Before executing the above panel configure various subpanels Here is the Trigger subpanel Notice that 7000 s
441. t the noise from getting into the amplifier HP E1586 HP E1313 E1413 with Filter Option 001 110 dB CMR to 10 MHz SCSI cable Option _ SCSI to DIN Common Mode Noise Source configured removable jumper EE Note RC filter is a series 5 11KOhm resistor with a 220 pF capacitor to GND MB ECM DUT Ground Keeping Common Mode Noise Out of the Amplifier HP E1313 E1413 Ground rh Figure F 1 HF Common Mode Filters Most common mode noise is about 60 Hz so the differential amplifier rejection is very good The amplifier Common Mode Noise characteristics are 120 dB flat to 300 Hz then 20 dB octave rolloff The HP E1313 E1413 amplifiers are selected for low gain error offset temperature drift and low power These characteristics are generally incompatible with good high frequency CMR performance More expensive high performance amplifiers can solve this problem but since they are not required for many systems HP elected to handle this with the High Frequency Common Mode Filter option to the HP E1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel HP E1586 Option 001 HF Filter Appendix F Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods 403 Shielded twisted pair lead wire generally does a good job of keeping high frequency common mode noise out of the amplifier provided the shield is connected to the HP E1313 E1413 chassis ground through a very low impedance Not via the guard
442. tect OTD Output current enabling disabling 215 versus sense SCPs 35 OUTPut Subsystem 213 219 OUTP CURR AMPL 71 213 214 OUTP CURR STATe 71 215 OUTP CURR STATe 215 OUTP SHUNt STATe 216 OUTP SHUNt STATe 216 OUTP TTLTrg SOURCce 217 OUTP TTLTrg SOURce 218 OUTP TTLTrg STATe 218 OUTP TTLTrg STATe 218 OUTP VOLTage AMPLitude 219 OUTP VOLTage AMPLitude 219 Overflow Readings 416 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index avoiding 192 while autoranging 144 Overloads readings unexpected 140 P Pacing Measurements 226 227 PACKed 64 199 200 Parallel Component Examples 48 Parameter Registers 342 356 Parameters arbitrary block program data 156 boolean 155 C SCPI data types 158 channel list 155 discrete 155 numeric 154 optional 156 types of SCPI 154 Performing Channel Calibration Important 81 82 Pin out faceplate connector 63 64 option A3F connector 59 60 Planning grouping channels to signal conditioning 34 sense versus output SCPs 35 thermocouple wiring 36 wiring layout 33 PMC 279 Positive Transition Filter PTF Register See PTF Register Power Requirements 293 Power on default instrument settings 66 Preferred Measurement Connections 43 44 Programming different scan rates 121 filter cutoff 71 module after reset sequence 383 384 register based 333 384 sequence 67 90 382 384 PSPEEK 374 PTF Register bits query 258 263 bits setting 257 262 query
443. ter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 67 SYSTem CTYPe INPut LOW INPut FILTer INPut GAIN OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude OUTPut CURRent STATe OUTPut SHUNt OUTPut VOLTage DIAGnostic OTDetect Ch 00 74 SCP 0 Multiplexer Control S A z e e 5 EE I 5 SCP 1 a gt X SENSe FILTer 5 SENSe FILTer lt lt a 5 z z SCP IT gue 2 lt 3 Range Amp Input Filter AID due 8 Ch 23 gt 5 T 2 Ranges 12 kHz 2 o full scale V 16 E 4 lt 1 0 25 55 gt 0 0625 Sample gt Timer gt SCP S 7 Ch 63 2 SCP Trigger CAL CALibration SETup SETup Cal O O Voltage Source CALibration CONFigure RESistance 4 CALibration CONFigure VOLTage Cal Resistor CALibration VALue RESistance CALibration VALue VOLTage Cal Zero CALibration STORe CALibration ZERO V Continued on Next Page Figure 3 1 SCPI Programming Overview 68 Using the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 3 VXI Inte
444. ter Based Programming About This Appendix Note Except where noted all references to the HP E1413 apply to the HP E1313 The HP E1413 64 Channel Scanning A D Module is a register based module which does not support the VXIbus word serial protocol When a SCPI command is sent to the module the HP E1406A Command Module Series C parses the command and programs the module at the register level The same is true for HP Compiled SCPI programming in the C language In this case the SCPI commands are pre processed by C SCPI and replaced with function calls to driver libraries that perform register programming HP has a C language function library for the HP E1413 that provides virtually the same functionality as its SCPI command set The library is provided as C language source code that you can modify as necessary and compile to run on your controller Documentation and example files are provided with the library Using these library functions is by far the fastest and most productive way to register program the HP E1413 Contact your HP sales representative for more information This appendix contains the information you need for register based programming The contents include e Table of Registers Page 335 e Register 4 Page 336 Register Based Command Reference Page 356 System Commands AVGRDGS 2 RR ee E ERES Page 35
445. the GND terminal A single point shield to ground connection is required to prevent ground loops This point should be as near to the noise source as possible and this is usually at the DUT Wiri ng Checklist The following lists some recommended wiring techniques 1 Use individually shielded twisted pair wiring for each channel 2 Connect the shield of each wiring pair to the corresponding Guard G terminal on the terminal module 3 The terminal module is shipped with the Ground Guard GND GRD shorting jumper installed for each channel These may be left installed or removed dependent on the following conditions a Grounded Transducer with shield connected to ground at the transducer Low frequency ground loops DC and or 50 60 Hz can result if the shield is also grounded at the terminal module end To prevent this remove the GND GRD jumper for that channel b Floating Transducer with shield connected to the transducer at the source In this case the best performance will most likely be achieved by leaving the GND GRD jumper in place 4 In general the GND GRD jumper can be left in place unless it is necessary to break low frequency below 1 kHz ground loops Appendix F Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods 401 HP E1313 E1413 The E1313 E1413 guard connection provides a 10 KW current limiting Guard Connections resistor between the guard terminals and E1313 E1413 chassis ground for each 8 channel SCP bank T
446. the current pulls the HIGH inputs toward 17 volts and the LOW inputs towards 17 volts If a transducer is open measuring that channel will return an over voltage reading OTD is available on a per SCP basis All eight channels of an SCP are enabled or disabled together See Figure 4 9 for a simplified schematic diagram of the OTD circuit 1 When OTD is enabled the inputs have up to 0 2UA injected into them If this current will adversely affect your measurement but you still want to check for open transducers you can enable OTD make a single scan check the CVT for bad measurements then disable OTD and make your regular measurement scans The specifications apply Signal Input only when OTD is off Signal Conditioning Plug on When Filtering is enabled allow 15 seconds for the filter capacitors to charge before checking for open transducers Multiplexer High 17V 100M 100M o o High Low 0 Low Figure 4 9 Simplified Open Transducer Detect Circuit Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 141 To enable or disable Open Transducer Detection use the DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt command The enable parameter can specify ON or OFF SCP is addressed when the cA list parameter specifies a channel number contained on the SCP The first channel on each SCP is 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 and 56 To enable Open Transducer Dete
447. the module resumes scanning INITiate CONTinuous must be OFF to keep the instrument in the trigger idle state after an ABORT The recommended method of ending the continuous scanning mode is to execute INITiate CONTinuous OFF and check the Measuring bit bit 4 with STATus OPERation CONDition Related Commands INITiate commands TRIGger commands RST Condition TRIGger SOURce HOLD INITiate CONTinuous OFF Usage ABORt If INITiated goes to trigger idle state If scanning stops and goes to trigger idle state will return to wait for trigger state if INITiate CONTinuous is ON Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 159 ARM ARM With the HP E1313 E1413 when the TRIGger SOURce is set to TIMer an ARM event must occur to start the timer When INITiate CONTinuous is set to ON and the TRIGger SOURce is set to IMMediate called the continuous mode an ARM event must occur to start scanning This can be something as simple as executing the ARM IMMediate command or it could be another event selected by ARM SOURce Note ARM SOURCe is related to TRIGger SOURce and INITiate CONTinuous and can in certain settings generate Error 221 Settings conflict See the note on page 266 for details The ARM command subsystem provides Animmediate software ARM ARM IMMediate Selection of the ARM SOURce source source be BUS EXTernal HOLD IMMediate SCP TTLTrg lt m gt when TRIGger
448. the reference temperature sensor e The sensor type parameter can specify THERmistor RTD or CUSTom This is a resistance temperature measurement and uses the on board 122 current source for all types The sub type parameter must specify For RTDs 85 or 92 for 100 Ohm RTDs with 0 00385 0 00392 Ohms Ohm Degree C temperature coefficients respectively For Thermistors only 5000 See previous note on page 75 For CUSTom only 1 contact your HP Field Engineer for Custom EU algorithms The optional range parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified or set to AUTO the module uses autorange To set channel 12 to measure the isothermal reference temperature on the HP E1413 s terminal module with built in 5 000 Ohm thermistor send SENS REF THER 5000 91 12 On board thermistor connected to channel 12 Chapter 3 Using the HP E1313 E1413 77 The same command could set channel 12 to measure a 5K thermistor mounted on a remote reference block See Reference Temperature Sensing with the HP E1313 on page 40 or Reference Temperature Sensing with the HP E1413 on page 41 for connections Supplying a Fixed The SENse REFerence TEMPerature degrees c command Reference Temperature immediately stores the set temperature of a controlled temperature reference junction panel in the Reference Temperature Register The value is applied to all subsequent thermocouple cha
449. tic CUSTom LINear or DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise commands Contact your Hewlett Packard System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for your application Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric float32 0625 25 1 4 16 VDC See Comments below ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The range parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 causes Error 222 Data out of range to occur Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FiLTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal voltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gai
450. tions The crimp and insert connector is shown in Figure 2 21 The pin numbering on the crimp and insert connector may not agree with the pin numbering on the HP E1413 s faceplate connector Use the pin numbering on the faceplate connector to wire the crimp and insert connector Figure 2 21 Crimp and Insert Connector 56 Field Wiring Chapter 2 Crimp and Insert Terminal Module Accessories Single Conductor and Contact Shielded Twisted Pair and Contacts Jumper Wire and Contacts Crimp and Insert Contacts Crimp and Insert Tools Extra Crimp and Insert Connectors The following accessories are necessary for use with crimp and insert Option A3E A crimp and insert contact is crimped onto one end of a wire The other end is not terminated Order HP 91510A Length 2 meters Wire Gauge 24 AWG Quantity 50 each Insulation Rating 105 C maximum Voltage 300 V A crimp and insert contact is crimped onto each conductor at one end of a shielded twisted pair cable The other end is not terminated Order HP 91511A Length 2 meters Wire Gauge 24 AWG Outside Diameter 0 1 inches Quantity 25 each Insulation Rating 250 C maximum Voltage 600 V A crimp and insert contact is crimped onto each end of a single conductor jumper wire This jumper is typically used to tie two pins together in a single crimp and insert connector Order HP 91512A These contacts may be crimped onto a conductor and then insert
451. tions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the product Hewlett Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground the equipment For Safety Class 1 equipment equipment having a protective earth terminal an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse s only with fuse s of the same voltage and current rating and type DO NOT use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service trained personnel only Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the equipment switched off To avoid dangerous electrical shock DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified to do so DO NOT operate damaged equipment Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this product have been im paired either through physical damage excessive moisture or any other reason REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until safe operat
452. trig interval PERiod Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 267 TRIGger TRIGger COUNt TRIGger COUNt rig count sets the number of times the module can be triggered before it returns to the Trigger Idle State The default count is 1 returns to Idle State after each trigger See Figure 5 6 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt trig_count gt numeric uint16 0 to 65535 INF none string Comments When lt trig_count gt is set to 0 or INF the trigger counter is disabled Once INITiated the module will return to the Wait for Trigger State after each trigger event The ABORt preferred and RST commands will return the module to the Trigger Idle State ABORt is preferred since RST also returns other module configurations to their default settings The module will not change Scan Lists until the trigger count is completed See Figure 5 3 on page 221 The default count is 1 Related Commands TRIGger COUNt ROUTe SCAN LIST1 LIST4 RST Condition TRIGger COUNt 1 Usage TRIG COUN 10 Set the module to make 10 passes through a Scan List TRIG COUN 0 Set the module to accept unlimited triggers TRIGger COUNt TRIGger COUNt returns the currently set trigger count Comments If TRIGger COUNt returns 0 the trigger counter is disabled and the module will accept an unlimited number of trigger events Returned Value Numeric 0 through 65
453. ts created during CALibration TARE are stored in and are usable from the instrument s RAM If you want the Tare constants to be stored in non volatile Flash Memory you can execute the CALibration STORe TARE command The HP E1313 E1413 s Flash Memory has a finite lifetime of approximately ten thousand write cycles unlimited read cycles While executing CALibration STORe once every day would not exceed the lifetime of the Flash Memory for approximately 27 years an application that stored constants many times each day would unnecessarily shorten the Flash Memory s lifetime If you wish to undo the CALibration TARE operation you can execute CALibration TARE RESet then CAL CALibration SETup If current Tare calibration constants have been stored in Flash Memory execute CALibration TARE RESet then CALibration STORe TARE Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 139 Special Considerations Maximum Tare Here are some things to keep in mind when using CALibration TARE The tare value that can be compensated for is dependent on the instrument Capability range and SCP channel gain settings The following table lists these limits Table 4 6 Maximum CALibration TARE Offsets A D range Offset V Offset V Offset V Offset V V F Scale Gain x1 Gain x8 Gain x16 Gain x64 16 3 2213 40104 20009 04970 4 82101 10101 05007 01220 1 23061 02721 01317 00297 25 07581 00786 00349 00055 0625 03792 00312 00112
454. uct herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Tested in a typical configuration in an HP B Size VXI mainframe November 25 1994 QA Manager European contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Herrenberger Strafe 130 D 71034 B blingen Germany FAX 49 703 1 14 3143 HP E1313A E1413C Users Manual 11 Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Loveland Manufacturing Center Manufacturer s Address 815 14th Street S W Loveland Colorado 80537 declares that the product Product Name 64 Channel Scanning A D Converter Model Number HP E1413C Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 Incl Amend 1 1992 EN61010 1 1993 CSA C22 2 1010 1 1992 UL 3111 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A 801 2 1991 EN50082 1 1992 4 CD 8 AD TEC 801 3 1984 EN50082 1 1992 3V m 801 4 1988 EN50082 1 1992 Power Line 0 5kV Signal Lines Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC inclusive 93 68 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly Tested in a typical configuration in an HP C Size VXI mainfr
455. ule Option A3E and an interface to rack mount terminal panel Option A3F is available for the HP E1313 and HP E1413 see page 56 The terminal module provides the following Terminal connections to field wiring Strain relief for the wiring bundle Reference junction temperature sensing for thermocouple measurements Ground to Guard connections for each channel The same terminal is used for all field wiring regardless of which Signal Conditioning Plug on SCP is used Each SCP includes a set of labels to map that SCP s channels to the terminal module s terminal blocks See Step 4 on page 21 for the HP E1313 terminal module and page 25 for the HP E1413 terminal module Figure 2 3 shows the HP E1313 terminal module and Figure 2 4 shows the HP E1413 terminal module Chapter 2 Field Wiring 37 Terminal Block for Input Connections CHOO CHO CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 32 33 34 35 FOR CHANNELS 32 63 USE 40 4 42 43 44 CH10 1 CH12 36 CH06 38 HLGHLGHLGHLGHL G
456. unter RIG COUNT ARM Event 2 Waiting For Timer Trigger Reset and Start Timer Execute Scan gt and Increment Trig Counter Figure 5 7 Asynchronous Mode Sequence e Use TRIGger TIMer MODE SYNC with INITiate CONTinuous ON when you want to be able to change the Scan List while performing synchronously timed scans In SYNC mode a Timer Arm event immediately triggers a scan and starts the timer When the trigger count is reached and INITiate CONTinuous is ON the trigger timer continues running the current Scan List is read and the module returns to wait for the next Timer trigger See Figure 5 8 for operation Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 271 TRIGger Trigger Idle A State Sets Current Scan List Here Timer Stopped Initiated State INIT CONT OFF mc Me I Mei Both paths inside this box are Waiting For assured of evenly timed Timer Arm scans This allows changing yes the Scan Lists for instance ARM Event and the new list will start executing synchronously with the old list Reset and Start Timer Scan List Here 1 1 4 Trig Counter TRIG COUNT 2 Waiting For Timer Trigger 1 1 Timer 1 1 1 1 Execute Scan p and Increm
457. urrent Source setting that must be used for the following RTDs and Thermistors Required Current Temperature Sensor Types and Amplitude Subtypes 488A for RTD and THER 2250 MIN 301A for THER 5000 and THER 10000 See Linking Channels to EU Conversion in Chapter 3 for more information The range parameter The HP E1413 has five ranges 0625 VDC 25 VDC 1 VDC 4 VDC and 16 VDC To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 VDC range If you specify a value larger than one of the first four ranges the HP E1413 selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 VDC range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates Error 222 Data out of range Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0625 VDC Specifying AUTO selects autorange The default range no range parameter specified is autorange Autorange is not allowed while SENSe FILTer LPASs STATe is ON Error 3072 Autorange not allowed with SENSE FILTER on will be generated at INITiate IMMediate time if the filter is ON and any channel specifies autorange range may be specified in millivollts mv If you are using amplifier SCPs you should set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if your expected signal voltage is to be approximately 1 VDC and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 you must set range no lower than 1 VDC o
458. us Byte Register and issues an SRQ to the computer sets the HP IB SRQ line true You enable an event by specifying its decimal weight for mask To enable more than one event specify the sum of the decimal weights Refer to Figure 4 6 for an illustration showing the contents of the Status Byte Group The C SCPI type for mask is int16 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Weighted Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Event Operation Request Standard Message Questionable not used not used not used Status Service Event Available Status SRE STB TRG Status Register Enable Query Returns the weighted sum of all enabled unmasked events those enabled to assert SRQ in the Status Byte Register The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Status Byte Register Query Returns the weighted sum of all set bits in the Status Byte Register Refer to the command on page 277 for a table showing the contents of the Status Byte Register STB does not clear bit 6 Service Request The Message Available bit bit 4 may be cleared as a result of reading the response to STB The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Trigger Command Triggers an instrument when the trigger source is set to bus TRIGger SOURce BUS command and the instrument is in the Wait for Trigger state 280 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 TST Common Command Reference Self Te
459. used for external signal sensing but are paired with channels of a sense SCP Two points to remember about mixing output and sense SCPs 1 Paired SCPs an output and a sense SCP may reside in separate HP E1313 E1413s SCP outputs are adjusted by CAL to be within a specific limit The Engineering Unit EU conversion used for a sense channel will assume the calibrated value for the output channel 2 Output SCPs while providing stimulus to your measurement circuit reduce the number of external sense channels available to your HP E1313 E1413 Figure 2 2 illustrates an example of pairing output SCP channels with sense SCP channels in this example four wire resistance measurements sense Hi Note Each channel line represents both a sense Lo Hi and Lo input 5 Ch 24 SCP Lh _ 3 Ih m 2 Ch 31 5 Ch 32 SCP 4 output Ch 39 Terminal Module Figure 2 2 Pairing Output and Sense SCP Channels Chapter 2 Field Wiring 35 Planning for Thermocouple Measurements Note IMPORTANT You can wire your thermocouples and your thermocouple reference temperature sensor to any of the HP E1313 E1413 channels When you execute your scan list you only have to make sure that the reference temperature sensor is specified in the channel sequence
460. value The C SCPI type returned is int32 Usage DIAG QUERy SCPREAD 192 Read SCP s ID Register Enter statement here Return SCP ID value Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 195 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic VERSion DIAGnostic VERSion returns the version of the firmware currently loaded into Flash Memory The version information includes manufacturer model serial number firmware version and date Comments Returned Value Examples of the response string format HEWLETT PACKARD 1413 US34000478 A 04 00 Thu Aug 5 9 38 07 MDT 1994 HEWLETT PACKARD E1313_32CH US35000134 A 04 00 Thu Aug 25 15 11 20 MDT 1994 gt The C SCPI type returned is string Related Commands IDN Usage DIAG VERS Returns version string as shown above 196 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 FETCh Subsystem Syntax FETCh The FETCh command returns readings stored in VME memory Comments This command is only available in systems using an HP E1405B or HP E1406A Command Module e FETCh does not alter the readings stored in VME memory Only the RST or INITiate commands will clear the readings in VME memory The format of readings returned is set using the FORMat DATA command Returned Value REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary
461. value controls whether Engineering Unit conversion is performed and the internal destination of the resulting value 222 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 ROUTe The following table explains the effect of the Channel Data Modifier Channel Data Modifier Description 1 Perform EU conversion and store result in both FIFO buffer and Current Value Table 2 Leave measurement as voltage and store result in both FIFO and CVT 3 Perform EU conversion and store result in CVT only 4 Leave measurement as voltage and store in CVT only 5 Perform EU conversion and store result in FIFO only 6 Leave measurement as voltage and store in FIFO only 7 Leave measurement as voltage and do not store result in either FIFO or CVT Use as dummy channel set Limit Checking CALCulate LIMit cannot be performed on channels that are not converted to Engineering Units Both the standard and relative channel specification modes can be mixed within a Scan List definition For example ROUTe SEQuence DEFine LIST1 100 115 6 00 15 specifies that the readings taken on channels 0 through 15 are to be converted into engineering units and stored in both the FIFO data buffer and the Current Value Table CVT In addition channels 0 through 15 are to be read and the raw voltage values are to be added to the FIFO buffer The FIFO will contain 16 conve
462. value of excitation voltage The C SCPI type returned is f1t32 channel must specify a single channel only e Related Commands SENSe STRain EXCitation 248 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SENSe Usage SENS STRAIN EXC 9107 Query excitation voltage for channel 7 Enter statement here Returns the excitation voltage set by STR EXC SENSe STRain GFACtor SENSe STRain GFACtor gage gt lt list specifies the gage factor to be used to convert strain bridge readings for the channels specified by cA list Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units gage factor numeric float32 1 5 none ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments c list must specify the channel used to sense the bridge voltage not the channel position on a Bridge Completion SCP Related Commands SENSe STRain GFACtor SENSe FUNCtion STRain commands RST Condition Gage factor is 2 Usage STRAIN GFAC 3 100 107 Set gage factor for channels 0 through 7 SENSe STRain GFACtor SENSe STRain GFACtor lt channel gt returns the gage factor currently set for the sense channel specified by channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only R
463. ve transition of this bit in the Status Operation Event Register you would send STAT OPER PTR 32766 All ones in Positive Transition Filter Register except bit 0 0 STAT OPER NTR 1 All zeros in Negative Transition Filter Register except bit 0 1 Now when CAL completes and Operation Condition Register bit zero goes from 1 to 0 Operation Event Register bit zero will become a 1 126 Understanding the HP E1313 E1413 Chapter 4 Reading the To check if any enabled events have occurred in the Status system you first Status Byte read the Status byte using the 5782 command If the Status byte is all zeros there is no summary information being sent from any of the Status groups If the Status byte is other than zero one or more enabled events have occurred You interpret the Status byte bit values and take further action as follows Bit 3 QUE Read the Questionable Data Group s Event Register bit value 810 using the STATus QUEStionable EVENt command This returns bit values for events which have occurred in this group After reading the Event Register is cleared Note that bits in this group indicate error conditions If bit 8 9 or 10 is set error messages will be found in the Error Queue If bit 7 is set error messages will be in the error queue following the next RST or cycling of power Use the SYSTem ERRor command to read the error s Bit 4 MAV There is a message available in the Output Queue You bit value 161
464. waits 144 146 sequenced lists 113 stopping immediately 159 timer paced 112 two reference temperature channels 42 SCBREAD 360 SCBWRITE 360 362 420 HP E1313A E1413C User s Manual Index SCP See Signal Conditioning Plug ons SCPCHAR 372 SCPGAINS 372 SCPI Commands abbreviated 153 ABORt subsystem 159 arbitrary block program data parameters 156 ARM subsystem 160 162 boolean parameters 155 CALCulate subsystem 163 174 CALibration subsystem 175 186 channel list parameters 155 DIAGnostic subsystem 187 196 discrete parameters 155 FETCh command 197 198 format 153 FORMa at subsystem 199 201 implied 154 index 149 INITiate subsystem 202 203 INPut subsystem 204 208 linking 157 lower case letters 153 subsystem 209 212 numeric parameters 154 optional parameters 156 OUTPut subsystem 213 219 parameter types 154 quick reference 284 290 reference 158 ROUTe subsystem 220 225 SAMPle subsystem 226 227 SENSe Subsystem 228 251 separator 153 square brackets 154 156 STATus subsystem 252 263 subsystem example of 153 SYSTem subsystem 264 265 TRIGger subsystem 266 274 upper case letters 153 SCPTRIGEN 373 Selecting current scan list 84 220 221 FIFO mode 89 233 See also Setting timer arm source 87 trigger source 86 Self Test and C SCPI for MS DOS R 281 error messages 327 how to read results 281 TST command 281 283 SENSe Subsystem 228 251 SENS DATA C
465. y bit it will also enable the HP E1313 E1413 interrupt for that condition If that bit is not enabled the corresponding interrupt will be disabled Sending the STATus PRESet command will disable all the interrupts from the HP E1313 E1413 Sending the OPC command will enable the measurement complete interrupt Once this interrupt is received and the OPC condition sent to the Status system this interrupt will be disabled if it was not previously enabled via the STATus OPERation ENABle or STATus QUEStionable ENABle command The above description is always true for a downloaded driver In the C SCPI driver however the interrupts will only be enabled if cscpi overlap mode is ON when the enable command is given If cscpi overlap is OFF the user is indicating they do not want interrupts to be enabled Any subsequent changes to cscpi overlap will not change which interrupts are enabled Only sending OPC STATus OPERation ENABle or STATus QUEStionable ENABle with cscpi overlap ON will enable interrupts In addition the user can enable or disable all interrupts via the SICL calls iintron and iintroff See the C SCPI Users Guide for more details on the overlapped mode and using interrupts in the C SCPI environment HP E1313 E1413 Background Operation The HP E1313 E1413 inherently runs its measurements and calibration in the background mode with no interaction required from the driver All resources needed to run the measurements a
466. ype install at channel 0 SYSTem ERRor SYSTem ERRor returns the latest error entered into the Error Queue Comments SYSTem ERRor returns one error message from the Error Queue returned error is removed from queue To return all errors in the queue repeatedly execute SYSTem ERRor until the error message string 0 No error Returned Value Errors are returned in the form lt error number error message string RST Condition Error Queue is empty 264 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 SYSTem Usage SYST ERR Returns the next error message from the Error Queue SYSTem VERSion SYSTem VERSion returns the version of SCPI this instrument complies with Comments Returned Value String 1990 The C SCPI type returned is string Usage SYST VER Returns 1990 Chapter 5 HP E1313 E1413 Command Reference 265 TRIGger TRIGger The TRIGger command subsystem controls the behavior of the trigger system once it is initiated see INITiate command subsystem Figure 5 5 shows the overall Trigger System model The shaded area shows the ARM subsystem portion Only while INIT CONT is ON amp TRIG SOUR is IMM TRIGger SOURce source Note 8 8 BUS 8 5 External gt itema HOLD 8 Trigger gger Signa 2 8 IMMediate 2 Enable TTLTrg lt n gt o scp Tii 8 lt gt T
467. z khz 10 mhz 10 ghz 10 The Comments section within the Command Reference 154 HP 1313 1413 Command Reference Chapter 5 Boolean Discrete Channel List Standard Form Channel List Relative Form will state whether a numeric parameter can also be specified in hex octal and or binary H7B Q173 B1111011 Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false ON OFF 1 0 Selects from a finite number of values These parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting An example is the ROUTe SCAN scan list command where scan list can be LIST1 LIST2 LISTS or LISTA The general form of a single channel specification is ccnn where cc represents the card number and nn represents the channel number Since the HP E1413 has only one card the card number cc will always be 1 and the channel number nn can range from 00 to 63 Some example channel specifications channel 0 100 channel 5 105 channel 54 154 The General form of a channel range specification is colon separator the second channel must be greater than the first Example channels 0 through 15 100 115 By using commas to separate them individual and range specifications can be combined into a single channel list 0 5 6 through 32 and 45 100 105 106 132 145 The SCPI Relative Channel specification syntax is cc nn nn nn nn where cc card number and nn
468. zation Weighted Bit Register queries are returned using decimal weighted bit values Enable Registers Values can be set using decimal hex octal or binary The following table can be used to help set Enable Registers using decimal and decode register queries Status System Decimal Weighted Bit Values bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 76543210 value always 0 16 384 8 192 4 096 2 048 1 024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Chapter 5 E1313 E1413 Command Reference 253 STATus The Ope ration Operation Status Group indicates the current operating state of the HP E1413 Status Group See Table 5 3 for the bit assignments Table 5 3 Operation Status Group Bit Dec Value Hex Value Bit Name Description 0 1 000116 Calibrating Set by CALibration ITARE and CALibration SETup Cleared by CALibration TARE and 4 16 001016 Measuring CALibration SETup Set while CAL executes and reset when CAL completes Set by CALibration CONFigure VOLTage or CALibration CONFigure RESistance Cleared by CALibration VALue VOLTage or CALibration VALue RESistance Set when instrument INITiated Cleared when instrument returns to Trigger Idle State 8 256 010016 Scan Complete Set when each pass through a Scan List completed may not indicate all measurements have been taken when INITiate CONTinuous is

HP E1413C/E1313A High Speed A/D User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents